Skip to main content

Full text of "An open door to Cæsar"

See other formats 


Google 



This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project 

to make the world's books discoverable online. 

It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject 

to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books 

are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover. 

Marks, notations and other maiginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the 

publisher to a library and finally to you. 

Usage guidelines 

Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the 
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing tliis resource, we liave taken steps to 
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying. 
We also ask that you: 

+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for 
personal, non-commercial purposes. 

+ Refrain fivm automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine 
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the 
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help. 

+ Maintain attributionTht GoogXt "watermark" you see on each file is essential for in forming people about this project and helping them find 
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it. 

+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just 
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other 
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of 
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner 
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liabili^ can be quite severe. 

About Google Book Search 

Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers 
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web 

at |http: //books .google .com/I 



SCHOOL OF EDUCATION 
LIBRARY 



TEXTBOOK 
COLLECTION 



STANFORD V^p/ UNIVERSITY 
LIBRARIES 



An open door to Ccesar 



THE 



BEGINNER'S C^SAR 



BEING MAINLY THE SIMPLIFIED TEXT OF THE 
BELLUM HELVETICUM OF THb COMMENTARIES 



BY 

HARRISON DICKINSON CANNON 

Ph.B.f Cornell University 




Second Edition, R^jU6^^atid-£ja]arj;ed.,, 

^ EDUCATION 

k Fhl] 2 ipir, \ 

(} LELAND STA!^:'~ORD >) 

^ JUNIOR UNIVE/^SITY () 

NEW YORK CITY 

HINDS AND NOBLE, PUBLISHERS 

31-33-35 West 15TH Street 

1903 



1 

\ 



597392 
C 

Copyright, 1900, 
Bt HARRISON D. CANNON. 



Copyright, J903, 
Bt hinds and NOBLE. 



TO MY DAUGHTER 

REGINA 

THIS BOOK IS 
LOVINGLY INSCRIBED 



PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION 

This book is the outcome of a close personal experience, 
both as pupil and teacher, of the difficulties attendant upon 
the initiation of classes in the reading of Caesar. 

The late report of the Committee of Twelve of the 
American Philological Association but verifies a matter of 
general repute among the profession in these words: 
" Some opposition has been made to the study of Caesar 
as being too difficult for students in the second year of the 
course. But to omit Ccesar would be a retrograde step in 
the framing of Latin programs,^"* But despite the fact that 
they hereby state a truth of common knowledge, the words 
exert a new and powerful force by the prestige of the hon- 
orable members of that committee. Educational influences 
which come from such men as constituted that board are 
resistless on whatsoever they may be brought to bear. 
Lovers of the classics, and especially of the cause of 
Caesar for the service it has so long performed, need have 
no anxiety. For those influences are now being directed 
full in favor of maintaining, nay in advancing, the classics 
as essential factors in the education of to-day. And sta- 
tistics witness the success of these efforts for classicism. 
Figures show that in the last nine years, i89o-'99, the 
study of Latin " has gained at a rate greater than that of 
any other secondary-school study." As a means of com- 
parison, the report shows in Latin an increase of i*j^ per 
cent, in German 131, in Greek 94, in Chemistry 65. " It 



VI PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION 

is encouraging to friends of classical study to notice that 
in 1898 almost one-half (49.44 per cent) of all the pupils 
enrolled in the secondary-schools were engaged in the 
study of Latin. '^ 

From this it is clear that the question before us is not 
what^ but how. Caesar must remain. But how is it to be 
made easier for beginners? This book, embodying an 
analytic method in the interpretaition of the text, is the 
author's answer to the question. 

The Committee suggests that first-year classes read 
twenty to thirty pages of easy Latin toward the close of 
the year. It has been difficult for teachers to obtain such 
matter — at once easy and consecutive and pertinent to 
the immediate end in view. The aim of this book is to 
supply it. The treatment of the pupil during this transi- 
tion is important. From now on his attention should be 
drawn closely to the systematic study of connected dis- 
course, at first simple and concise, but gradually approach- 
ing and finally reaching the level of Caesar's own. And 
in connection with this reading, the pupil is in a condition 
to profit by a thorough drill from the text in all the mech- 
anism of word-forms — parts, conjugation, declension^ 
comparison — syntax, translation at sight and hearing, and, 
above all, reproduction of the Latin, after the method w'hich 
has come down to us from that most renowned teacher of 
his age, Johann Sturm of Strasburg. The lesson-book 
should be laid aside. It has done its work. With the 
teacher as a guide, the student needs no other print than 
the book now before him. 

Attention need hardly be called to the striking feature 
of the work. By a careful method of analysis the reader 



PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION VU 

is led gradually and easily through the difficulties of 

Caesar's complex constructions to the text, toto in se^ of the 

Commentaries. 

The author's one purpose is to join the multitude of 

lovers of classic literature in their effort to open the way 

more and more to the fountain-head of those forces that 

are still moulding the very life of the world. 



PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION 

The success of the earlier edition of The Beginner's 
Ccesar warrants its reappearance in this new and enlarged 
form. Many extra features have been added, and original 
parts extended. 

An examination of the text will justify the Author's 
choice of the motto — repetitio mater est studiorum. The 
pupil is led step by step through that which becomes 
familiar by repetition to the verbatim sentence of Caesar. 

Throughout the text are exegetical references to the 
appropriate rules and examples. These rules and exam- 
ples the pupil should at once memorize. This done, he 
has not the foundation alone, but much of the superstruc- 
ture of syntax of his entire future course in Latin. 

The English-Latin composition consists of two parts, 
the one preferably for oral recitation, the other for careful 
written work. Both being based upon the text, they will 
require no special vocabulary. The one part may be 
found too easy for older classes, the other too difficult for 
younger pupils. Governed by the needs of the class, the 
tactful teacher will find the golden mean. 

The Notes are intentionally full. The purpose has been 
constantly in mind to make them interesting and attractive 
and thus stimulating. Through them, supplemented by 
pleasing fact and anecdote from the teacher's fund of 
information and experience, the pupil may be brought to 
the appreciation and enjoyment of classical study. Let 

• •• 

vm 



PRE FA CE TO THE SECOND EDITION IX 

the class be attentive to these Notes every day. Then the 
habit of critical study will be formed, and from it will 
develop a facility of comprehension that will be productive 
of good to them in all they do. We vilify classical train- 
ing in our condemnation of that which is classical in 
name only, not in spirit and method. If such study fail 
of its purpose of culture, the fault lies rather in manner 
than matter. To gain the full culture-value of the study 
of the classics, we must combine their historical treatment 
with thorough drill in construction and syntax. The one 
vivifies the past, making it real as the living present ; the 
other sharpens the mental faculties, making us more the 
man. The one makes for refinement, the other for disci- 
pline — a combination which renders the classics the 
best mould of life in our school-rooms to-day. 

Thanks are due Professors Burr and De Garmo of Cor- 
nell University, J. Edward Banta, Superintendent of the 
Binghamton city schools, Frank D. Blodgett of the chair 
of Latin and Greek in the State Normal School of Oneonta, 
New York, and to the many High School and Academic 
teachers ever)rwhere, — all of whom have spoken of the 
book in the heartiest and kindliest manner and thus lent 
encouragement to this larger work, — to all these the 
Author wishes to extend his most sincere gratitude. 

To Mr. Archibald A. Maclardy, the author of " The 
Completely Parsed Cicero and Virgil," I wish to publicly 
express my appreciation of the professional service ren- 
dered me. His critical examination of the first edition of 
my book, and his helpful and encouraging suggestions, 
have done much toward this revision. 

To my Publishers, too, who have given me full rein, 



X PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION 

who have made absolutely no restrictions, in the enjoyment 
of which unusual privilege I have inserted every sort of 
matter of interest, value, and convenience that any teacher 
can reasonably ask, my thanks and the thanks of all edu- 
cators are due. 

May old friends recognize " The Beginner's Caesar " in 
its new dress, and new friends receive it kindly. 

HARRISON DICKINSON CANNON. 
Skftxmber 1, 1903. 



TABLE OF CONTENTS 

Pagb 

I. Introduction : CiCSAR in Gaul .... xiii 

II. Outline of Caesar's Life xvii 

III. Map of Gaul xxi 

IV. Simplified and verbatim Text of the "Bel- 

LUM HeLVETICUM/* CHAPTERS I-XXIX . . I-48 

V. English-Latin Exercises 49 

VI. Rules of Syntax 75 

VII. Notes loi 

VIII. Tables of Declension and Conjugation . 135 

IX. Vocabulary 167 



C-ESAR IN GAUL 

To the student of Caesar, the politician, there is much 
in his life previous to his proconsular appointment to Gaul 
that is of essential value. In fact, in this first half of that 
great man's life, the student will find his greatest interest, 
if he aims to know the rungs in that ladder of ambition 
by which he climbed to the highest honor in the power of 
the Roman Republic to bestow. 

To the student of Caesar, the general and writer of the 
" Commentaries," Plutarch gives the cue when he says 
that with his work in Gaul Caesar began a new life, fol- 
lowing lines of action different from the old. With the 
beginning of this changed activity, in this second act, as 
it were, of his play of life, we find our interest as readers 
of the Gallic wars. 

By the lex Vatinta, the people gave to Caesar, in b. c. 
58, the government of Cisalpine Gaul and Ill)nicum for 
five years, with three legions. The Senate immediately 
added Transalpine Gaul and another legion. Scarcely 
had he completed arrangements for departure, when word 
was brought to him of disturbances among the tribes in 
the eastern portion, now Switzerland. It was the middle 
of March. Caesar set out instantly. By the first of April, 
B. c. 58, he had begun his marvelous military career, and 
by the following June had won his first campaign. The 
story of this achievement is given in the first twenty-nine 

• •• 

xm 



XIV CjESAr in ga ul 

chapters of Book I, the simplified and verbatim text of 
which the student is now about to read. This first cam- 
paign is called the " Helvetian War," from the name of 
the nation which occasioned it. Its details the student 
will best gather from the careful perusal of Caesar's ac- 
count 

A considerable part of the subsequent history of Csesar 
in Gaul will be read in the pupil's future course. Ekiring 
those eight years, he took eight hundred cities by assault, 
oonquered three hundred tribes, and fought pitched battles 
at different times with three millions of men, two-thirds of 
whom were either killed or sold into slavery. His was 
pioneer work for Rome in the northwest; for his army 
was the first to penetrate Gaul and Britain, to cross into 
the German wilds, to sail the Atlantic -^ and the dash and 
daring of it all wrought such fear in the barbarians that 
they kept aloof from Rome for centuries. 

As we peruse the account of his first campaign, we shaU 
begin to feel the ability, energy, and tact of the man, which 
feeling will grow, as we read on, into a full sense of his 
gigantic genius. Then with his admirers in all ages and 
natious we shall join in sincere homage. As a warrior 
aiid a general we shall behold him not in the least inferior 
to the greatest commanders the world has ever produced ; 
for, whether we compare him with the leaders of the past 
or the present, he bears away the palm. '^ In the difficulty 
of the scenes of action, in the extent of the countries sub- 
dtned, in the number and strength of the enemies overcome, 
in the savage manners and treacherous disposition of the 
people he humanized, in mildness and clemency to his 
prisoners, in bounty and munificence to bis troops, in the 



CMSAR IN GAUl XV 

number of battles won and enemies killed," finally, in all 
that tests the skill and fearlessness oi^ a military commander, 
C^esax stands at the head of the famous warriors of all 

time- 
However, it is but as a wondrous warrior — not a man 
— that we admire him; for in every act we cannot but 
feel the covert purpose to become master of Rome at 
whatever cost, to " bestride the narrow world like a Colos- 
sus," then to be oblivious to the petty men beneath his 
huge legs, as Cassius expresses it in the play. Try as we 
may to evade it, the thought intrudes itself upon us that 
in his favors and charity to the people and to his soldiers, 
and in mercy to his enemies, he was swayed more by 
reason than affection. Thus, mingling with our awe of 
his incredible power, which in a noble nature incarnated 
would turn our awe to love, comes the depressing con- 
sciousness that the Gallic campaigns were but links in the 
fetters. There is evidence of a reprehensible duplicity 
in Caesar's conduct at this period : he was conquering his 
enemies with the arms of the Roman Republic, and gaining 
the Republic by the money of his enemies. His mind 
was always on state intrigues. During brief respites from 
active fighting, <' great numbers came from Rome to pay 
their respects to him, and he sent them all away satisfied ; 
some laden with presents, others happy in hope. He sent 
to Rome enormous sums of gold to be expended in the 
erection of temples, theatres, and other public structures, 
and in the celebration of games and shows, that should 
rival in magnificence those of Pompey" (Plutarch and 
Myers). 

We cannot but regret that, unlike Brutus^ Csesar loved 



XVI C^SAR IN GA UL 

Rome less and Caesar more. Thus in his chequered life 
he found 

'* tears for his love ; joy for his fortune ; honor for his valor ; and 
death for his ambition." — (Brutus, in Shakespeare's /m/«W Casar), 



OUTLINE OF CiESAR'S LIFE* 

(According to Plutarch) 

1. Born July 12, 100 b. c, of a patrician or noble 
family. 

2. Priest of Jupiter (Flamen Dialis). 

3. Alliance with Marius, leader of the popular party 
{Popular es), 

4. Further alliance with popular party by marriage with 
Cornelia, daughter of Cinna, b. c. 83. 

5. Troubles with Sulla, leader of the patrician or aris- 
tocratic party {Optimates). Proscribed. 

6. Exile among the Sabines and across the sea; the 
incident of the pirates. 

7. Studies rhetoric and oratory at Rhodes. 

8. Returns to Rome and impeaches Dolabella, a ra- 
pacious provincial governor. 

9. Military Tribune, b. c. 74. 

10. Funeral oration of his aunt, the wife of Marius; 
restoration of the images of Marius against the ban. 

1 1 . Further hardiness and independence of spirit shown 
in his young wife's panegyrics. 

12. Quaestor in Spain, b. c. 68. 

*The pupil should learn this outline, and from the many available 
sketches of Caesar's life should expand the outline to a full account. Besides 
the encyclopaedic articles every library should have a copy of Plutarch's 
" Lives " ; Froude's " Caesar, a sketch " ; Dodge, in the " Series of Great 
Captains " ; Fowler's " Julius Caesar " ; the histories of Merivale, Mommsen 
and Myers; various excellent school editions of the Commentaries; and 
above all, if possible, the elaborate work of Napoleon III. 

xvii 



XVm OUTLINE OF CMSAIVS LIFE 

13. Curule Aedile, b. c. 65; his enormous personal 
expenditures and debts; the incident of the new gold- 
embossed and engraved statues and trophies of Marius. 

14. Contest for the pontificate; the proffered bribe; 
incident of Caesar and his mother. 

15. Pontifex Maximus, b. c. 63. 

16. Caesar and the conspiracy of Catiline; the enmity 
of Cato ; Cicero's body-guard ; in the senate a few days 
later ; Cato's artifice, b. c. 63. 

17. Praetor, b. c. 62. 

18. Domestic troubles ; sacrilege of Clodius. 

19. Propraetor in Spain, b.c. 61; his debts; alliance 
with Crassus ; envies the achievements of Alexander the 
Great; beginning of his military career; wins the title of 
imperator, 

20. Return to Italy; his dilemma; Cato's opposition, 
and result. 

21. The Triumvirate, b. c. 60; purpose and result; 
Cato's wisdom and foresight. 

22. Consul, B. c. 59; "Less a consul than a seditious 
tribune " ; the incident of the trio in the Senate ; how the 
laws were passed. 

23. Caesar in Gaul, 58-50 B. C. " Here we begin, 
as it were, a new life." 

24. Pompey made "sole consul," b. c. 52 ; "Monarchy 
the only cure, Pompey the gentlest physician." 

25. Caesar asks for continuance of his commission in 
Gaul ; deliberations in the Senate ; Caesar's liberal offer ; 
outrage upon his envoys. 

26. Meditation on the banks of the Rubicon ; " The die 
is cast I " B. c. 49. 



OUTLINE OF CESAR'S LIFE XIX 

27. Civil war; flight of Pompey and the consuls. 

28. Conquers Pompey at Pharsalus, b. c. 48. 

29. Caesar in Egypt, b. c. 47. 

30. Battle of Thapsus, b. c. 46. 

31. Dictator for ten years, b. c. 46. 

32. Battle of Munda, b. c. 45. 

33. Imperator for life. 

34. The conspiracy. Assassinated, March 1 5, b. c. 44. 

" O mighty Caesar ! dost thou lie so low ? 
Are all thy conquests, glories, triumphs, spoils, 
Shrunk to this little measure ? Fare thee well." 

(Mark Antony over Caesar's body). 



« 



THE BEGINNER'S CAESAR 

1. THE DIVISIONS OF GAUL 

Gallia est omnis divisa in partes tres. Quanim par- 
tium" unam * partem incolunt Belgae. Aliam partem in- ^ 

colunt Aquitani. Tertiam incolunt Galli. Galli lingua f*- ;^ 

ipsdrum Celtat*^ appellantur. Celtae nostra lingua Galli 
appellantur. Hi omnes, lingua, institutis, legibus" inter 
se differunt. Garumna flumen'* Gall5^ ab Aquitanis*' 
dividit. Matrofia et SSquana flumina'* Gallos a Belgis 
dividunt 

Characteristics of the Gallic people - ,- 

Horum' omnium fortissimi sunt Belgae, propterea quod 
a cultu •" atque lifcnanitate provinciae longissime absunt. 
Ad eos," mefbatores minime saepe ' comm^ant. Merca- 
tores ea minimfi saepe important, ^uae ad effeminaacjos 
animds pertinent. Belgae proximi '* sunt GerpcwtnlS,*^ qui 
trans Rhenum incolunt, quibuscum (= cum quibus") > 
continenter bellum gerunt. 

Qua de causa, Helvetii quoque reliqu5s Gallos praece- 
dunt. Helvetii reliquos virtute praecedunt, quod cum 
Germanis contendunt. Fere cotidianis'* proeliis cum 
GermSnis contendunt. *sHelvetii suls finibus" Germanos 

* The figures throughout the text refer to Rules of Syntax^ begmning at 
page 75* 

I 



2 THE BEGINNERS CjESAR 

prohibent. Helvetii in Germanorum finibus** bellum ge- 
runt. ' ^ 

Boundaries of each nation 

Una pars eorufn initium capit a** flumine Rhodand. 
Earn partem Gall5s *• obtinere '• dictum est. Continetur 
Ganimna'* flumine, Oceano; finibus Belgarum. Attingit 
flumen Rhenum. Attingit etiam ab Sequanis et Helvetiis 
flumen Rhenum. Vergit ad septentriones. Belgae ab 
extremis finibus Galliae oriuntur. Pertinent ad inferiorem 
partem fluminis Rheni. Spectant in septentrionem et 
orientem solem. Aquitania a Garumna flumin^ ad Pyre- 
naeos montes '• pertinet. Pertinet ad eam partem Oceani, 
quae est ad Hispaniam.^' Spectat inter occasum s5lis et 
septentriones. 



Note : After each simplified chapter will follow a verbatim copy 
of the corresponding chapter from the " Commentaries." 

C. lULII CAESARIS 

DE BELLO GALLICO 



COMMENTARIUS PRIMUS 
B. C. 58 

I. Gallia est omnis divisa in partes tres, quarum unam 
incolunt Belgae, aliam Aquitani, tertiam qui ipsorum lingua 
Dctcription of Celtae, nostra Galli appellantur. Hi dmnes 
andtehawt* li^gua, institutis, legibus inter se differunt 
ants of Gaul. Gall5s ab Aquitani^arumna flutflen/a Bplgis 
Matrona et Sequana dividit. > Horura omnium fortissimi 
sunt Belgae, propterea quotf a cultu atque humSnitate 
provinciae longissime absunt, minimeque ad eos merca- 



CONSPIRACY OF ORGETORIX 3 

tores saepe commeant atque ea quae ad effeminandos 
anim5s peitinent Important; proximique sunt Germanis, 
qui trans Rhenum incolunt, quibuscum continenteyjbellum 
gerunt. Qua de causa Helvetit quoque renquos Gallos 
virtiite praecedunt, Uupd fer^foiulianis proeliis cum Ger- 
manis contendunt,'^cum Sutsuis fmibus eos prohibent aut 
ipsi in eorum finibus bellum gerunt. Eorum una pars, 
qu&m Gall5s obtinere dictum est, initium capit a flumine 
Rhodano ; continetur Garumna flumine, Oceano, finibus 
Belgaruiti ; attingit^etiam ab Sequanis et Helv$tiis flumen 
Rhenum ; vergit ud septentrioneis. Belgae ab extremis 
Galliae finibus oriuntur ; pertinent ad inferiorem partem 
fluminis Rheni; spectant in septentrionem et orientem 
s5lem. Aquitania a Gafumna flumine ad Pyrenaeds mon- 
tes et eam partem Oceani quae est ad Hispaniam pertinet ; 
spectat inter occasum solis et septentriones. 



-K*^ 



2. CONSPIRACY OP ORGETORIX 

Apud Helveti5s nobilissimus fuit Orgetorix. Orgetorix 
fuit longe ditissimus. Is coniurationeqi n5bilitatis fecit. 
Is, regni * cupiditate *• inductus, coniurationem fecit. Is, 
Marc5 Messala et M. Pisone consulibus,^ civitati " per- 
suasit ut** de finibus suis cum omnibus c5piis exirent.** 
Dixit: perfacile esse,*' totius Galliae imperi5* potiri.** 
Peifacile esse, imperi6% potiri, cum virtute" omnibus" 
praestarent."* ^ 

Natural limits of Helvetia 

Helv€tii loci natura undique continentur. Hoc** facilius 
eis persuasit ut de suis finibus exirent. Helvetti una ex 



4 THE BEGINNER'S CMSAR 

parte *• flumine Rheno'* continentur. Rhenus latissimus" 
et altissimus est. Is agrum Helvetium a Germanis*" 
dividit. Helvetii altera ex parte monte Itira continentur. 
lura, mons altissimus, inter Seqilanos et Helvetios est. 
Helvetii tertia (ex parte) lacu Lemanifo^et flumiAe Rhcn ^ 
dano continentur. Rhodanus 'provinciam nostram ab 
Helvetiis diVidit. ' 

The results of their confinement 

His rebus** fiebat ut minus late vagarentur.** His rebus 
fiebat ut minus facile finitimis" bellum inferre'* possent. 
Helvetii cupidi** bellandi' erant Qua ex parte Helvetii, 
homines'* bellandi cupidi, magnd dolore" afficiebantur. 
Se angustds fines habere.'* arbitrabantur. Pro multitudine 
hominum,.* angustos se fines habere arbitrabantur. Pro 
gl5ria belli atque fortitudinis, fines angustos esse arbitra- 
bantur. Fines in longitudinem milia** passuum* ducenta 
et quadraginta patebant^ In latitiidinem centum et oct5- 
ginta patebant. 



CHAPTER II OF CESAR'S TEXT 

2. Apud Helvetios longe nobilissimus fuit et ditissimus 
Orgetorix. Is, M. MesslLia et M. Pisone consulibus, 
Or etorix Tcgni cupiditatc inductus coniurationem n5bili- 
persuades tatis fccit, et civitati persuasit ut de finibus 

the Helve- _ ♦ * m - •- - ^ _r m 

tianstoin- suis cum ohinibus copus cxircnt: periacile 
vadeGaui. ^^^\^ ^^^ ^j^.^^ omnibus praestarent, tatius 

Galliae imperio potiri. Id hoc facilius eis persuSsit, quod 
undiqSe loci natura Helvetii continentur : una ex parte 
flumine Rhen5 latissimo atque altissim5, qui agrum Hel- 



PREPARATIONS OF THE HELVETIANS S 

vetium a Germanis dividit ; altera ex parte monte lura 
altissimo, qui est inter Sequanos et Helvetios ; tertia lacu 
Lemann5 et flumine Rhodano, qui pr5vinciam nostram ab 
Helvetiis dividit, fllis rebus fiebat ut et minus late vaga- 
rentuinefimfiusiacile f initimis bellum inf erre possent ; qua 
ex parte homines bellandi cupidi magno dolore afficieban- 
tur. Pro multitudine autem hominum et pro gl5ria belli 
atque fortitudinis angustos se fines habere arbitrabantur, 
qui in longitudinem milia passuum ccxl, in latittidinem 
CLXxx patebant. 



3. PREPARATIONS OF THE HELVETIANS 

His rebus adducti sunt. Auct5ritate f^rgetorigis' per- 
m5ti sunt. His rebus adducti et auctc r ate Orgetorigis 
permoti, c5nstituerunt ea comparare,'* quae ad proficis- 
cendum pertinerent.*' Constituerunt maximum numerum 
iumentdrum" coemere.^* Constituerunt quam^' maximum 
numerum carrdrum coemere. Constituerunt quam maxi- 
mas sementes facere, ut in itinere copia frgsoeiitl^uppe- 
teret. Constituerunt pacem et amicit^am , cum proximis 
civitatibus c5nfirmare. Ad eas res conficiQida.'s'^ bjepnium 
satis est. Biennium sibi** satis esse duxerimt. In tertium 
annum" profectionem lege** confirmant. Ad eas res c5n- 
ficiendas Orgetorix deligitur. 

Orgetorix enlists other chiefs 

Is sibi" legitionem ad civitates*" suscepit. In e5 
itinere persuadet Castico", ut regnum in civitate sua occu- 
paret.** Casticus, Sequanus,'* filius Catamantaloedis erat 



O THE BEGINNERS C^SAR 

Pater Castici regnum in Sequanis multos** annos obtinu- 
erat. A. senatu*' populi R5mani jamicus** appellatus erat. 
Regnum in Sequanis pater Castici ante habuerat. Item- 
que, Orgetorix Dumnorigi, qui plebi" kcceptus erat, per- 
suasit ut idem c5naretur. Orgetorix ei" filiam suam in 
matrimonium dat. Dumnorix Aeduus frater** Divitiaci 
erat. Dumnorix eo tempore** principatunu in civitate ob- 
tinebat. 

His argument 

Conata perficere'* perfacile est. Illis" probat perfacile 
factu7* esse conata perficere. Perfacile esse probat, prop- 
terea quod imperium suae civitatis* obtenturus esset.** 
N5n esse*' dubium quin** totius Oalliae" Helvetii pluri- 
mum possent. Orgetorix c5nf irmat se regna conciliatiirum 
esse. Se suis copiis suoque** exercitu illis regna concilia- 
tiirum esse confirmat. Hac oratione** Casticus et Dum- 
norix adducti sunt. Hac oratione adducti, inter se fidem*' 
et ius itirandum dant. Sperant sese totius" Galliae potiri 
posse. Regno occupato, sese totius Galliae potiri sperant. 
Per tres potentissimos ac f irmissimos populos, sese Galliae 
potiri posse sperant. 



CHAPTER III OP CiBSAR 

3. His rebus adducti et auctoritate Orgetorigis permoti 
constituerunt ea quae ad proficiscericjum pertinerent com- 
p^ parare, iiimentorum et carrorum quaoi maxi- 

of the Hei- mum numerum coemere, sementes quam ^uia- 
ximas facere, ut in itinere copia frtimenti sup- 
peteret, cum proximis civitatibife pacem et amicitiam con- 
firmHre. Ad eas r6s c5nficiendas biennium sibi satis esse dti- 



PREP'ARATIONS of the HELVETIANS 7 

zenint; in tertium annum profectionem lege confirmant. Ad 
eas r& conficiendas Oi^etorix deligitur, 'is sibi legationem 
ad clvitat6s suscepit. In eo itinere persuadet 
Castico, Catamantaloedis filio, Sequano, cuius coupirea 
pater regnum in Sequanis multos annos obtinue- J^'^h«*" 
rat et isenatu populi Romani amicus appella- tribe»'of»»- 

. . _ _ pieciBey. 

tus erat, ut regnum In civitate sua occuparet, 

quod pater ante habuerat; itemque DumnoriglAeduo, fritrl 
Dlviciaci, qui eo tempore principatum in civitate obtinebat 
ac m^ime plebi acceptus erat, ut idem conaretur persu&det, 
eique filiam su.im in matrimonium dat. ' Perfacile factu 
esse illis probat sonata perficere, propterea quod ipse suae 
Civitatis imperium obtenturus esset : non esse 'dubium, 
quin totius Galliae plflrjtniim Helvfitii possent^ se suis 
copiis suoque exercitu illis regna concililfiiruin i;onfirmat. 
Hac rati one adducti inter se fidem et ttisiurandum dant, 
et regno occupato per tr€s potentissimos ac firmissimSs 
populos totius Galliae s£sg potirl posse sperant. 



8 THE BEGINNER'S Cj^SAR 



BETRAYAL AND DEATH OF ORGETORIX 

4. Orgetorix is betrayed and arrested. On the day of the trial he 
assembles all his retinue at the court and through them he escapes. 
The government, however, is persistent, and Orgetorix in despair 
commits suicide. 

Ea res enuntiata est. Res per indicium •• entintiata est. 
Ea res est Helvetiis ^^ per indicium enuntiata. Orgetori- 
gem** causam dicere^* coegerunt. * Moribus'* suis eum 
coegerunt. Moribus suis Orgetorigem ex vinculis causam 
dicere coegerunt. Poenam *• sequi '• oportebat. Eum dam- 
natum poenath sequi oportebat, ut igni** cfematttiir.** Or- 
getorix suam familiam coegit. Die**'constituta Orgetorix 
suam familiam undlque coegit. Suam familiam, ad" 
hominum milia decem, coegit.- Die-Gon^tituta causae dic- 
tionis,* Orgetorix ad^' indicium suam familiam undique 
coegit. Omnes clientes eddem conduxit. Clientes obaera- 
tosque suos eodem conduxit. ClientSs obaeratosque suos, 
quorum • magnum numerum 'habebat, eodem conduxit. 

Per eos,'* ne *• causam diceret, se eripuit. Civitas iiis 
suum exsequi conabatur. Civitas. ob eam rem incitata,' 
armis** ius suum exsequi conabatur. Magistratus multi- 
tudinem hominum ex** agris cogebant. Orgetorix mor- 
tuus est. Cum civitas ius suum exsequi conaretur " mul- 
titiidinemque hominum ex agris magistratus' cogerent, 
Orgetorix mortuus est. Suspicio non abest, quin*® ipse 
sibi " mortem consciverit.*® Orgetorix mortuus est ; neque 
abest suspicio, ut Helvetii arbitrantur, quin ij)se sibi mor- 
tem consciverit. 



PLANS OF EXQDUS MATURE 



CHAPTER IV OF C^SAR 

4. Ea res est Helvetiis per indicium enuntiata. M5ribus 
suis Orgetorigem ex vinculis causam dicere coegerunt : dam- 
natum poenam gequi opo£tebat ut igni cremare- ^^ ^xoxiy. is 
tur. * Die constituta causae dictionis Orgetorix tncd «<>«■ con- 

J--J- • t^ -T ju • spiracybut 

ad ludicium omnem suam fd,miham, ad hommum escapes. His 
niilia decern, undique coegit, et omnes clientes *" ° d«ath. 
obaeratosque suos, quorum magnum numerum habebat, 
eodem conduxit ; per eos, ne causam dicereWs^ eripuit. 
Cum civitas ob eam rem incitata armis ius^Supi^eysequi 
conaretur, multitudinemque hominum ex agris magistrates 
cogerent, Orgetorix mortuus est; neque abest suspicio,-«t 
Helvetii arbitrantur, quin ipse sibi mortem consciverit* 



. 5. PLANS OF EXODUS MATURE 

Nihil5 •^ minus, Helvetii id, quod c5nstituerant,*' facere 
conantur.!2 Post Orgetorigis mortem, id facere conan- 
tur, ut e finibus suis exeant. Ubi**iam se** ad eam rem 
paratos •* esse arbitrati sunt,** oppida sua omnia incendunt. 
* Oppida sua numero *• ad '^ duodecim erant. Vic5s ad 
^ quadringentos incendunt. Reliqua privata aedificia incen- 
dunt. Frumentum omne, praeterqAam quod secum porta- 
turi" erant, combiin^nt. Id comburunt"' ut, domum^** 
reditionis spe** sublata, ad omnia pericula subeun^a^^ 
paratiores essent.'* Quemque** cibaria sibi" dom5*' 
efferre,** iubent. Quemque molita cibaria trium" men- 
sium ■ efferre '• iubent 



5 ' f" 



y- 






10 T^E BEGINNER'S CMSAR 

They persuade other tribes to go also 

/ Persuadent Rauraeis ^* et Tulingis et Latobrigis, f initi- 
mis,'* ut Qna! cum \is proficiscantur. Persuadent iis ut, 
eddem c5nsili5 ■• usi, Gna cum iis proficiscantur. Persua- 
dent iis ut, oppidis" suis vicisque exustis," una cum iis 
proficiscantur. B5io^, receptos ad se socios^' sibi" ad- 
sciscunt. Boii trans 'RhS^num incoluerant. Boios, qui in 
agrum Noricum transierant et Noreiam oppiignaverant, 
sibi adsciscunt 

CHAPTER V OF C^SAR 

\i , 5. Post eius mortem nihilo minus Helvetii id quod c6n- 

f^" stituerant facere.conantur, ut e finibus suis exeant. Ubi 

'i- The Helve- lariTse ad eam reni paratos esse arbitrati sunt, 

tians complete oppida sua Omnia, numero ad duodecim, vicos 

^ their prepara- . _ j-/- • • 

y-* tionsandde- ad quadringentos, reliqua privata aedificia m- 

' P'^- cendunt; frumentum onine, praeter quod se- 

.-V. cum portaturi erant, comburunt, ut, domum reditionis spe 

:p»^ublata, paratipres ad omnia pericula subeunda essent; 

trium mensium molita cibaria sibi quemque ^omo efferre 

iubent. Persuadent Rauraeis et Tulin|;ia et Latobrigis, 

f initimis, uti eodem usi con^li5, oppidis suis vicisque exiis- 

tis, una cum eiS proficiscantur^, Boioscjue, qui trans Rhe- 

num incoluerant ^t in agrum Noricum transierant Noreiam- 

que oppiignarant^ receptos ad se i^ocios sibi adsckcunt. 




Gladn 



THE PAS DE VECLUSE 1 1 

j^ 6. THE TWO ROUTES 

Two ways of exit are located, one through the beautiful Pas de 
I'Ecluse. 

Erant omnind itinera duo, quibus itineribus dom5** exire 
possent'®: tinum iter per Sequano§, angustum et difficile, 
inter montem luram et flumen iRhodanum,'* qua singuli 
carri ducerentur.'* Mons, autem, altissimus," impendebat 
ut facile perpauci prohibere poss&it. Alterum iter per 
provinciam nostram erat. Id mult5*^ facilius atque expe- 
ditius erat, propterea qiiod inter fines Helvetiorum et Allo 
brogum Rhodanus fluit.*' Is nonnuUis locis*' vado tran- 
situr. 

They choose the second route 

Helvetii et Allobroges nuper pacati erant. ~^ Extremum 
oppidum Allobrogum proximumque finibus" Helvetiorum* 
est Genava. Ex eo^oppido pons ad Helvetios " pertinet. 
Helvetii sese *• Allobrogibus " persuasiiros •* esse existi- 
mabant. Existimabant sese Allobrogibus persuasiiros, 
quod °* Allobroges nondum bono animo * in populum 
R5manum viderentur.*' Existimabant sese Allobrogibus 
vel persuasiiros vel vi ** coactiiros, ut per suos fines Helve- 
tios ire paterentur,** 

March 28 is set for their departure 

Omnibus rebus ** ad profectionem comparatis, Helvetii 
diem dicunt. Diem dicunt, qua *• die omn€s ad ripam ^^ 
Rhodani conveniant.** Is dies erat ante diem quintum 
Kalendas Apriles. Liicius Piso et Aulus Gabinius con- 
sules erant. Is dies erat a. d. V. Kal. Apr., L. Pis5ne, 
A. Gabinid consulibus.*' 



12 * . THE BEGINNER'S C^SAR 

V. 

, ■*' CHAPTER VI OF CiCSAR 

6, Erant omnino itinera duo quibus itineribus domo 

"^ exire possent ; unum per *Sequan5s, aifgustum et difficile, 

They arrange i^^^T montcm luram et flumen Rhodanum, vix 

to cross qua sineuli carri ducerentur : mons autem altis- 

the Rhone . . , ,.. 

and march simus impendcbat, ut facile perpauci prohibere 

through the u. ^^ _ . . v 

Roman possent : alterum per- provinciam nostram, 

Province. multo f acilius atque expeditius, propterea quod 
inter fines Helvetiorum et AUobrogum, qui ntiper pacati 
erant, Rhodanus fluit, isqwe nonntillis locis vad5 traii- 
situr. . 

'^^TExtremum oppidum AUobrogum est proximumque Helve- 
tidrum finibus Genava. .Ex e6*oppido pons ad Helvetios 
pertinet. Allobrogifius sese vel persuasuros, quod nondum 
bon5 animo in popultinr R5manum videtentur, existimabant^ 
^^el vi coacturds ut per su5s fines e5s irt' paterentu^. : Ofti- 
nibus rebus ad profectionem cpmparatis, diem dlcunt qua 
die ad ripam Rhodani omnes conveniant ' Is dies eraf 
a. d. V. Kal. Apr., L. Pisdne, A. Gabtnio consulibus. - 

v.r -^ 



7. THE NEWS REACHES CiESAR. -- HIS ACTIVE 

MEASURES 

Caesar was at Rome, making preparations to set out on his post- 
consular appointment as governor of Gaul. Word was brought to 
him of the plans of the Helvetii. He immediately left Rome, and, 
by forced marches of fully one hundred miles a day, reached the 
Rhone within a week. On his arrival, he began vigorous operations 
against the Helvetii, who soon made overtures to him. But Caesar 
was unwilling to grant their request of a peaceful march across Ro- 



THE i^ews kE aches cjssar 13 

man dominion, especially because of his remembrance of certain 
reverses in the trouble with the Cimbri, in which the Helvetii had had 
a share, some fifty years before. However, he craftily postponed his 
answer to the Helvetian delegates until the middle of the coming 
April. Thus the wariness of the politician becomes the wariness of 
the military commander. 

Caesari ^* id nuntiatum est. Eos *• per provinciam nos- 
tram iter facere'* conari'^ nuntiatum est. Cum id 
Caesari " nuntiatihn esset,'* maturat •* ab urbe proficisci.'* 
Caesar in Galliam ulteriorem contendit et ad " Genavam 
pervenit. Quam'* maximis potest itineribus contendit. 
Provinciae^* toti magnurti numerum militum'' imperat. 
Quam maximum potest numerum militum imperat. Erat 
omnino in Gallia ulteri5re legio una. Pontem,** qui erat 
ad '' Genavam, iubet '• rescindi. { Ubi "• de eius * adventu 
Helvetii certiores '* facti sunt, legates ad eum mittunt. Hi 
nobilissimi •^ civitatis* erant. Helvetii legates mittunt, 
cuius legatidnis" Nammeius et Verucloetius principem 
locum obtinebant. Helvetii legates ad Caesarem mittunt,'* 
qui " dicerent,** sibi " esse in animoVter per provinciam 
facere. \ Sibi esse •• in animo pef~pr5vinciam sine iillo 
maleficio ire,'* propterea quod aliud iter haberent •• nul- 
lum. Helvetios rogare •' ut, voluntate *' Caesaris, id sibi •• 
facere ^' liceat.** 

Casar's reasons for rejecting ; his duplicity 

Caesar id concedendum " esse non putabat, quod '^ Lu- 
cium Cassium memoria tenebat. L. Cassius, consul, occi- 
sus erat. Exercitus eius ab Helvetiis*' pulsus et sub 
iugum missus erat. Caesar, quod memoria ** tenebat L. 
Cassium," c5nsulem," occisum,'' concedendum*' non 
putabat. Neque existimabat homines,** inimico animd,'* 



14 THE BEGINNER'S CMSAR 



temperaturos '* esse ab iniuria et maleficio." Caesar non 
existimabat Helvetios,** f acultate *' itineris • f aciundi • per 
provinciam data, temperatures*' a maleficio. Tamen, 
legatis " respondit se *• diem ad deliberandum '^ sumptu- 
rum** esse. Tamen, ut spatium intercedere '* posset, 
dum " milites convenirent, legatis respondit se diem sump- 
turum.** Legatis respondit : si quid vellent,** ad Idus '' 



Apriles reverterentur.'* 



CHAPTER VII OF C^SAR 

7. Caesari cum id nuntiatum esset, eos per provinciam 

nostram iter facere conari, maturat ab iirbe proficisci, et 

quam maxim is potest itineribus in Galliam ulte- 

Caesar de- ' , t t^^ 

lays them by riorem contendit ^t ad Genavam pervenit. Pro- 
pr ex s. vinciae- toti quam maximum potest militum 
numerum imperat (erat omnino in Gallia ulteri5re legid 
una), pontem qui' erat ad Genavam iubet rescindi, Ubi 
de eius adventu Helvetii certiores facti sunt, legatos ad 
eum'mittunt iiobilissimos civitatis, cuius lesrationis Nam- 
meius et Verucloetiu^ princip^m locum obtinebant, qui 
dicerent sibi esse in animo sine ullo maleficio iter per pro- 
vinciam, facere, propterea quod aliud iter haberent nullum : 
rogare ut eius voluntate id sibi facere liceat. Caesar, quod 
memoria tenebat L. Cassium consulem occisum exerci- 
tumque eius ab Helvetiis pulsum et sub iugum missum, 
concedendum non putabat; Hequ^ homines inimicd ani- 
m5, data facultate per provinciam itineris faciundi, tempe- 
ratiiros ab iniuria et malefici5 eftstimabati- Tamen, ut 
spatium intercedere posset dum milites quos imperaverat 
convenirent, legatis respondit diem se ad deliberandum 
sumpttirum : si quid velleot, ad Id. Apr. reverterentur. 

\ '■ 



CESAR'S FOR TIFICA TIOXS 1 5 



8. CESAR'S FORTIFICATIONS 

Note: For a full description of this line of defenses, see the 
Notes, 

Interea, a lacu Lemanno ad montem luram, murum fos- 
samque perducit. Ea legione,'" quam secum habebat, 
militibusque qui ex provincia *® convenerant, murum f os- 
samque perducit. A lacu Lemannd, qui in fliimen "' Rho- 
danum influit, ad montem luram, qui fines Sequan5rum 
ab*' Helvetiis dividit, murum fossamque perdiicit. Mu- 
rum fossamque, milia*' passum xviiii in longitiidinem, 
perducit. Murum fossamque, in altitudinem pedum * se- 
decim, perducit. E5 opere perfect©, praesidia disponit et 
castella commiinit, qu5'' facilius Helvetios prohibere pos- 
sit. Caesar castella commiinit, quo facilius, si se " invitd 
transire c5narentur,'* prohibere possit. 



Tfie appointed day arrives^ and Caesar refuses the request 

made several days before 

Ea dies, quam constituerat cum legatis, venit. Legati 
ad eum reverterunt. lis dixit Caesar: More et exemplo 
popull Romdnt, non possum iter ulll per prbvinciam dare ; 
si vim facere condbiminl^^ prohibebo^^ 

Ubi "• ea dies, quam constituerat cum legatis, venit, negat 
se *• posse •' iter ulli ^^ dare.'* 

Ubi ea dies venit et legati ad eum reverterunt, negat se 
posse iter per provinciam dare. Si vim facere conentur,*' 
se eos prohibitiirum esse ostendit. Negat se, more^' et 
exemplo populi Romani,* posse iter ulli per provinciam 
dare. 



1 6 THE BEGINNER'S C^SAR 

The Helvetii attempt to pass, but are repulsed 

Helvetil, ea spe •■ deiecti, si perrumpere possent,'* co- 
natl sunt. Navibus iunctis ratibusque compluribus factis,** 
Helvetii conati sunt si perrumpere possent. Alii vadis ** 
Rhodani, qua minima '* altitude fltiminis erat, nonnuraquam 
interdiu, saepius noctu, si perrumpere possent, conati sunt. 
Helvetii, operis munitione '^ et militum * concursu et telis 
repulsi, hoc •' conatu destiterunt. 



CHAPTER VIII OF CiCSAR'S TEXT 

8. Interea ea legione quam secum habebat militibusque 
qui ex provincia convenerant, a lacu Lemannd, qui in flu- 
He prevents men Rhodanum influit, ad montem luram, qui 

their crossing 

the Rhone. fines Scquanorum ab Helvetiis dividit, milia 
passuum decem novem murum in altitudinem pedum sede- 
cim fossamque perducit. E5 opere perfect© praesidia dis- 
ponit, castella communit, quo facilius, si se invit5 transire 
c5narentur, prohibere possit. Ubi ea dies quam consti- 
tuerat cum legatis venit, et legati ad eum reverterunt, negat 
se more et exempl5 populi Romani posse iter uUi per pro- 
vinciam dare; et, si vim facere conentur, prohibiturum 
ostendit. Helvetii ea spe deiecti, navibus iiinctis ratibus- 
que compluribus factis, alii vadis Rhodani, qua minima alti- 
tudo fliiminis erat, nonnumquam interdiii, saepius noctii, si 
perrumpere possent conati, operis munitione et militum 
concursu et telis repulsi hoc conatu destiterunt. 



ACROSS THE SEQUANIAN COUNTRY 17 

9. ACROSS THE SEQUANIAN COUNTRY 

Failing to force a way against Caesar's obstructions, the exit 
through the famous Pas de PEcluse alone remained. Let the student 
study the map of Helvetia, p. 48. 

Relinquebatur una via per Sequanos, qua,'* SSquanis** 
invitis, propter angustias non poterant ire. Cum Helvetii, 
sua sponte," his^* persuadere non possent," legatos ad 
Dumnorigem Aeduum mittunt. Legatos ad Dumnorigem 
mittunt,'* ut, eo ** deprecatore, a Sequanis impetrarent.'* 

Dumnorix^ the y^duan 

Dumnorix, gratia" et largitione, apud Sequanos pluri- 
mum poterat. Helvetiis ^' erat amicus '* quod ex ea civi- 
tate filiam Orgetorigis in matrimonium duxerat. Cupidi- 
tate*' regni* adductus, no vis rebus" studebat. Quam'* 
plurimas civitates su5 beneficio " obstrictas " habere vole- 
bat. Itaque rem suscipit et a Sequanis impetrat ut per 
fines suos Helvetios ire patiantur." Perficit ut inter sese 
obsides dent. Sequani obsides dant ne *' itinere *' Helve- 
tios prohibeant. Helvetii, ut sine" maleficio et iniuria 
transeant.** 



CHAPTER IX OP CiCSAR 

9. Relinquebatur una per Sequanos via, qua Sequanis 
invitis propter angustias ire non poterant. His ^he Heive- 
cum sua sponte persuadere non possent, le- tians obtain 

* * * permission 

gatds ad Dumnorigem Aeduum mittunt, ut eo from the Se- 

1 r>i • -r^ quani to pass 

deprecatdre a Sequanis impetrarent. Dumno- through their 
rix gratia et largitione apud Sequanos pliirimum ~"°**y- 
poterat, et Helvetiis erat amicus quod ex ea civitate 



1 8 THE BEGINNER'S C^SAR 

Orgetorigis filiam in matrimonium duxerat ; et cupiditate 
regni adductus novis rebus studebat, et quam plurimas 
civitates suo beneficio habere obstrictas volebat. Itaque 
rem suscipit et a Sequanis impetrat ut per fines suos Hel- 
vetios ire patiantur, obsidesque uti inter sese dent perficit : 
Sequani, ne itinere Helvetios prohibeant ; Helvetii, ut sine 
maleficio et iniuria transeant. 



■•o*- 



10. REPORTED DESTINATION OF THE HELVETII 

Caesari^^ renuntiatur, Helvetiis esse** in animo per 
agrum Sequanorum ^ et Aedu5rura iter in fines •* Santo 
num ^ f acere.'* Santones n5n longe a f inibus •* Tolosatium 
absunt, quae civitas est in prdvincia. 

Reason for Ccesar^s opposition 

Si id fiet,** magnd cum " periculo provinciae erit.** 
Si id fieret,** Caesar intellegebat cum magno periculo fu- 
tiirum esse ut ^®® provincia homines bellicos5s finitimos " 
haberet. Intellegebat magno cum pericul5 futiirum esse 
ut provincia homines, populi* Romani inimicos,^' locis** 
patentibus finitimds" haberet."^ Magno cum periculo 
erit ut pr5vincia Helvetios locis patentibus maximeque 
friimentariis habeat.** 

Ccesar returns to Italy for new legions 

Ob eas causas, ei munitioni," quam fecerat, Titum La- 
bienum legatum '• praefecit. Ipse in Italiam magnis itineri- 
bus contendit. Ibi duas legiones conscribit •* et tres, quae 



DESTINA TION OF THE HEL VE Til 1 9 

circum Aquileiam hiemabant, •* ex hibernis educit. Qua 
proximum '^ iter in ulteriorem Galliam per Alpes erat, cum 
his " quinque legionibus ire contendit. 

The Alpine tribes vainly block his way 

Ibi Ceutrones et Graioceli et Caturiges, locis superiori- 
bus occupatis,** exercitum itinere*' prohibere conantur. 
His ** compluribus proeliis '* pulsis, ab Ocelo in fines Vo- 
contiorum die " septimo pervenit. Ocelum est citerioris 
pr5vinciae oppidum extremum.®* Vocontii sunt ulterioris 
provinciae." Inde in fines Allobrogum, ab AUobrogibus 
in Segusiavos exercitum ducit. Hi sunt extra provinciam 
trans Rhodanum primi. 



CHAPTER X OF C^SAR 

10. Caesari reniintiatur Helvetiis esse in anim5 per 
agrum Sequanorum et Aeduorum iter in Santonum fines 
facere, qui n5n longe a Tolosatium finibus ab- -^^ ^ 
sunt, quae civitas est in provincia. Id si fieret, brings up his 

forces to op- 

intellegebat magno cum periculo provinciae pose their 
futurum ut homines bellicosos, populi Romani p**®**^®- 
inimicos, locis patentibus maximeque f rumentariis finitimos 
haberet. Ob eas causas ei miinitioni quam fecerat T. La- 
bienum legatum praefecit ; ipse in Italiam magnis itineribus 
contendit duasque ibi legiones conscribit, et tres, quae cir- 
cum Aquileiam hiemabant, ex hibernis ediicit, et, qua proxi- 
mum iter in ulteriorem Galliam per Alpes erat, cum his quin- 
que legionibus ire contendit. Ibi Ceutrones et Graioceli et 
Caturiges locis superioribus occupatis itinere exercitum 



20 THE BEGINNER'S CAESAR 

prohibere conantur. Compluribus his proeliis pulsis, ab 
Ocelo, quod est citerioris provinciae extremum, in fines 
Vocontiorum ulterioris prdvinciae die septim5 pervenit; 
inde in Allobrogum fines, ab AUobrogibus in Segusiavos 
exercitum ducit. Hi sunt extra pr5vinciam trans Rhoda- 
num primi. 



11. THE RAVAGES OF WAR 

" Even now the devastation is begun, 
And half the business of destruction done." 

— Goldsmith. 

Helvetii iam per angustias et fines Sequanorum suas 
copias traduxerant. In fines Aeduorum pervenerant, 
e5rumque agros populabantur. Aedui, cum se suaque ab 
iis defendere n5n possent, legates ad Caesarem mittunt. 
Legatos mittunt rogatum'^ auxilium. 

The ^dui 

" The Mdni alone of the Gauls claim the name of brotherhood 
with the Roman people." — Tacitus. 

Aedui dicunt : Se •• ita meritos esse ut agri vastari non 
debuerint. Ita se omni tempore merit5s esse ut liberi 
Aeduorum in servitutem abduci non debuerint. Ita se de 
populo Romano meritos esse, ut paene in conspectu exer- 
citus nostri oppida eorum expugnari non debuerint. 

" We have nothing lefV'* 

Eodem tempore Ambarri, necessarii et consanguine! 
Aeduorum, Caesarem certiorem faciunt : sese vim hostium 



THE RA VAGES OF WAR 2 1 

non facile prohibere. Ambarri dicunt : sese, depopulatis 
agris, non facile ab oppidis vim hostium prohibere. Item 
Allobroges, qui trans Rhodanum vicos possessionesque 
habebant, fuga '* se ad Caesarem recipiunt. Demonstrant : 
sibi," praeter agri • solum, nihil esse reliqui." Quibus 
rebus adductus, Caesar non exspectandum esse sibi ^' sta- 
tuit, dum Helvetii in fines Santonum pervenirent." Sta- 
tuit sibi non exspectandum, dum, omnibus fortunis soci5rum 
consiimptis, in Santones Helvetii pervenirent. 



CHAPTER XI OF C^SAR 

II. Helvetii iam per angustias et fines Sequanorum 
suas copias traduxerant, et in Aedu5rum fines pervenerant 
eorumque agros populabantur. Aedui, cum se 
suaque ab eis defendere non possent, legates JJJJJg^^^^ 
ad Caesarem mittunt roeratum auxilium : Ita se *he country 

oftheJBdui 

omni tempore de popul5 Romano merit5s esse who implore 
ut paene in conspectu exercitus nostri agri vas- Jjj^Son? **"*" 
tari, liberi eorum in servitutem abduci, oppida 
expugnari non debuerint. Eodem tempore Ambarri, neces- 
sarii et consanguinei Aeduorum, Caesarem certiorem faci- 
unt sese depopulatis agris non facile ab oppidis vim hostium 
prohibere. Item Allobroges, qui trans Rhodanum vic5s 
possessionesque habebant, fuga se ad Caesarem recipiunt 
et demonstrant sibi praeter agri solum nihil esse reliqui. 
Quibus rebus adductus Caesar n5n exspectandum sibi sta- 
tuit dum, omnibus fortunis sociorum consiimptis, in San- 
tonos Helvetii pervenirent. 



22 THE BEGINNER'S CMSAR 



12. THE CROSSING OF THE SAdNE 

Flumen est Arar, quod per fines Aeduorum et Sequa- 
norum in Rhodanum influit. Arar incredibili •* lenitate ita 
fluit ut ^•^ oculis •* in utram partem fluat •• iudicari non 
possit. Id Helvetii, ratibus ac lintribus iunctis, tran si- 
bant." Caesar certior factus est, Helvetios tres ** partes 
copiarum id flumen** tradiixisse.** Per exploratores •• 
Caesar certior factus est, quartem fere partem citra flumen 
Ararim reliquam esse. De tertia vigilia cum legi5nibus 
tribus e castris profectus," ad eam partem pervenit, quae 
nondum flumen transierat. 

The first contact at arms 

Eos impeditos et inopinantes aggressus," magnam par- 
tem eorum concidit. Reliqui sese fugae mandarunt (man- 
daverunt) atque in proximas silvas *" abdiderunt. Is pagus 
appellabatur Tigurinus : nam omnis civitas Helvetia in 
quattuor pagos divisa est. Hie pagus unus L. Cassium c5n- 
sulem interfecerat et eius exercitum sub iugum miserat. 
Cassium, cum domo *• exisset patrum nostrorum memoria,*^ 
Tigurini interfecerant. 

Significance of the fate of the Tigurini 

Ita, pars civitatis Helvetiae, quae insignem calamitatem 
populo Romano ^' intulerat, princeps poenas persolvit. Ita 
sive casu sive consilio'* deorum immortalium, quae pars 
civitatis Helvetiae insignem calamitatem populo Romano 
intulerat, ea princeps poenas persolvit. Qua in re (quare) 
Caesar non solum publicas sed etiam privatas iniurias ultus 



THE CROSSING OF THE SAONE 23 

est. Privatas iniurias ultus est quod Tigurini L. Pisonem 
legatum proelio interfecerant. Eodem proelio,** quo Cas- 
sium, Pisonem interfecerant. L. Piso legatus avus erat 
Pisonis, Caesaris ^ soceri." Qua in re Caesar non s5lum 
publicas sed etiam privatas iniurias ultus est, quod eius 
soceri L. Pisdnis avum, L. Pisonem legatum, Tigurini 
e5dem proelio, quo*^ Cassium, interfecerant. 



CHAPTER XII OF C^SAR 

12, Flumen est Arar, quod per fines Aedudrum et Se- 
quanorum in Rhodanum influit, incredibili lenitate, ita ut 
oculis in utram partem fluat iudicari non possit. 
Id Helvetii ratibus ac lintribus iunctis transi- i^yo*the*** 
bant. Ubi per expl5rat6res Caesar certior ArarCaBsar 

, destroys the 

f actus est tres iam partes copiarum Helvetios Tigurini who 
id flumen tradiixisse, quartam fere partem citra rear-guard of 
flumen Ararim reliquam esse, de tertia vigilia J}^^^*^^*" 
cum legionibus tribus e castris profectus, ad 
eam partem pervenit quae nondum flumen transierat. E5s 
impeditos et inopinantes aggressus magnam partem eorum 
concidit ; reliqui sese fugae mandarunt atque in proximas 
silvas abdiderunt. Is pagus appellabatur Tigurinus ; nam 
omnis civitas Helvetia in quattuor pagos divisa est. 
Hie pagus unus, cum domo exisset patrum nostrorum 
memoria, L. Cassium consulem interfecerat et eius exer- 
citum sub iugum miserat. Ita sive casu sive consilio 
deorum immortalium, quae pars civitatis Helvetiae in- 
signem calamitatem populo Romano intulerat, ea princeps 
poenas persolvit. Qua in re Caesar non solum publicas 



24 THE BEGINNER'S C^SAR 

sed etiam privatas iniurias ultus est, quod eius soceri L. 
Pisonis avum, L. Pisonem legatum, Tigurini e5dem proe- 
li5 qu5 Cassium interfecerant. 



13. ACROSS THE SAONE 

Hoc proeli5 facto, Caesar pontem in Arare faciendum'^ 
curat. Ita exercitum traducit ut reliquas copias Helvetio- 
rum consequi posset. Helvetii repentino eius* adventu" 
commoti sunt, cum id, quod ipsi diebus" viginti aegerrime 
confecerant, Caesarem uno die** fecisse intellegerent"^ 
Legates ad eum mittunt, cuius legationis* Divic5 princeps 
fuit. Is bello" Cassiano dux Helvetiorum fuerat. 

Divicd's speech 

Is ita cum Caesare egit : Si populus R5manus pacem 
cum Helvetiis faceret, Helvetios in earn partem ituros esse 
atque ibi futures, ubi Caesar eos constituisset atque esse 
voluisset. Sin Caesar eos bello persequi perseveraret, 
reminisceretur'* veteris* incommodi populi Romani. Re- 
minisceretur pristinae virtutis Helvetiorum. Quod im- 
pr5vis6 unum pagum adortus esset, cum"* ii, qui flumen 
transissent, suis" auxilium ferre n5n possent, ne virtuti 
populi Romani tribueret. Quod unum pagum adortus 
esset, ne ob eam rem aut suae magnopere virtiiti tribueret 
aut Helvetios ips5s despiceret. Se ita a patribus didicisse, 
ut virtute" contenderent.** Se ita a patribus maioribus- 
que suis didicisse, ut magis virtute contenderent quam 
dolo aut insidiis'* niterentur. Quare, ne committeret ut 



ACROSS THE SAONE 2$ 

is locus, ex calamitate populi Romani nomen caperet.** 
Ne committeret ut is locus, ubi constitissent, ex inteme- 
cione exercitus* Romani nomen caperet, aut memoriam 
proderet. 

Divicd's speech in direct discourse 

Note : Let the pupil examine carefully the changes made, com- 
paring it closely with the preceding indirect form. Study Rules 66-70. 

" Si populus Romanus pacem cum Helvetiis faciei^ 
Helvetil in eam partem Ibunt atque ibi erunt^ ubi eos /«, 
Caesar^ constitueris atque esse volueris. Sin tu, Caesar, 
eos bello persequi perseverdbisy retniniscere veteris incom- 
modi populi Romani. Reminlscere pristinae virtutis Hel- 
vetiorum. Quod improviso unum pagum adortus es, cum 
ii, qui flumen trdnsterant, suis auxilium ferre non possent, 
noli virtuti populi Romani trihuere. Quod unum pagum 
adortus es, noli ob eam rem aut tucu magnopere virtuti 
trihuere aut Helvetios ipsos despicere, Nos ita a patribus 
didicimus ut virtiite contenddmus, Nos ita a patribus ma- 
ioribusque nostris didicimus ut magis virtute contenddmus 
quam dolo aut insidiis nitdmur. Quare noli committere ut 
is locus ex calamitate populi R5mani n5men capiat. Noli 
committere ut is locus, ubi constitimuSy ex interneci5ne 
exercitiis Romani nomen capiat, aut mtxaonaxa prodatJ'* 



CHAPTER XIII OP C^SAR 

13. H5c proelio facto, reliquas copias Helvetidrum ut 
c5nsequi posset, pontem in Arare faciendum curat atque 
ita exercitum traducit. Helvetii repentino eius adventu 
commoti, cum id quod ipsi diebus xx aegerrime confe- 



26 THE BEGINNEIfS CMSAR 

cerant, ut flflmen transirent, ilium uno die Eecisse intel- 
legerent, Ifigatos ad eum mittunt ; cuius legationis Divico 

princeps fuit, qui bello Cassiano dux Helvetio- 
vet'ra'" """ fuerat. Is ita cum Caesare egit: Si pacem 
beidni by populus Romanus cum Helvetiis f aceret, in earn 
hau[htiir partem ituros atque ibi futures Helvetios ubi 
p»c^ ^°s Caesar constituisset atque esse voluisset: 

sin bello persequi perseveraret, reminiscere- 
tur et veteris incommodi populi Romani et pristinae 
virtutis Helvetiorum, Quod improvise unum pagum ador- 
tus esset, cum ei qui flOmen transissent suis auxilium ferre 
non possent, ne ob earn rem aut suae magnopere virtuti 
tribueret aut ipsos despiceret: se ita a patribus maioribus- 
que suis didicisse ut magis virtute contenderent quam dolo 
aut insidiis niterentur. Qua re ne committeret ut is locus 
ubi constitissent ex calamitate populi Roman! et inter- 
necione exercitQs nomen caperet aut memoriam proderet. 



CESAR'S REPL Y ^1 

14. CESAR'S REPLY 

His Caesar ita respondit : Eo** sibi minus dubitationis' 
dari, quod eas res memoria teneret. Se eas res, quas 
legati Helvetii commemorassent, eo gravius ferre quo" 
minus merito'* populi Roman! accidissent. Si populus 
R5manus alicuius iniuriae' sibi^' conscius fuisset, non 
fuisse difficile cavere. Sed populum Romanum eo decep- 
tum esse, quod aliquid a se commissum esse non intel- 
legeret, quare timeret. Eo deceptum, quod sine causa 
sibi^' timendum esse non putaret. Quod"^ si veteris con- 
tumeliae' oblivisci vellet, num'* etiam memoriam re- 
centium iniuriarum* deponere posse ?•• Num etiam re- 
centium iniuriarum — quod, eo invito, *' Helvetii iter per 
pr5vinciam per vim temptassent, quod Aeduos et Ambar- 
ros et Allobroges vexassent — memoriam deponere posse? 
Quod Helvetii sua. victoria*' tam insolenter gloriarentur, 
quodque tam diu se impune iniurias tulisse admirarentur, 
eodem pertinere. Consuesse enim deos immortales his," 
quos ulcisci velint, secundiores res et diiiturni5rem im- 
punitatem concedere. Quo'* gravius homines ex commii- 
tatione rerum doleant, deos immortales his, quos pro 
scelere eorum ulcisci velint, secundiores interdum res con- 
cedere. 

CcBsar*s terms of peace 

Cum ea ita sint,"* tamen, sese cum Helvetiis pacem 
facturum esse. Si obsides ab iis sibi dentur, et si Aeduis'* 
de iniuriis, satisfaciant, item si Allobrogibus*' satisfaciant, 
sese cum Helvetiis pacem esse facturum. Si obsides ab 
iis sibi dentur, ut ea, quae polliceantur, Helveti5s factiiros 
esse intellegat, Caesarem cum iis pacem esse facturum. 



28 THE BEGINNER'S C^SAR 

Si Helv€tii Aeduis de iniuriis, quas ipsis" sociisque e5rum 
intulerint, satisfaciant, sese cum iis pacem esse facturum. 

Divicd*s retort 

Divico respondit : Helvetios a maioribus suis ita insti- 
tutos esse, ut obsides accipere, non dare consuerint. Eius 
rei* populum Romanum esse testem. Hoc response dato, 
discessit. 

Note : Let the pupil now write Caesar's reply in direct form. 



CHAPTER XIV OF C^SAR 

14. His Caesar ita respondit : E6 sibi minus dubitati5- 
nis dari, quod eas res quas legati Helvetii commemoras- 
Caesarpro- Sent memoria teneret, atque eo gravius ferre 
SThicVthe** ^^^ minus merito populi Romani accidissent; 
refuse. qui si aliciiius iniuriae sibi conscius fuisset, 

non fuisse difficile cavere ; sed eo deceptum, quod neque 
commissum a se intellegeret qua re timeret, neque sine 
causa timendum putaret. Quod si veteris contumeliae 
oblivisci vellet, num etiam recentium iniuriarum, quod eo 
invito iter per provinciam per vim temptassent, quod 
Aedu5s, quod Ambarros, quod Allobroges vexassent, 
memoriam deponere posse ? Quod sua victoria tam inso- 
lenter gloriarentur, quodque tam diu se impune iniurias 
tulisse admirarentur, eodem pertinere. Consuesse enim 
deos immortales, quo gravius homines ex commiitatione 
rerum doleant, quos pro scelere eorum ulcisci velint, his 
secundiores interdum res et diuturniorem impunitatem 
concedere. Cum ea ita sint, tamen, si obsides ab eis sibi 



BO TH ARMIES AD VANCE 29 

dentur, uti ea quae polliceantur factur5s intellegat, et si 
Aeduis de iniuriis quas ipsis socilsque eorum intulerint, 
item si AUobrogibus satisfaciant, sese cum eis pacem esse 
facturum. Divico respondit : Ita Helvetios a maioribus 
suis institutes esse uti obsides accipere, non dare, con- 
suerint ; eius rei populum Romanum esse testem. Hoc 
response dato discessit. 



15. BOTH ARMIES ADVANCE 

Poster© die castra ex eo loco movent. Idem facit Cae- 
sar. Equitatum omnem, ad " numerum quattuor milium, 
praemittit, qui*' videant, quas in partes hostes iter fa- 
ciant."' Equitatum omnem, quem ex omni provincia et 
Aeduis atque e5rum sociis coactum habebat, praemittit. 

Ccesar meets a slight reverse 

Qui** novissimum agmen cupidius" insecuti, alien5 
loco'* cum equitatii Helvetiorum proelium committunt. 
Pauci de nostris cadunt. Quo proeli5 sublati sunt Helve- 
tii, quod quingentis equitibus tantam multitudinem equi- 
tum prdpulerant. Helvetii, e5 proelio sublati, audacius 
subsistere nonnumquam et novissimo agmine proelio nos- 
tr5s lacessere coeperunt. Caesar suos a proelio contine- 
bat ac satis habebat in praesentia hostem rapinis, pabula- 
tionibus populationibusque prohibere. Ita dies*' circiter 
quindecim iter f ecerunt, ut inter novissimum agmen hos- 
tium et nostrum primum non amplius'^ quinis aut senis 
milibus passuum interesset. 



30 THE BEGINNER'S CjESAR 



CHAPTER XV OF C^SAR 

15. Postero die castra ex eo loco movent. Idem facit 
Caesar, equitatumque omnem, ad numerum quattuor mi- 
Caetar foi- lium, quem ex omni provincia et Aeduis atque 
lows the eorum sociis coactum habebat, praemittit qui 

Helvetians . 

and is de- videant quas in partes hostes iter faciant. Qui 

feated in a .,. . . _ _.- i'-_- 

cavairy skir- cupidius novissimum agmen msecuti alieno 
mith. \q^q cum equitatii Helvetiorum proelium com- 

mittunt ; et pauci de nostris cadunt. Quo proelio sublati 
Helvetii, quod quingentis equitibus tantam multitiidinem 
equitum propulerant, audacius subsistere nonnumquam et 
novissimd agmine proelio nostros lacessere coepenmt. 
Caesar su5s a proeli5 continebat, ac satis habebat in prae- 
sentia hostem rapinis, pabulationibus populationibusque 
prohibere. Ita dies circiter quindecim iter fecerunt uti 
inter novissimum hostium agmen et nostrum primum non 
amplius quinis aut senis milibus passuum interesset. 



16. LACK OF SUPPLIES 

Interim cotidie Caesar Aeduos" frumentum, quod pub- 
lice polliciti essent/' flagitare.'* Nam, propter frigora, 
non modo frumenta in agris matiira non erant, sed ne pa- 
buli quidem satis magna copia suppetebat. Propter frigora, 
quod Gallia sub septentrionibus, ut ante dictum est, posita 
est, satis magna c5pia pabuli non suppetebat. E5 autem 
friimento *", quod flumine '* Arare navibus subvexerat, uti 
minus poterat, propterea quod Helvetii iter ab Arare aver- 



LA CK OF SUPPLIES 3 ^ 

terant, a quibus discedere n5lebat Diem" ex die dG- 
cere '* Aedui. Frumentum conferri,*' comportari, adesse 
dicere Aedui. 

CcBsar censures the j£dui 

Ubi se diutius •• duci intellexit et diem instare, qu5 die 
frumentum militibus metiri oporteret, principibus eorum 
convocatis, graviter eos accusat. Principum Aeduorum 
magnam copiam in castris habebat, in his Divitiaco et Lis- 
co. *• Liscus summo magistratui " praeerat, quem Aedui 
vergobretum*^ appellant, qui creatur annuus et vitae* ne- 
cisque in suos potestatem habet. Caesar principes graviter 
accusat, quod, cum frumentum neque emi neque ex agris 
sGmi posset,** tam necessario tempore, tam propinquis 
hostibus, *• ab iis non sublevetur. " Multo •^ etiam gravius 
queritur, praesertim cum, eorum precibus adductus, bel- 
lum susceperit. Eos accusat, quod sit destitutus. •• 



CHAPTER XVI OF CESAR'S TEXT 

l6. Interim cotidie Caesar Aeduos frumentum quod 
essent piiblice polliciti flagitare. Nam propter frigora, 
quod Gallia sub septentrionibus, ut ante dic- 
tum est, posita est, non modo f rumenta m agris fan to furnish 
matQra non erant, sed ne pabuli quidem satis ^Td wu^^h^t 
magna copia suppetebat; e5 autem frumento 
quod flumine Arare navibus subvexerat proptereS minus 
iiti poterat, quod iter ab Arare Helvetii averterant, a qui^ 
bus discedere nolebat. Diem ex die ducere Aedui ; con- 
ferri, comportari, adesse dicere. Ubi se diutius diici in- 
tellexit et diem instare quo die frumentum militibus metiri 



32 THE BEGINNER'S CMSAR 

oporteret, convocatis e5rum principibus, quorum magnam 
copiam in castris habebat, in his Divitiac5 et Lisco, qui 
summo magistratui praeerat, quem vergobretum appellant 
Aedui, qui creatur annuus et vitae necisque in suos habet 
potestatem, graviter e5s accusat, quod, cum neque emi 
neque ex agris sumi posset, tam necessario tempore, tam 
propinquis hostibus, ab eis non sublevetur; praesertim 
cum magna ex parte eorum precibus adductus bellum sus- 
ceperit, multo etiam gravius quod sit destitutus queritur. 



17. LISCUS EXPLAINS THE CAUSE: OPPOSITION 
OF A POWERFUL PRIVATE CLASS 

Liscus oratione Caesaris adductus est. Tum demum 
Liscus proponit quod antea tacuerat. Dixit : Esse non- 
nullos, quorum auctoritas plurimum valeat quam ipsi ma- 
gistratus. Quos privatim plus posse quam magistratiis. 
Hos multitiidinem deterrere, ne frumentum conferant quod 
conferre'* debeant. Hos seditiosa atque improba ora- 
tione plebem deterrere ne frumentum conferant quod de- 
beant. Hos principatum Galliae * obtinere non posse. Hos 
dicere": Gallorum* quam R5manorum imperia perferre 
praestare. Hos dicere : si iam principatum Galliae obti- 
nere non possint, Gallorum imperia perferre praestare. 
Hos dicere : se non dubitare quin •• Romani Aeduis •' li- 
bertatem sint erepturi.** Hos dicere : si Helvetios supe- 
raverint Romani, Romanos una cum reliqua Gallia Aeduis 
libertatem erepturos esse. 

Ab eisdem nostra c5nsilia hostibus enuntiari. Nostra 
consilia quaeque in castris gerantur enuntiari. Hos a se 
coerceri '• non posse. Se Caesari necessariam rem enun- 



THE DISCLOSURES OF LISCUS 33 

tiare coactum/' Intellegere sese cum quanto'* periculd 
id fecerit.'* Se ob earn causam, quam diu potuerit, ta- 
cuisse.'* 



CHAPTER XVII OF CESAR'S ^TEXT 

17. Turn demum Liscus oratione Caesaris adductus 
quod antea tacuerat proponit: Esse nonnuUos quorum 
auctoritas apud plebem plurimum valeat, qui ya%c\x% 
privatim plus possint quam ipsi magistratus. f**^^^*?®^ 
Hos seditiosa atque improba orati5ne multitu- an ^duan 
dinem deterrere ne frumentum conferant quod LV.^eSby 
debeant : praestare, si iam principatum Galliae ^""oo"*- 
obtinere non possint, Gallorum quam Romanorum imperia 
perferre ; neque dubitare quin, si Helvetios superaverint 
Romani, iina cum reliqua Gallia Aeduis libertatem sint 
erepturi. Ab eisdem nostra consilia quaeque in castris ge- 
rantur hostibus enuntiari; hos a se coerceri non posse. 
Quin etiam, quod necessariam rem coactus Caesari enun- 
tiarit, intellegere sese quanto id cum periculo f ecerit, et ob 
eam causam quam diu potuerit tacuisse. 



17. IN DIRECT DISCOURSE FOR PURPOSE OF 

COMPARISON 

Liscus* own words to Ccesar 

" Sunt nonnulll quorum auct5ritas valeat, qui privatim 
plus possint" quam ipsi magistratus. Hi multitudinem 
deterrent ne frumentum conferant" quod detent. Praes- 
tat, si iam principatum obtinere non possunt^ Gall5rum 
imperia perferre ; neque dubitant quin," si Helvetios su- 



34 THE BEGINNER'S CjESAR 

peraverint Romani, libertatem sint erepturi. Ab eisdem 
vestra consilia quaeque in castris gerantur hostibus enutir 
tiantur ; hi a me coerceri nbnpossunt Quin etiam, quod 
necessario coactus tibi enuntidvty intellego quantd id cum 
"^xxQxAb ficerim^ et ob earn causam quam diu/^/i^f tacuiy 



18. THE PRIVATE CONFERENCE WITH LISCUS 

Caesar Dumnorigem designari sentiebat. Hac oratione 
Lisci, Dumnorix designatus est. Caesar, pluribus '* prae- 
sentibus," eas res iactari nolebat. Celeriter concilium 
dimittit. Liscum retinet. Quaerit ex e5 solo ea quae in 
conventu dixerat. Liscus liberius atque audacius dicit. 
Caesar eadem secret5 ab aliis quaerit. Reperit ea esse 
vera: Dumnorigem cupidum" rerum^ novarum esse; 
complures annos " portoria Aeduorum redempta habere. 

Dumnorix summa audacia*' erat. Magna gratia*' apud 
plebem erat. Complures annos omnia Aeduorum vecti- 
galia redempta habebat Vectigalia parvo pretio*' re- 
dempta habebat, propterea quod, illo** licente, contra 
liceri auderet** nemd. His rebus suam rem familiarem 
augebat. Facultates magnas ad largiendum comparabat. 
Magnum numerum equitatus su5 sumptu semper alebat. 
Equitatum circum se semper habebat. Domi" largiter 
poterat. Neque s5lum domi sed etiam apud f initimas civi- 
tates largiter poterat. Huius potentiae ^^ causa matrem in 
Biturigibus collocavit. Matrem in Biturigibus homini illic 
nobilissimo ac potentissimo collocavit. Ipse ex Helvetiis 
uxorem habuit. Sororem ex matre et propinquas suas 
nuptum in alias civitates collocavit. Favebat et cupiebat 



DUMNORIX 35 

Helvetiis " propter earn aif initatem. Odit etiam suo n5- 
mine Caesarem et Romanos, quod eorum adventu*' po- 
tentia eius deminuta sit. Eorum adventu, Divitiacus frater 
in antiquum locum gratiae* atque honoris restitutus est 
Si quid accidat" Romanis, summam in spem, per Helve- 
tios, regni obtinendi veniat. Imperio*' populi Romani, 
de regno desperat. Non modo de regno, sed etiam de ea 
gratia quam habet, desperat. 

Proelium equestre adversum paucis ante diebus" fac- 
tum erat. Reperiebat in quaerendo Caesar, initium eius 
fugae* a Dumnorige factum esse. Equitatui," quem 
auxilio" Caesari Aedui miserant, Dumnorix praeerat. 
Eorum' fuga,*' reliquus equitatus perterritus est. 



CHAPTER XVIII OF C^SAR 

l8, Caesar hac oratione Lisci Dumnorigem, Divitiaci 

fratrem, designari sentiebat ; sed, quod pluribus ^^ ^ ^^ 

praesentibus eas res iactari nolebat, celeriter cnceofDum- 

concilium dimittit, Liscum retinet. Quaerit ex character 

solo ea quae in conventu dixerat. Dicit liberius *°** po"cy- 
atque audacius. 

The influence of Dumnorix 

Eadem secret© ab aliis quaerit; reperit esse vera: *Ipsum 
esse Dumnorigem, summa audacia, magna apud plebem 
propter liberalitatem gratia, cupidum rerum novarum. 

His character 

Complures annos portoria reliquaque omnia Aedu5rum 
vectigalia parvo pretio redempta habere, propterea quod 



36 THE BEGINNER'S CMSAR 

illo licente contra liceri audeat nemo. His rebus et suam 
rem familiarem auxisse et facultates ad largiendum mag- 
nas comparasse ; magnum numerum equitatus suo sumptu 
semper alere et circum se habere ; neque solum domi, sed 
etiam apud finitimas civitates largiter posse, atque htiius 
potentiae causa matrem in Biturigibus homini illic nobilis- 
simo ac potentissimo collocasse, ipsum ex Helvetiis uxorem 
habere, sororem ex matre et propinquas suas nuptum in 
alias civitates collocasse. 

His policy 

Favere et cupere Helvetiis propter eam affinitatem, 
odisse etiam su5 nomine Caesarem et R5manos, quod 
eorum adventu potentia eius deminuta et Divitiacus frater 
in antiquum locum gratiae atque hondris sit restitutus. 
Si quid accidat R5manis, summam in spem per Helvetios 
regni obtinendi venire ; imperio populi Romani non modo 
de regno, sed etiam de ea quam habeat gratia, desperare.' 
Reperiebat etiam in quaerendo Caesar, quod proelium 
equestre adversum paucis ante diebus esset factum, initium 
eius fugae factum a Dumnorige atque eius equitibus (nam 
equitatui, quem auxili5 Caesari Aedui miserant, Dumnorix 
praeerat); eorum fuga reliquum esse equitatum perterri- 
tum. 




Galeae 



IMPEA CHMENT OF D UMNORIX 37 

19. FACTS AND SUSPICIONS WEIGH AGAINST 

THE ^DUAN MAGNATE 

Ad has suspiciones certissimae res accesserunt. Dum- 
norix per fines Sequandrum Helvetios tradtixerat. Ob- 
sides inter eos dandos curaverat. Ea omnia, initissu Cae- 
saris, fecerat. A magistratu Aeduorum accusatus erat. 
Ea omnia, inscientibus Aeduis, fecerat. Quibus rebus 
cognitis, Caesar satis esse causae' arbitrabatur qua re in 
eum animadverteret." Arbitrabatur satis esse causae 
qua re in Dumnorigem aut ipse animadverteret aut civita- 
tem animadvertere iuberet. 

The opposing force of Divitiacus^ loyalty 

Una res his omnibus rebus ^* repugnabat. Divitiaci 
fratris in populum Romanum summum studium cogndverat. 
Summam in se voluntatem cognoverat. Egregiam fidem, 
iustitiam, temperantiam Divitiaci cognoverat. Hoc omnibus 
Dumnorigis iniuriis repHgnabat: nam verebatur Caesar, 
ne, eius supplicio, Divitiaci animum offenderet.'" Itaque, 
priusquam quicquam conaretur, Divitiacum ad se vocari 
iubet. Cotidianis interpretibus remotis, per Gaium Vale- 
rium Procillum cum e5 colloquitur. C. Valerius Procillus, 
princeps Galliae provinciae, familiaris suus erat. Ei 
summam omnium rerum fidem habebat. 

Caesar simul commonefacit quae, ips5 praesente, in con- 
cilio Gall5rum de Dumnorige sint dicta." Ostendit quae 
separatim quisque de e5 apud se dixerit. Caesar petit 
atque hortatur ut sine eius offensione animi* ipse de eo 
statuat. Caesar petit ut, causa cognita, vel ipse de eo 
statuat, vel civitatem statuere iubeat. 



38 THE BEGINNER'S CMSAR 

CHAPTER XIX OF C^SAR 

19, Quibus rebus cognitis, cum ad has suspiciones cer- 

tissimae res accederent, quod per fines Sequanorum Hel- 

vetios tradtixisset, quod obsides inter eos dan- 

Caesar coun« 

seis with dos curasset, quod ea omnia non modo iniussu 
concerning ^^^ ^^ civitatis scd etiam inscientibus ipsis 
his brother fecisset, quod a magistratu Aedu5rum accusa- 
retur, satis esse causae arbitrabatur qua re in 
eum aut ipse animadverteret aut civitatem animadvertere 
iuberet. His omnibus rebus unum repugnabat, quod 
Divitiaci fratris summum in populum Romanum studium, 
summam in se voluntatem, egregiam fidem, iustitiam, 
temperantiam cognoverat : nam ne eius supplicio Divitiaci 
animum offenderet verebatur. Itaque priusquam quic- 
quam conaretur, Divitiacum ad se vocari iubet, et cotidia- 
nis interpretibus remotis per C. Valerium Procillum, prin- 
cipem Galliae pr5vinciae, familiarem suum, cui summam 
omnium rerum fidem habebat, cum eo colloquitur ; simul 
commonefacit quae ipso praesente in concilid Gallorum de 
Dumnorige sint dicta, et ostendit quae separatim quisque 
de e5 apud se dixerit; petit atque hortatur ut sine eius 
offensione animi vel ipse de eo, causa cognita, statuat, vel 
civitatem statuere iubeat. 




Ndvis Longa 



THE PLEA OF DIVJTIACUS 39 



20. THE PLEA OF DIVITIACUS 

Divitiacus, multis cum lacrimis,^ Caesarem complexus 
est. Obsecrare coepit ne quid gravius** in fratrem sta- 
tueret. 

Divitiacus dixit : 

" Scio haec esse vera, nee quisquam ex eo plus quam 
ego doloris' capit, propterea quod, cum ego gratia «• pltiri- 
xixxxxsi possem domi atque in reliqua Gallia et cum ille mini- 
mum propter adulescentiam posset, per me^^ crevit ; qui- 
bus opibus^s ac nervis non solum ad minuendam" gratiam 
meam sed paene ad pemiciem meam uiitur. Ego tamen 
et amore fraternd et existimatione vulgi commoveor, 
Quod^"^ si quid ei^* a ie acciderit, cum ego hunc locum 
amicitiae apud te teneatfiy nemo exlstimdbit non med volun- 
tate factum esse. Qua ex re totius Galliae animi a tne 
dvertentur,^^ 

Dumnorix is spared but placed under guard 

Pluribus verbis** a Caesare haec petebat. Cum haec 
flens peteret, Caesar eius dextram prendit. Cons5latus 
rogat ut finem orandi faciat.** Tanti* eius apud se gra- 
tiam esse ostendit uti suum dolorem condonet.*' Rei 
ptiblicae iniuriam Divitiaci precibus" condonat. Gratia 
Divitiaci tanti apud Caesarem est uti iniurias Dumnorigis 
fratris voluntati^* Divitiaci condonet. Dumnorigem ad se 
vocat, et fratrem adhibet. Caesar ostendit quae in Dimi- 
norige reprehendat."' Caesar proponit quae ipse intelle- 
gat, et quae civitas queratur. Caesar ei monet ut in 
reliquum tempus omnes suspiciones vitet. Se praeterita 



40 THE BEGINNER'S CMSAR 

condonare dicit. Caesar praeterita Divitiacd fratri con- 
donat. Caesar Dumnorigi custodes ponit, ut scire possit 
quae agat, et quibuscum loquatur. 



CHAPTER XX OF C^SAR 

20. Divitiacus, multis cum lacrimis Caesarem com- 
plexus, obsecrare coepit ne quid gravius in fratrem statue- 
^ ^^ ret : * Scire se ilia esse vera, nee quemquam ex 

spares Dum- eo plus quam sc doloris capere, propterea 

norix but - . _^._ ,_ . J - ^ 

places him quod, cum ipse gratia plunmum domi atque m 
under guard, jg^jq^a^ Gallia, illc minimum propter adulescen- 

tiam posset, per se crevisset ; quibus opibus ac nervis non 
s5lum ad minuendam gratiam sed paene ad perniciem 
suam uteretur. Sese tamen et amore fraternd et existi- 
matione vulgi commoverl. Quod si quid ei a Caesare 
gravius accidisset, cum ipse eum locum amicitiae apud 
eum teneret, neminem existimatiirum non sua voluntate 
factum ; qua ex re f uturum uti t5tius Galliae animi a se 
averterentur.* Haec cum pluribus verbis flens a Caesare 
peteret, Caesar eius dextram prendit; consolatus rogat 
finem 5randi faciat ; tanti eius apud se gratiam esse osten- 
dit uti et rei publicae iniuriam et suum dolorem eius 
voluntati ac precibus condonet. Dumnorigem ad se vocat, 
fratrem adhibet ; quae in e5 reprehendat ostendit ; quae 
ipse intellegat, quae civitas queratur, pr6p5nit ; monet ut 
in reliquum tempus omnes suspiciones vitet; praeterita se 
Divitiacd fratri condonare dicit. Dumnorigi custodes 
ponit, ut quae agat, quibuscum loquatur, scire possit. 



CONCLUSION 41 

CONCLUSION 
The residue of Caesar's account of the Helvetian war 
may be briefly summarized. After the incident last re- 
corded, he follows the enemy for several days, but owing 
to natural obstructions he cannot gain an advantageous 
position to check the onward movement. At length lack of 
food compels him to turn aside to a city westward. The 
Helvetii mistake this movement for signs of weakening or 
fear, and in turn become the pursuers, much to Caesar's 
unexpected advantage. The change precipitates a battle 
in which he defeats them with such loss as to preclude 
further resistance. "The remnant of the once proud and 
migh^ host sadly returned to its mountain home." 



42 THE BEGINNER'S CMSAR 

The following chapters, bringing the account of the 
trouble with the Helvetians to a close, were omitted in the 
earlier edition of this hand-book. They now appear, not 
merely for artistic unity, — that the student may read with- 
out interruption the chronicle of this initial campaign, — 
but because of the desire of teachers for matter, immedi- 
ately at hand, to test the class in the comprehension and 
exposition of the original language of Caesar, without the 
intermediary aid of the adapted text. Hence, the follow- 
ing text appears verbatim, and syntactical references are 
limited to the most obscure instances. 



21. Eodem die ab expl5rat6ribus certior f actus hostes 
sub monte consedisse milia passuum ab ipsius castris octo, 
Caesar ar- qualis esset natura montis et qualis in circuitu 
harass the asccusus, qui coguoscerent misit. Renuntia- 
Heivetiani. timi est facilem esse. De tertia vigilia T. La- 
bienum, legatum pro praet5re, cum duabus legionibus et iis 
ducibus,'' qui iter cogndverant, summum iugum montis 
ascendere iubet ; quid sui consilii** sit, ostendit. Ipse de 
quarta vigilia e5dem itinere, quo hostes ierant, ad eos 
contendit equitatumque omnem ante se mittit. P. C5n- 
sidius, qui rei' militaris peritissimus" habebatur et in 
exercitu L. SuUae et postea in M. Crassi fuerat, cum ex- 
ploratdribus praemittitur. 



22. Prima luce, cum sumraus mons a Labieno tenere- 
tur, ipse ab hostium castris non longius mille et quin- 



HARASSED BY THE HELVETIANS 43 

gentis passibus abesset, neque, ut postea ex captivis com- 
perit, aut ipsius adventus aut Labieni cognitus esset,'* 
Considius, equo** admisso, ad eum accurrit, „, . 

' ^ ' ' His plans are 

dicit montem, quern a Labieno occupari volu- frustrated 
erit,'* ab hostibus teneri : id se a Gallicis ar- take of Con- 
mis atque insignibus cognovisse. Caesar suas ■****"■• 
copias in proximum collem subducit, aciem instruit, La- 
bienus, ut erat ei praeceptum a Caesare, ne proelium com- 
mitteret, nisi ipsius copiae prope hostium castra visae'* 
essent, ut undique uno tempore in hostes impetus fieret, 
monte occupato nostros exspectabat proelioque abstinebat. 
Multo denique die" per exploratores Caesar cognovit et 
montem a suis teneri et Helvetios castra movisse et C5n- 
sidium timore perterritum, quod non vidisset, pro viso sibi 
renuntiasse. Eo die, qu5 consuerat intervallo, hostes 
sequitur et milia** passuum tria ab edrum castris castra 
ponit. 



23, Postridie eius diei,"* quod omnino biduum super- 
erat cum exercitui frumentum metiri oporteret, et quod a 
Bibracte, oppido Aeduorum longe maximo et copiosissimo, 
non amplius milibus passuum xviii aberat, rei 

, , The Romans 

frumentanae" prospiciendum" existimavit ; marching 
iter ab Helvetiis avertit ac Bibracte*" ire con- Bibracte, 
tendit. Ea res per fugitives L. Aemili, de- J^dhilawed 
curionis equitum Gallorum, hostibus nuntiatur. by the Hei- 

TT 1 • , . . T» _ - vetians. 

Helvetii, seu quod timore pertemtos Romanos 
discedere a se existimarent, eo" magis, quod pridie supe- 
rioribus locis occupatis proelium non commisissent, sive 
eo, quod re frtimentaria intercludi posse c5nfiderent, 



44 THE BEGINNER'S CMSAR 

commQt^to consilio atque itinere" converse nostros a no- 
vissimo agmine insequi ac lacessere coepenint. 



24. Postquam** id animum" advertit, copUls suas 
Caesar in proximum coUem subducit equitatumque qui 
sustineret hostium irapetum misit Ipse interim in colle 
CK»r pre. medio triplicem acietn instruxit legionum^ quat- 
bmttiV'"The ^'^■" veteranarum ; sed in summS iugo duas 
Heivetiuis legiones quas in Gallia citeriore proxime con- 
the attack, scripserat et omnia auxilia coUocarl, ac totum 
montem hominibus compleri, et interea sarcinas in unum 
locum conferri, et eum ab his qui in superiore acie con- 
stiterant mOniri iussit. Helvetii cum omnibus suis earns 
secuti, impedimenta in unum locum contulerunt ; ipsi 
confertissima acie," rSiecto nostro equitatii, phalange 
facta, sub primam nostram acietn successerunt. 



:^Um Bj a Waii ana IHUh 



THE BATTLE 45 

25. Caesar primum suo deinde omnium ex conspectu 
remotis equis, ut aequato omnium periculo spem fugae tol- 
leret, cohortatus suos proelium commisit. Mi- ^^^ battle 
lites e loco superiore pilis missis facile hostium The Helve- 
phalangem perfregerunt. Ea disiecta, gladiis {o":dTo«- 
destrictis in e5s impetum fecenint. Gallis *'**** 
magno ad pugnam erat irapedimento quod, pluribus eorum 
scutis uno ictu pilorum transfixis et colligatis, cum**^ fer- 
rum se inflexisset, neque evellere neque sinistra impedita 
satis commode pugnare poterant, multi ut diu iactato 
bracchio praeoptarent scutum manu emittere et nudo cor- 
pore pugnare. Tandem vulneribus defessi et pedem re- 
ferre et, quod m5ns suberat circiter mille passuum spatio, 
eo se recipere coeperunt. Capto monte et succedentibus 
nostris, Boii et Tulingi, qui hominum milibus circiter xv 
agmen hostium claudebant et novissimis*' praesidio erant, 
ex itinere nostros ab latere aperto aggressi circumvenire ; 
et id conspicati Helvetii, qui in montem sese receperant, 
rursus instare et proelium redintegrare coeperunt. R6- 
mani conversa" signa bipartitd intulerunt : prima et se- 
cunda acies, ut victis ac subm5tis resisteret; tertia, ut 
venientes sustineret. 



■•^•■ 



26, Ita ancipiti proelio diu atque acriter pugnatum est. 
Diutius cum sustinere nostrorum impetus non possent, 
alteri se, ut coeperant, in montem receperunt, ^j^^ ^^ 
alteri ad impedimenta et carros su5s se con- routed and 
tulerunt. Nam h5c toto proelio," cum" ab ward.C8e8ar 
hora septima ad vesperum pugnatum sit, aver- p"""^**' 
sum hostem videre nem5 potuit. Ad multam noctem etiam 



46 THE BEGINNER'S CMSAR 

ad impedimenta pugnatum est, propterea quod pro vallo 
carros obiecerant et e loco superiore in nostros venientes 
tela coniciebant,** et nonnuUi inter carros rotasque mataras 
ac tragulas subiciebant nostrosque vulnerabant. Diu cum 
esset pugnatum, impedimentis castrisque** nostri potiti 
sunt.** Ibi Orgetorigis filia atque unus e filiis captus est. 
Ex eo proelio circiter hominuni milia cxxx superfuerunt, 
eaque tota nocte continenter ierunt: nullam partem** noctis 
itinere intermisso in fines Lingonum die quarto pervene- 
runt, cum et propter vulnera militum et propter sepulturam 
occisorum nostri triduum** morati eos sequi non potuis- 
sent. Caesar ad Lingones litteras nuntiosque misit ne 
eos frumento neve alia re iuvarent:'* qui si iuvissent, se 
eodem loc5w quo Helvetids habitiirum. Ipse triduo inter- 
misso cum omnibus copiis eos sequi coepit. 



27. Helvetii omnium rerum inopia adducti legatos de 
deditione ad eum miserunt. Qui** cum eum in itinere 
Surrender of convcnisseut scque ad pedes proiecissent sup- 
the Helve- plicitcrque locuti flentes pacem petissent, atque 

tians. Six . , _ , 

thousand COS m CO loco quo tum essent suum adventum 
escape. exspectare iussisset, paruerunt. Eo postquam 

Caesar pervenit, obsidCs, arma, servos qui ad eos perfugis- 
sent** poposcit. Dum ea conquinmtur et conferuntur, nocte 
intermissa, circiter hominum milia vi eius pagi qui Ver- 
bigenus appellatur, sive timore perterriti ne** armis traditis 
supplicio afficerentur, sive spe salutis inducti, quod in tanta 
multitiidine deditici5rum suam fugam aut occultari aut om- 
nino ignorari posse existimarent, prima nocte"* e castris 



COMPELLED TO RETURN TO HELVETIA 47 

Helvetionim egressi ad Rhenum finesque Germandrum 
contenderunt. 



28. Quod •• ubi"* Caesar resciit, quorum per fines ierant, 
his uti conquirerent** et reducerent, si sibi purgati esse 
vellent,'* imperavit ; reductos in hostium numero habuit ; 
reliquos omnes, obsidibus, armis, perfugis traditis, in de- 
ditionem accepit. Helvetios, Tulingos, Latobrigos in 
fines suos, unde erant profecti, reverti iussit ; ij.,,^,, ^^ 
et, quod omnibus f rugibus amissis domi *• nihil retaken and 

Mr 1 KA A 11 1 M put to death, 

erat quo" famem tolerarent,"" AUobrogibus the rest com. 
imperavit ut eis frumenti c5piam facerent; turnto*Heu 
ipsos oppida vicosque qu5s incenderant resti- ^®***- 
tuere iussit. Id ea maxime ratione fecit, quod noluit eum 
locum unde Helvetii discesserant vacare, ne propter boni- 
tatem agrorum Germani, qui trans Rhenum incolunt, e 
suis finibus in Helvetiorum fines transirent" et finitimi 
Galliae provinciae AUobrogibusque essent. Boi5s peten- 
tibus Aeduis, quod egregia virtiite erant cogniti, ut in 
finibus suis collocarent, concessit; quibus illi agr5s de- 
derunt, quosque postea in parem iuris libertatisque con- 
dici5nem atque ipsi erant receperunt. 



29, In castris Helvetiorum tabulae repertae simt lit- 
teris Graecis confectae et ad Caesarem relatae, quibus in 
tabulis nominatim ratio c5nfecta erat, qui numerus dom5 
exisset*** eorum, qui arma ferre possent,"* et item separa- 
tim pueri, senes, mulieresque. Quarum omnium ratidnum 



THE BEGINNER'S C^SAR 

erat capitum Helvetiorura mflia cclxiii, Tulingo- 
Enumeis- '"™ milia xxxvi, Latobrigonim xiiii, Raura- 
tioD of tha corum xxiil, Boionim xxxii ; ex his, qui arnia 
ferre possent, ad milia n6n3ginta duo. Summa 
omnium fuenmt'** ad mlHa cccLXViii, Eorum, 
qui domum redienint, censii habtto, ut Caesar imperi- 
verat, repertus est humerus milium c et x. 



■Illea. 



ENGLISH-LATIN EXERCISES 

The following exercises need no special vocabulary. 
They are based on Ciesar's text, and are graded to suit 
the average ability. Beginning with Chapter X, the writ- 
ten parts approach a story quite unlike Csesar, yet the 
phraseology is still drawn from the Latin text of the cor- 
responding chapter. A constant effort has been made to 
keep close to the vocabulary of the special chapter of the 
lesson ; but occasionally, both by purpose and necessity, 
words and phrases are taken from preceding chaptei 
These, however, are oft-recurring words, and may not be 
unreasonably exacted of the pupil's memory. When need- 
ful, foot-notes help to the desired word. Moreover, fre- 
quent exegetical numbers above the word refer the student, 
for further he\p, to the explanatory Rules of Syntax. 

The " Written Exercises " may be found too difficult for 
young classes, in which case easier portions only may be 
assigned, or entirely omitted, — the "Oral Exercises" 
being done in writing instead. For older classes, how- 
ever, and especially for college preparatory students, the 
S labor of the written parts in full is necessary. 



so THE BEGINNER'S CMSAR 

CHAPTER I 

A, Oral Work in Class 

1 . The Garonne was a river in Gaul. 

2. It separated the Gauls from the Aquitani. 

3. The Belgae inhabited one part of Gaul. 

4. Of all the Gauls the Belgae were bravest. 

5. They were furthest distant from the civilization of the 
province. 

6. The Germans live across the Rhine. 

7. They continually wage war with the Helvetians. 

8. The Helvetians often wage war in the territory of the 
Germans who live across the river Rhine. 

9. The territory of the Gauls begins at the river Rhone. 

10. They are bounded by the Garonne river, the ocean, and 
the territory of the Belgae. 

B. Written Work 
It is said that there were three divisions of Gaul, which were 
different from one another in language and customs. Of them 
all, the Belgians were nearest to the Germans, in whose country 
they often waged war, wherefore they surpassed the^rest of the 
Gauls in valor. The Aquitanians possessed another part which 
was called Aquitania, and which was 'near Spain. The third 
part was inhabited by the Celts, who were called Gauls in the 
tongue of the Romans, and whose territory began at the Rhone, 
and sloping northward reached the ocean. 



■•o*- 



CHAPTER II 

A, Oral Work 

1. Orgetorix was very rich. 

2. Orgetorix was the most famous among the Helvetians. 

3. He was influenced by a greed of royal power. 



ENGLISH-LA TIN EXERCISES 5 1 

4. When Messala and Piso were consuls, he formed a plot 
of the nobles. 

5. He easily persuaded the state. 

6. The Helvetii are bounded on one side by the Rhine. 

7. The river was very wide and deep. 

8. It divided the Helvetian land from the Germans. 

9. The Jura mountain was very high. 

10. The territory of the Helvetians was bounded on a third 
side by Lake Geneva. 

1 1 . They did not roam about widely. 

12. They were not able to make war upon their neighbors. 

13. The nobles persuaded the state to leave home with all 
its forces. 

14. They said it was" easy to become masters of the su- 
preme power of Gaul. 

, B. Written Work 

Orgetorix persuaded the nobles to get possession of Gaul, 
because their territory, which extended about two hundred 
miles in length and one hundred in width,' was not large. 
Since he surpassed the others in valor and greed, he formed a 
plot, when Messala and Piso were consuls, to lead a multitude 
of men out of their narrow boundaries. 



CHAPTER HI 
A, Oral Work 



1 . They were induced by Orgetorix. 

2. These things pertain to our departure. 

3. They prepare a large number of beasts of burden. 

4. A supply of grain was on hand. 

5. They made peate with the nearest states. 



52 THE BEGINNER'S CMSAR 

6. Three of the most powerful (men) of the Helvetians ac- 
complished these thingis. 

7. They deemed two years to be enough. 

8. The father 6f CasticUs had possessed the royal power 
many years among the Sequani. 

9. He was a friend of the Roman people. 

10. I shall seize the leadership which niy father held before. 

11. I shall persuade Dumnorix to attempt** the same in his 
state. 

12. He gave him" his daughter in marriage. 

13. They say they will*' obtain the government of all Gaul. 

14. There is no doubt but** what Dumnorix is** tJie brother 
of Divitiacus. ^Mw^ 

B, Written Work 

Induced by this speech,' the thre*» strongest nations of Gaul 
give tlie oath to one imo i.- make all preparations for de- 
parture, and in the third year to* leave* their territories and 
win* for themselves the kingdoms across the Rhine. They 
determi^«*d to'* select O^getorix to'' go"^ on an embassy to 
the nearest states to** persuade them to attempt the same 
thing. He selected Casticus, a Sequanian'*, and like^dse 
Dumnorix, . i .£.!.ian, brother'* of Divitiacus. They easily 
achieved their efforts because the Helvetii were very powerful. 

a. This may be considered indirect discourse or ii) apposition with 
oath ; in either case, use the infinitive. See Rules 67, 79. b. Use 
the relative pronoun ; see Rules 48, 94. c. Use suscipid. Rule 93. 

* Occasionally simple words and expressions of preceding chapters will 
be used. To leave = exlre de of chap. 2. See Rule 95. 




Ilasta 



. ENGLISH -LA TIN EXERCISES 5 3 

CHAPTER IV ^ V^ 



- A, Oral Work Kh^ \ 

1. This matter was reported. JL/V^^ ^ , -a ti ^ 

2. I shall «2port it. Ji \ vOs^A ^ '^'^" 

3. He reported it to the Helvetii. 

4. Orgetorix pleads his cause. 

5. They compelled him to plead his case. 

6. He will plead his case in chains. 

7. He ought to be burned. 

8. The penalty did not follow. 

9. The day was fixed. 

10. He had a great household. 

1 1 . He led about ten thousand men to the court. 

12. He collected all his vassals and debtors from all parts. 

13. He had a great number of the"se. 

14. He will lead them all to the same place in order that he 
may escape. 

15. The state was roused on account of this. 

16. Orgetorix escaped, and there was suspicion that he died. 



B, Written Work 

On the day of the trial, he led about ten thousand men to 
court, and plead his c^e. He had a large number of vassals 
and debtors whom he had gathered from every quarter and ftad 
led to the trial in order that he might escape from chains. The 
public officers had determined to burn' him, if* condemned. 
Through his vassals he escaped. The state was roused on this 
account, and, while the government was collecting men to 
enforce authority, Orgetorix died. 

a. See Rule of Syntax 105. 



\ 



--/ 



54 THE BEGINNER'S C^SAR 

CHAPTER V 

A. Oral Work 

1. They had attempted to do this. 

2. They do this after his death. 

3. They think they are ready. 

4. When they are ready they will leave their territories. 
«^'5. They had about twelve walled towns. 

6. They burned about four hundred villages. 

7. They did this to take away all hope. 

8. They were better prepared to undergo all dangers. 

9. I shall take three months' provisions from home. 

10. Each one will do the same. 

11. I departed from the village after his death. 

12. The Boii lived across the Rhine. 

13. They were allies of the three powerful nations. 

14. There is no hope of returning home. 

B, Written Work 

The Helvetii determined to take away all hope of returning 
home. When they were ready, they ordered each one to bum 
his buildings and all his grain except what he was going to take 
from home. There were about four hundred villages and towns. 
These were all burned. Their neighbors adopted •• the same 
plan, burned" their towns, and departed with them J After* the 
Boii left hoihe and crossed the Rhine into Gaut^ey were 
persuaded ** by the Helvetii to depart with them as *= their allies, 
to each one of whom the Helvetii gave provisions for three 
months. 

a. See Rule 53, note, b. See Rules 14, 30. c. Sociiy Rule 79. 



ENGLISH-LA TIN EXERCISES 5 S 



CHAPTER VI 

A, Oral Work 

1 . I can leave home. 

2. There are two rivers in Gaul. 

3. The Rhone is narrow in some places. 

4. They will not be able to go through our province. 

5. Very few were in the other town. 

6. The roads among the mountains were difficult. 

7. They have " carts in some places. 

8. I shall compel you to let me go. 

9. He is not well disposed toward us. 

10. The route does not seem easy. 

11. It is much easier to cross by the bridge. 

12. On what day shall you leave town? 

13. I think I shall be*^ able to persuade him. 

14. Every thing is ready. 

B. Written Work 

They thought they would go across the river either by a 
ford, because it was said that there were fords at some places 
in the Rhone, or by a bridge which was near ^^ Geneva. The 
two routes were easy because they led through territories which 
had been recendy pacified and were well disposed toward them. 
They appointed a day when they were to meet to decide by 
which road they might be able more easily to go. 



CHAPTER VII 

A. Oral Work 
I. It was reporte4. 
;2. I shall try to do it. 
3. He left the city and hastened home.** 



\ 



56 THE BEGINNERS CjESAR 

4. We have a large number of soldiers in this city. 

5. There are altogether ten thousand. 

6. I shall inform him of this matter. 

7. They sent an embassy to Caesar. 

8. I intend to do no harm. 

9. He has obtained a place near the city. 

10. Ten legions marched across the bridge. 

11. I have no other home. 

12. I remember the men. 

13. Lucius Cassius was killed. 

14. I do not think I ought to allow it. 

15. He has an opportunity of making many friends. 

16. I shall order them to cut down the bridge. 

B, Written Work 

After he ordered them to march to the city, they informed him 
that** the bridge had been'* cut down by the consul's army 
which had come to Geneva by forced marches. He decided to 
hasten across the Rhone by another route, because it was said 
that there were some fords in the river by which he could easily 
cross. A very large number of Roman soldiers assembled near 
the banks to keep him back until the consul might have time 
to send another legion to the ford. 



>o< 



CHAPTER VIII 

A, Oral Work 

1. I returned from the lake by night. 

2. He will give up the attempt'** 

3. They will not attempt it against my will. 

4. 1 sometimes go to the mountains. 



ENGLISH-LA TIN EXERCISES 5 7 

5. When he finished the work,*' he returned. 

6. The wall was ten feet high. 

7. I cannot appoint a day for any one. 

8. The men who had assembled were driven back. 

9. There are rafts on the river. 

10. By these fortifications he may be able to keep them back. 

B, Written Work 

When he returned from the fortifications, which had been 
constructed from the lake to the river, he assured * his men that 
he would repulse the Roman guards if they should try to keep 
him back. However, after a time, ^ he lost all hope of march- 
ing through the province against Caesar's will, and sending an 
embassy to the Roman army he asked that he be permitted to 
do it by Caesar's consent. 

When the latter <= refused, the Helvetians made many rafts, 
working ^ often by night, and tried to break through. They 
were driven back across the river by the charge of the Roman 
soldiers. 

a. Suit ostendit (omit " men "). b. Use spatium. c. Use is, 
d. Omit working. 



CHAPTER IX 

A, Oral Work 

1. I can't undertake the matter. 

2. He has a friend who is very powerful. 

3. The people desire a revolution. 

4. He will not go if his friends are unwilling. 

5. I am bound by many favors. 

6. He married my daughter. 



58 THE BEGINNER'S CMSAR 

7. He was very powerful in the states. 

8. You are our mediator. 

9. They will allow us to go. 

10. He is our friend. 

1 1. I am willing to send one friend as hostage.^* 

12. I can not allow it of my own will. 

13. He wanted to have as many friends as possible among 
the Gauls. 

14. His daughter kept him from the journey. 

B, Written Work 

I could not voluntarily allow him to marry my daughter, be- 
cause I knew* that he'* was not a friend of Cassius, to whom I 
was bound by many favors. Nevertheless, I did not wish to do ** 
him wrong, because he was a man ^ of great good will among 
his people, and had hosts ^ of friends in many parts of the state. 
One way was left for me. And so I sent Dumnorix to them as 
mediator, and he, after a few days, arranged matters with no 

offence. 

a. Use cognosco, b. Omit man, c. Use mulHtudo. d. Use in- 
iurids Inferrey and see Rule 13. 



CHAPTER X 

A, Oral Work 

1. I shall report it to Labienus. 

2. I intend to go with them. 

3. The place is not far from the city. 

4. There is great danger in the mountains. 

5. Warlike people live there. 

6. It is an unfriendly land. 



ENGLISH-LA TIN EXERCISES 5 9 

7. I know that the Alps are mountains. 

8. On account of these things he has enemies. 

9. The land beyond the Alps is open. 

10. They put Lieutenant Labienus in command of the legions. 

1 1. On the seventh day I shall hurry across the river. 

12. He was beaten in two battles. 

13. They arrived in the city recentiy. 

14. This is the last day. 

15. I shall reach the banks of the river within three days, and 
thence go across into a hostile land. 

16. The Germans were a people beyond the Rhine. 

17. He led his army by the nearest route to the province. 

B. Written Work 

The first day after my journey into Italy, I intended to go to 
the fortifications which were not far distant, because I had 
friends there, passing the winter. I myself knew it would be 
dangerous to go without an escort *, for in many places were 
warlike men who had sometimes beaten us in batde. And 
yet**, I determined <= to go with a very few soldiers, and 
although** Lieut. Servus tried to keep me from the difficult 
undertaking, I led five soldiers with me out of camp by night, 
hastened across a country held ** by enemies of Rome, and with- 
in two days reached the place where my friends were. 

a. Use praesidium. b. Use tamen of chapter 4. c. Use constitud 
of chapter 5. d. Use occupo. 



CHAPTER XI 
A. Oral Work 

1. I ought to go to Caesar. 

2. There were villages across the river. 

3. He has two children left. 



6o THE BEGINNER* S CMSAR 

4. They reached the territories of the AUobroges on the sev- 
enth day. 

5. The enemy was ravaging the lands of the ^Edui. 

6. And so they sent an embassy to Caesar to ask aid. 

7. They will lead an army through the narrow passes of the 
mountains. 

8. They could not defend themselves. 

9. I have at all times deserved the aid of my friends. 

10. He has possessions beyond the Rhone. 

1 1 . They fled to Caesar. 

12. They showed that they were" friends. 

13. I have nothing left. 

14. He was induced by this to go. 

15. He decided that he ought to wait. 

16. The fortunes of the allies were exhausted. 

17. He can't check the violence of the people. 

1 8. The enemy led their forces away into the defiles. 

19. I shall inform Caesar. 

20. The enemy is ravaging the land all the while. 



B, Written Work 

I was almost in sight of the place, when my friends hastened 
to tell me that two children were being carried away by the 
enemy, and were by this time among the nearest defiles of the 
Alps. These children were relatives by blood of my friend Lu- 
cius, who was with my brother in Spain ; and so I determined 
that I ought not to wait until I could inform him. And yet I 
knew it would be very dangerous * to go into the mountains 
without a large escort, for the enemy, it was said,** were not 
few ^. And so I sent a messenger <= to the fortifications, which 
were not far distant **, to ask aid.^^*'- 

0. Chap. 10. b. Use p^rpauct, c* Use niintiuSf-t. d. Chap. i. 



ENGLISH-LA TIN EXERCISES 6 1 

CHAPTER XII 
A, Oral Work 

1. The river Sa6ne flows into the Rhone. 

2. It flows with marvelous smoothness. 

3. In what direction does it flow? 

4. The Helvetians made many skiffs. 

5. They will cross over with rafts. 

6. He led three parts of the army across the river. 

7. Scouts informed him that a fourth part was this side the 
Sa6ne. 

8. He set out from camp about the third watch. 

9. He reached the river. 

10. They had not yet crossed over. 

1 1. A large part was killed. 

12. Let** us hide in the woods. 

13. He is called Caesar. 

14. I left home the next day. 

15. Brutus killed Caesar. 

16. My father will avenge all wrongs. 

17. They were killed in the same battle. 

B, Written Work 
When Lucius left home, he sent his two children to his father- 
in-law who lived** near Aquileia. By chance, the latter* de- 
parted the next day to private possessions in the open « country 
beyond ^ the walls of the town. The grandfather set out with 
the children, unsuspicious of danger ; for it could not be sup- 
posed that there were enemies in a place so near the Roman 
camp.^* They had almost reached the banks of the river, which 
was this side of his possessions, when some bandits,^ who were 
hiding, came out of the woods, killed him, and carried the chil- 
dren away*= to the mountains. 

a. Use is, b. Use latro^ latronis, m. c. Use abduco of chap. 11. 
d. Use incolo. e. Chap. 10. f. extrdy with ace. 



62 THE BEGINNER'S C^SAR 

CHAPTER XIII 

A, Oral Work 

1. The battle was fought in one day. 

2. There is a bridge over the Sa6ne. 

3. He followed the rest of the forces. 

4. I shall lead an army into those places. 

5. I did it with the greatest difficulty. 

6. Divico was a leader in the Cassian war. 

7. He cannot bring aid. 

8. I remember the former valor of the Belgians. 

9. He did it in one day. 

10. He went into that region where the enemy was. 

1 1 . I wanted to go on this account. 

12. They suddenly crossed the river. 

13. I do not attribute our misfortune to his arrival. 

14. They fight craftily. 

15. I learned this from my father. 

16. Let him not despise us. 

1 7. They said they would go. 

18. They rely upon ambuscades. 



B, Written Work 

Their father, as I have said, was in Spain at this time, and 
so I hastened to bear aid to his children. I knew we must 
fight craftily with these bandits, for the people of those dis- 
tricts in the mountains rely upon ambuscades rather than valor. 
They might *• suddenly attack us, entangled* in the defiles of 
their region. Wherefore, my escort being small,** I did not 
despise the danger. On the arrival of the soldiers from the 
neighboring camp, we set out. We crossed the river Sadne 
with the greatest difficulty, for there was no bridge there, and 



ENGLISH-LA TIN EXERCISES 6 3 

hastened in that direction where my friends said the bandits 
had gone. 

a. Use impedUuSy and see Rule 105. b. Use parvus. 



CHAPTER XIV 

A, Oral Work 

1 . I remember what they said. 

2. He mentioned it to me. 

3. I am not conscious of any wrong. 

4. Let us be on our guard. 

5. He did not know what he had done. 

6. They were deceived by the enemy. 

7. I do not think I ^* ought to be afraid. 

8. They were frightened without reason. 

9. I cannot forget the insult 

10. They wanted to do it against his will. 

11. He boasts arrogantiy of his victory. 

12. They were accustomed to allow this. 

13. It will not be difficult to give hostages. 

14. He will do what he has promised. 

15. I know Caesar will make peace with them. 

16. He apologized to the Helvetians. 

17. They are not accustomed to give hostages. 

18. He was a witness of this aEair. 

19. They did wrong to their comrades. 

20. He gave this reply and departed. 

21. I shall not grant them freedom from punishment without 
reason. 

22. What did the Roman people promise? 

23. If •' I wanted to forget the wrong, could I ? 



64 THE BEGINNER'S CMSAR 

24. I grieved over it for a time. 

25. Let them be on their guard. 

B. Written Work 

I shall long remember that march to the mountains, across 
deep rivers, where there were no fords, through woods, where 
the enemy might be hiding, into the most difficult defiles, 
amidst great dangers, until* we reached* suddenly the camp of 
the bandits. They were excited by our arrival, and were not 
able to defend themselves. Some ^ were absent from camp, 
others** took to flight*^ into the adjoining woods. They had in- 
flicted wrongs upon the people so long without punishment 
that they thought they need "* no longer fear. But they were 
deceived this time, and were off their guard. 

As leader of our band, I spoke to them as follows : 

"You were going** to carry these children away into bondage,^ 
aware of the wrong you were doing to a friend of Gaul. I 
know he will grieve all the more because he does not deserve 
this injury. I fain would ^ punish you for this crime, but I 
will grant you impunity if you give us his children without harm. 

" We have come without fear^ into these deep defiles, far 
from home and few in number, as you see. We are not afraid. 
We are Romans. But let us not boast of courage. You are 
witnesses of this that the immortal gods have granted to us 
the victory." 

a. See chap. 7. b. Use alii , . . alii, c. See chap. 12. d. Use 
First Periphrastic imperfect of abducifre. e. Use proper mode and 
tense of void. f. Use timor. g. See chap. 1 1. 




Ittgutu 



ENGLISH-LA TIN EXERCISES 6$ 

CHAPTER XV 

A. Oral Work 

1. Caesar had collected cavalry, about" four thousand in 
number. 

2. He sent a few allies ahead into the province. 

3. The enemy pursued him into an unfavorable locality, and 
engaged him in battle. 

4. A few of the soldiers fell. 

5. They followed our rear for fifteen days. 

6. Let us send horsemen to see in what direction they are 
marching. 

7. Elated with the victory, the enemy began to stand at 
times more boldly. 

8. They assailed our men in the rear. 

9. Caesar was satisfied for the present. 

10. Woods were between the enemy's rear and our van. 

1 1 . We had not marched more than fifteen miles. 

12. Caesar kept the enemy from plundering. 

13. They pursued us too eagerly. 

14. The next day he moved his camp from the unfavorable 
spot. 

15. More than five hundred fell in this battle. 

B. Written Work 

I wanted to punish the bandits, as I have said, but I con- 
sidered it enough for the present to depart with the children 
and my few comrades without harm from that unfavorable 
locality. And yet, being elated by our sudden victory, I kept 
my men from battle with the enemy with the greatest difficulty. 
I saw suddenly that the bandits were beginning to collect their 
forces and move camp. After we had departed, we halted in a 
spot in dense woods, where we were hidden, and a scout was 



66 THE BEGINNER'S CJE.SAR 

sent to see in what direction they were marching. He reported * 
that tliey were not following our rear, but were going, about 
fifteen in number, further ^ into the mountains. Thus we had 
been frightened without reason, but we kept on our guard until 
we reached the open country *=. 

a. Use renuntio of chap. lO. b. Use comparative of longe. c. See 
chap. 10. 



CHAPTER XVI 
A, Oral Work 

1 . On account of the cold the grain was not ripe. 

2. They demanded a supply of fodder. 

3. The river flows toward the north. 

4. They promised a large army. 

5. We have enough grain. 

6. They were not able to use the boats, because they had 
turned the march aside from the Sadne. 

7. I do not want to leave you.*' 

8. The iEduans said that corn was being collected. 

9. He was delayed longer. 

10. The day was pressing on when we must undertake war. 

1 1 . There was a large number of boats on the Sa6ne. 

12. The chief magistrate among the ^Edui was called ver- 
gobretus. 

1 3. He was frightened because he knew the enemy was so near. 

14. Divitiacus was induced" by the prayers of his people, 
and brought up a quantity of grain in boats on the Sadne. 

15. He complained because he was deserted. 

B. Written Work 

I lingered day after day in camp with my comrades*, and 
especially with the two little friends who, after the death of the 



ENGLISH-LA TIN EXERCISES 6/ 

grandfather, were afraid^, and unwilling *= for me to depart. 
And yet my affairs at home '• kept •• demanding me. 

Meanwhile the day was pressing on when** I must set out 
to go to my home. Although the journey was so difficult, yet 
I decided to take the children with me, for they had neither 
relatives nor friends in this region*. Moreover, the soldiers 
were going •* to move camp the next day *i and march •* far 
towards the north. They promised us an escort, because it 
was said a large number of bandits was being collected from 
the mountains and was near by. Yet our guard was enough 
and we were not afraid. 

In the meantime, the chief magistrate of the district^, who 
has power of life and death over his people, reached^ the 
camp suddenly, and calling the soldiers together, blamed them 
severely because •** they were not assisting him at ** so critical 
a time *' and the bandits *' so near. 

a. comesy comitisy m. f., used by Caesar in Book VI. b. For the 
verb, see chapter 14. c. Use noloy and see Rule 76, b. d. Literally, 
" on which day." g. Translate " {in) his Iccis" and see Rule 39, 
note. f. See chapter 15, first sentence, g. Pdgus, -f, m. h. Use 
pervenio of chapter 12, and see Rule 25. 



CHAPTER XVII 

A. Oral Work 

1 . There are some who are very powerful. 

2. Dumnorix was wicked. 

3. I can * prevent them from gathering grain. 

4. He wants to gain the leadership, and wrest liberty from*^ 
the people. 

5. He ought not to report our plans to the enemy. 

6. I do not doubt but what he knows this. 



68 THE BEGINNER'S CMSAR 

7. It is better to gain liberty than endure the sway of the 
Romans. 

8. What are the magistrates doing in camp ? 

9. I reported the exigency to Caesar. 

10. You do not know with how much danger I reported the 
exigency to him. 

11. I cannot control them. 

12. He kept silent as long as he could. 

a. If this were ** I cannot prevent," etc., how would the dependent 
clause be introduced ? See Rule 80. 

B. Written Work 

When the soldiers had been called together, among them 
being Arius, who was in charge of the few troops, the magis- 
trate spoke thus : 

" You do not know with what danger I have come into your 
camp. You see beyond * the river a few bandits, as you say, 
and you think we ourselves** ought to be able to deter them 
from overrunning *= our towns and fields without your help. 
If ** we had been able to do this, my people would not have 
sent me with ** their prayers to you. At last I can tell you 
what before the enemy have forced us to keep secret I am 
Lilius, chief magistrate of all this region around you, and I 
have power of life and death over my people, but there are 
some who as private citizens are more powerful than I myself. 
They are collecting these bandits from the mountains and the 
whole country to gain preeminence and wrest liberty from my 
people. Wherefore I have come to you to report ^^ this exi- 
gency and seek '^ help." 

a, ultrd, prep, with the ace. b. nos ipsos, c. Use vexo of chapter 
14. d. Rule 65. 



-•o»- 



ENGLISH-LA TIN EXERCISES 69 

CHAPTER XVIII 
A» Oral Work 

1. I feel that he means Dumnorix. 

2. I am unwilling to speak while too •• many are present. 

3. He is in great favor with the common people. 

4. Let us ** ask about these things of him secretly. 

5. I found out by inquiry that he was desirous of a revolution. 

6. What did he say in the meeting ? 

7. He is a man of the greatest boldness. 

8. I was among the Bituriges very many years. 

9. He has bought up the taxes for very many years. 

10. No one will dare to speak boldly in the meeting. 

11. He has considerable private property. 

12. I found out that he has a wife at home. 

1 3. He gave his mother in marriage to a man there. 

14. He has a sister on his mother's side. 

15. They hate the Romans because" by their arrival their 
power has been lessened. 

16. Caesar was unwilling for him to be restored to his former 
place of honor. 

17. He has the greatest hope of power and favor among his 
people. 

18. Under the rule of the Romans he despairs of royal 
power. 

19. The cavalry skirmish, which was fought a few days be- 
fore, was unsuccessful. 

20. Dumnorix, who was in command of the reinforcement, 
started the rout. 

B, Written Work 
(A special exercise in changing indirect to direct discourse.) 
Arius was in charge of the meeting. He had been in those 

parts very many years, and had a large number of friends there. 

Wherefore he was fond of the people, and desired to favor 



70 THE BEGINNER'S CMSAR 

them on account of this relationship. Thus, Arius was unwill- 
ing to dismiss the meeting so quickly. He kept the magistrate, 
and inquired of him further concerning these matters. 

The latter then spoke more freely : 

" Among those who are so powerful is Dumnorix, a man of 
the utmost daring, and in great favor with my people because 
of his generosity. He is eager for a change of government. 
For many years he has bought up all the imposts of our dis- 
trict at a small price. When he bids no one dares bid against 
him. By this he has increased his estates. He always has 
around him a number of horsemen whom he supports at his 
own expense. He has abundant influence even among adjoin- 
ing nations. For the sake of this power, he has given his 
mother and half-sister and other relatives in marriage to men 
in many places. He hates the Romans because they have put 
his brother into a position of honor. Under their rule, he 
despairs not only of royal power, but even of that favor 
which he now has among us. By means of his relatives and 
friends in town and other places, and these bandits of the moun- 
tains, he has conceived the highest hope of getting possession 
of the government." 

Lilius, the magistrate, was silent. 

Arius promised help. I left the meeting, with the children. 
I was in despair. I felt that this was the beginning of a great 
war. Home was very far away. 



>o« 



CHAPTER XIX 
A, Oral Work 

1. Now,'* these things were found out. 

2. He will lead the hostages through his brother's territory. 

3. He had hostages given among the nations. 

4. They did this without orders. 

5. I think this is sufficient cause. 



ENGLISH-LA TIN EXERCISES 7 ^ 

6. When .Caesar found this out, he ordered the state to pun- 
ish Dumnorix. 

7. Divitiacus had the utmost devotion for the Roman people. 

8. He is a man of* uncommon prudence. 

9. I fear*® that I may offend his feelings. 

10. Before he added certain things to these suspicions, he 
ordered a meeting to be called. 

11. His friend was leader of the province. 

12. Casar had the utmost confidence in him. 

13. What was said by him in your presence? 

14. State to me what each one said separately. 

B. Written Work 

When I found out that Arius was going to'* have aid sent 
to Lilius, I feared that he [might think it to be sufficient cause 
why he should not give me the escort which he had promised 
a few days * before. So I determined to speak with him con- 
cerning it. 

When I asked that I might speak with him privately, he 
ordered me to come to him. Before I was able to say anything, 
he opposed me, and said : 

" You are my intimate friend, Caelius. For many years you 
have shown eminent loyalty and good will to me. Show it to 
me at this time, in this present danger. You know what the 
chief magistrate of the Venetici has said in your presence. 
Have ^ you no suspicions of the truth ? I beg that I may speak 
freely, without offence to the feelings of a friend. These chil- 
dren are not of Lucius in Spain, but of his brother, the leader 
of the revolution against the government of Lilius and the Ro- 
man people. He loves ^ his children as a father. We shall be 
able to punish ^ him by retaining « them as hostages." 

a. See preceding chapter, b. Introduce the sentence with nonne. 
c. Use amo. d. Use ulctscor of chapter 14. e. Use gerund of reti- 
neo oi chapter 18. 



72 THE BEGINNER'S CjESAR 

CHAPTER XX 

A, Oral Work 

1. I know it is true. 

2. He said he knew it was true. 

3. You are very powerful at home. 

4. When you were very powerful on account of your gene- 
rosity, I had little influence because of my youth. 

5. He used his powers of mind and body* to diminish my 
influence. 

6. They are taking rather •• harsh measures against my 
father. 

7. In tears '* he embraced Caesar. 

8. We are all influenced by the opinion of people. 

9. I have a brotherly love for ^' you. 

10. No one will think it was done by my desire. 

11. He is^ on friendly terms with Caesar. 

12. Stop*= speaking. 

13. I warn you to" avoid this in the future. 

14. They will pardon him because ^* of his brother's prayers. 

15. I shall be able to know what you do'*. 

a. Use opibus dc nervis, b. Use teneo. c. Be careful of the ir- 
regular imperative oifacio, 

B. Written Work 

When Arius ceased to speak, I called the children to me to *• 
know the truth. My love for* them had increased day by 
day ^, and I was *= pained because they had said nothing ** to 
me concerning the matter. 

After*** Arius had admitted them, he declared what*** the 
chief magistrate censured •* in their father, and what the state 
complained of. They began to embrace me and beg that I 
forgive them because '* they had so long kept •• silent about 



ENCUSH-LA TIN EXERCISES 



73 



their father. They said their mother was dead ", that their 
father had another wife ^ and she was bad < to them. In tears 
they begged of me not to turn from them. I consoled •* them 
and asked them to cease weeping. 

I then^ grasped Arius' hand, and spoke: 

"What you have said I know is true, yet I am stirred by 
love of these little ones. I beseech you to spare' them out 
of*' favor toward" me." 

Arius, my intimate friend, embraced me. 

"ThusJ shallJ it be, Cslius," he said. " We shall be able 
to punish the father by other plans. Carry the children with 
you to your home beyond the mountains. Brotherly love goes 
with you." 

3. Use in + ace, as in chapter 19. *. in dies. c. Use capiS, 
as in this chapter, d. nee quidquam, or nihil, e. See chapter 4, 
end. /. See chapter iS, middle, g. Use malus, -a, -ttm. h.tnm. 
i. Use cimerve, -dre, -dvi, -dlum. J. sic estd. 



L« 



RULES OF SYNTAX 



Note. — References by numbers throughout the body of the texts, 
both Latin and English, are made to these rules. The pupil should 
state the rule in full in answering all questions of syntax of the day's 
lesson. 

Occasionally, special days should be given to careful recitation of 
these rules, the pupils always learning the Latin examples appended, 
and hunting up others of like character in the text. 

A mastery of these rules now will prove sufficient for the entire 
course in Caesar. 

The consideration of syntax directs the mind to the S3mtaz 
manner or habit of expression of thought, wherein it ys. 

has a culture value unlike that of the study of con- Construction 
strucHon^ which looks to the statement of relation of 
words in a sentence. For illustration : 

ex Gallid profectus est. 

What is the construction of Gallid? Ans. : It is the ablative 
case, being introduced by the preposition ex. 

What is the sjmtax of Gallid f Ans. : The idea of ** place from 
which " is expressed by the ablative, in accordance with Rule 40. 



I. OF CASES 

The Genitive 
A. With nouns : — 

1. Origin, Possession, and Material are expressed by the 
genitive. 

CatSnis fiUoB est, ke is Catd*s son, 
or, libra Caeaaris legimua, we are reading the books of Ccesar. 

75 



76 THE BEGINNER'S CjESAR 

castra Axiovlatl n5n aberant, the camp of Ariavistus was 

not far off, 
c5pia frUxnentl snppetSbat, a supply of grain was on hand, 
or, talentum ami habet, he has a talent of gold. 

2. Quality and Measure of space and quantity are expressed 
by the genitive, with an accompanying adjective. 

[The adjectives used chiefly are mdgnus, summusy tantusj and nu- 
merals ; ?ius may take the place of an adjective.] 

vir summae vlrttLtis est, he is a man of the greatest courage, 
6ius modi consoltum est, there is a decree of this sort, 
mflrum sfideclm pedum perddcit, he constructs a wall 

sixteen feet (high). 
tzium mfinsium frUxnentnin eztulfimnt, they took away 

three months* supply of corn, 

3. Subjective Genitive denotes the person who makes or 
produces something, or who has a feeling. 

[The test of this construction is its possible expansion into a sen- 
tence of which the genitive is the subject; if it is rather the object^ it 
falls imder Rule 4 ; e.g., test amor pairisy odium CasariSy timores 
liberorum. Sometimes this construction is explained also by other 
rules.] 

Catallnae verba audXvit, he heard Catiline*s words, 

4. Objective Genitive denotes the object of an action or feel- 
ing. ^^ >. s^ 

domum reditiSnis spfis sublftta est, hope of returning 
home was removed. \ 

Cicer5 laudator temporis acti erat, Cicero was a praiser 
of the past, 

5. Partitive Genitive denotes that of which a part is taken. 

[Note : Cardinals and quidam regularly take the abladve, with 
i {ex) ; e.g., unus ex militibusy quidam ex legdtls^ 



kULES OF SVJStTAX 77 

mftgnmn mllitnm numenim Imperat, he levies a large 

number of soldiers. 
BatiB causae est, // is sufficient reason. 
Sins rel populum Rom&nmn esse testem dXcit, he says 

the Roman people are witness of this thing. 

6. Appositional Genitiye. A genitive is sometimes used like 
a noun in apposition. [See Rule 79.] 

n5men amici popuU R5mSni longfi aberit, the name of 
friend of the Roman people will not avail. 

ft 

B. With adje^^ip&;;jjd-/ ^^^^"^^^^^^ 

7. Genitive of ke^krence, or Specification. Some adjectives 
require a genitive to specify or limit their application. 

/ [Such adjectives are those meaning desire^ knowledge, ^^JSSA ^ 
y^llnesSj power^ sharing^ gutlt, and their opposites."] >rsf^\^ ^ (/ 

peiftoB belli est, he is skilled in war. ^ 

avidns landis est, he is greedy of praise. 

C. With verbs : — 

8. Remembering, Forgetting, Reminding take the object 
in the genitive when they signify a continued state of mind; 
the accusative when used of a single act. 

[The verbs used mostly are memini, remimBCor, and obllvfa- 
cor. Test the following as to case : " The old man remembers the 
past"; "I recall the fact"; "He remembers the living"; "He forgot 
the matter."] 

Sullam memini, / recall Sulla. 
vivSnim memini, / remember the living. 

9. Accusing, Convicting, Acquitting take the genitive of the 
charge and the ablative of ^^ penalty. 

[The verbs used mostly are accuB5, argfld; dainnd, coargflo; 
abBOlv5. Test : " He accuses me of theft " (theft = fflrtum, -1) ; 




7^ THE BEGINNER'S CAESAR 

" He was condemned for embezzlement ** (embezzlement = pecfUft- 
tas, -flB)]. 

Impietatis absoltltaB est, he was acquitted of blasphemy. 

10. Verbs of Feeling or Emotion take the genitive of the 
object which causes the feeling — often with the accusative of 
the person affected. 

[This includes misereor and miserfiscS ; and the impersonals, 
pudet, paenitet, mlseret, taedet, piget.] 

mlserfiscite hominis, pify the being. 
pudet m6 tul, / am ashamed of you. 

The Dative 

A. General use: — 

11. Indirect Object. The commonest use is that of the in- 
direct object of both transitive and intransitive verbs to denote 
the person to whom something is given^ saidy or done. 

Dumnorfgi flliam suam dedit, he gave his daughter to 

Dumnorix. 
Caesarl respondit, he replied to Ccesar. 

B. Special uses : — 

12. Intransitive Verbs, meaning \.o favor ^ help, please^ trust, 
and their opposites; also, to believe, persuade, command, obey, 
serve, resist, envy, threaten, pardon, and spare, take an indirect 
object in the dative. 

eiB perBnSlBit, he persuaded them. 

huic legionl c5nfid6bat, he trusted this legion. 

13. Compound Verbs. Most verbs compounded with ad, 
ante, con (= cum), in, inter, ob, post, prae, pro, sub, super take 
the dative of the indirect object. 

Note : If the verb is transitive, it may thus govern a double ob- 



RULES OF SYNTAX 79 



ject, one accusative (direct), the other dative ; e. g., laabifinum 
citui praefficit, he put Labienus in command of the army, 

huic legldni praefuit, he was in command of this legion. 

14. In the Passive. Verbs which govern the dative are 
used impersonally when put in the passive voice, the dative 
remaining unchanged. 

Caesarl reBpondStur, Casar is answered, 
hiB persnadetur, th^ are persuaded. 

15. Possession. The dative is used with esse and similar 
meanings to emphasize the fact of possession. 

[Note: Compare Rule i, which emphasizes the possessor. Avoid 
habeoy unless expression of the idea of retention is desired.] 

mihi est canis, / have a dog, 

16. The Agent. The dative is used with the gerundive to 
denote the one who, under moral obligation or necessity, must 
fulfill the action expressed by the verb. 

[Note : This combination of gerundive and tenses of esse forms 
the conjugation described in Rule 85.] 

mihi agendum est, / must do it. 

17. Service is expressed by the dative, usually with another 
dative of the person concerned. 

mSlgnS flBuX nostrlB fuit, it was of great service to our men, 

18. Reference. The dative of reference denotes the one 
who has some concern or interest in the matter. 

[Note : This dative has little or no special grammatical depend- 
ence, but rather modifies the whole thought.] 

quid mihi Caesar agit ? / am interested in this matter. 
What is Ccesar doing f 

19. With Adjectives. Adjectives of likeness^ fitness^ near- 



80 THE BEGINNER'S CyESAR 

ness^ service^ and their opposites, often take the dative to specify 
their application. 

sunt prozinil GtormanlB, they are nearest to the Germans, 

Addendum : Separation (see Rule 87). 

The Accusative 

20. Double Object — Same Person. Many verbs of making^ 
choosing^ callings showings and the like, take two accusatives of 
the same person or thing — one a direct object, the other a 
predicate accusative, like an appositive. 

Flsdnum cdnsulem creftvenuit, th^ chose Piso consul. 

21. Double Object — Person and Thing. Askings demand- 
ing^ teachings concealing^ admit two accusatives — one of the 
person, the other of the thing. 

[Note: The verbs used mostly are rogo^ postulo^ doceo, celd. 
Here belong also tnonedy cdgo^ accuso^ arguo^ which are restricted to 
a pronoun or adjective object of the thing\ 

te sententiam rogd, I ask you your opinion. 

haec Caesarem cSlftvit, he concealed this from Ccesar. 

22. Double Object — with compound verbs. Verbs in com- 
position with prepositions, usually trans^ sometimes ad^ and 
others, may take two accusative objects — one dependent upon 
the verb, the other upon the preposition. 

[Note : The preposition is often repeated.] 

legidnes pontem trftdOzit, he led the legions cuross the 
bridge, 

23. Time and Space. The accusative is used to express 
duration of time, and extent of space. 

multds azmos in Italia fait, he was in Italy many years. 
flOmen passfLs s6scentdB abest, the river is six hundred 
paces distant. 



RULES OE SYNTAX 8 1 

24. Exclamation is written in the accusative. 

5 f drtfLnatam rempublicam I O fortunate republic / 

25. Limit of Motion is expressed by the accusative, usually 
with the prepositions ad or in. 

[Note : The preposition is omitted with names of towns^ small 
islandsy domum, and rus.l 

in prdvinciam perv6iiit, he reached the province. 
Rdmam vSnit, he came to Rome. 
but, ad oppidum Genavam v'enit. 

26. Subject of the Infinitive is in the accusative. 
[Note : See Rule 72.] 

The Ablative 

[Note : There were originally in Latin at least seven cases. Two 
of these, called conveniently the locative and the instrumental, were 
afterward dissolved, their uses being assigned to other cases, espe- 
cially to the ablative. Thus we may easily classify the following 
kinds of ablative as " Original Ablative " or ih^from case, the " In- 
strumental Ablative " or the with case, and the " Locative Ablative *' 
or the where case.] 

A. Original ablative uses : — 

I y 27. Separation or privation is expressed by the ablative, 
usually without the preposition. (See Rule 87.) 

hdc conatfL d6stit6runt, they desisted from this attempt. 
armlB hostSs dSspoliat, he deprives the enemy of arms. 

28. Source. The verbs meaning birth or origin are followed 
by the ablative. 

[Note : These are usually the participles, ndtus and ortus^ 

Belgae ab oztrGmls Galliae fuiibus oriuntur, the Belgae 

begin at the extreme territories of Gaul. 
ndbilX genere nfttus est, he was bom of a noble race. 



82 THE BEGINNER'S CACSAR 

29. Cause is expressed by the ablative, usually without a 
preposition. 

victdria sua gl5riantur, they boast of their victory, 

30. Personal Agent. The ablative with a or ab is used with 
a verb in the passive voice to express 2. personal agent. 

[Note : When the person is regarded as instrument or means of 
the action, it is written with per and the accusative.] 

Gain a R5manis superati sunt, the Gauls were conquered 

by the Romans. 
per indiciiun 6nfintiatum est, it was reported through an 

infortner, 

31. With Comparatives. The ablative is used after adjec- 
tives in the comparative degree, with the sense of than. 

[Note : This is a substitute for quam^ when the adjective is either 
nominative or accusative.] 

rSz est potentior consule, a king is more powerful than 
a consul. 

B. Instrumental Ablative uses : — 

32. Instrument or Means is expressed by the ablative, with- 
out a preposition. 

Garumna flumine continStur, it is bounded by the Garontu 
river. 

33. Accompaniment is expressed by the ablative with ctim. 

[Note: In military phrases the preposition may be omitted if 
the ablative has a modifying adjective.] 

ciun his legionibus ire contendit, he hastened to go with 

these legions. 
omnibus copiis profectus est, he departed with all his 

troops. 

34. Manner is expressed by the ablative with cum or sine. 



RULES OF SYNTAX 83 

[Note: The preposition may be omitted if the ablative has a 
modifying adjective. Also, distinct words of manner, like modo^ 
ratiotUyfugdy etc., do not need the preposition.] 

cum celeritate profectus est, he set out swiftly. 

35. Special Verbs. Utor^fruor^ fungory potior ^ vescor^ and 
their compounds ^ take an indirect object in the ablative. 

[Note: Potior may take the genitive instead; e.g., sese Galliae 
potiri spirant (chapter 3, last line)]. 

eddem conailio fLsX sunt, they adopted the same plan, 

36. Quality is expressed by the ablative, if modified by an 
adjective. 

[Note : See Rule 2.] 

gmnma audftcift erat, he was a man of the utmost daring, 

37. Price is written in the ablative. 

aediiiciiim parv5 pretio redSmlt, he bought the building 
at a small price, 

38. Specification. The ablative expresses that in respect to 
which or in accordance with which something is or is done. 

viitlite praecedunt, they surpass in courage, 

C, Locative Ablative uses : — 

39. Place where is expressed by the ablative, usually with 
in, 

[Note .* The preposition is sometimes omitted with loco^ castrts^ 
parte ; all words modified by totus ; most names of towns. Here be- 
longs also a remnant of the old locative case, as in the following : 
Romagy at Rome ; Rhodt^ at Rhodes ; all towns in the singular of the 
first and second declensions ; domty at home ; militiae^ abroad.] 

in Gallia est, he is in Gaul. 

n5nniililB locls vada sunt, there are fords in some places. 



84 THE BEGINNER'S CjESAR 

40. Place from which is expressed by the ablative, usually 
with aw ab^e or ex, 

[ Note : In this is the familiar exception of names of towns^ etc., 
OS before stated, without the preposition.] 

ez finibus exeunt, th^ go out from their territories, 
Rdma vSnlt, he came from Rome, 

41. Time when is expressed by the ablative, without a prep- 
osition. 

[Note: Closely allied to this are expressions which are both 
time and place. These take the preposition in ; e.g., inpace\ 

eft diS convemunt, th^ assemble on that day, 

42. Time within which is expressed by the ablative, with 
or without a preposition. 

in tertid amid esdbmit, th^ will go out within three years, 

43. Ablative Absolute. Independent constructions, consist- 
ing commonly of a noun or pronoun and a modifying adjective 
or participle, often take the place of subordinate clauses of 
time^ cause, condition, and concession, 

[Note : In accordance with the aforesaid meanings, the student 
should avoid its literal translation, and render by the appropriate 
English clause.] 

Let the student select from the abundance of such constructions in 
the text examples of the four principal ideas of the ablative absolute. 

Addendum : Degree of Difference (see Rule 8i). 
II. SYNTAX OF MODES 

In Independent Sentences 

[Note : The mode in independent sentences is regularly indlca- 
tiye. The following exceptions are important : 

44. Hortatory Subjunctive. The subjunctive is used in the 
present tense to express exhortation (urging) or command. 



RULES OF SYNTAX 85 

hds Iatr5ii6s InterficiamuB, let us kill these bandits, 
haec dicat, let him say this. 

45. Potential Subjunctive expresses possibility, 
dicat aliquis, some one may say. 

46. Optative Subjunctive expresses a wish, usually preceded 
by ufi or utinam, 

falsum utinam sit, / hope it is false. 

47. Dubitative Subjunctive expresses doubt or deliberation, 
and indignation. 

[Note : This is interrogative in form, but rhetorically declarative.] 
quid dicerem, what was I to say ? 



Subjunctive in Dependent Clauses 

[Note: For " Sequence of Tenses " see Rule 93.] 

48. Purpose is written in the subjunctive, usually after ut or 
nby and the relative pronoun. 

[Note: The student is sometimes inclined to confuse this with 
the idea of result ; e.g., in chapter 6, book I, from vel X.o pater entur. 
In the explanation of the S3mtax of this particular passage even 
eminent commentators disagree. One authority calls it result^ 
another, purpose. The test usually applicable is this : '* Is the action 
of the main verb directed toward the future ? " If so, the idea is 
T2X\ier purpose. 

For other ways of expressing purpose, see Rules 71 and 78. 

The student should translate the clause of purpose by the English 
infinitive.] 

16gati5nQB mlsit ut agrds vftatftrent, he sent the legions to 
lay waste the f elds.' 

49. Result is written in the subjunctive, usually after ut or 
ut non, and the relative pronoun. 



86 THE BEGINNER'S CjESAR 

[Notb: If the main clause is negative, quin usually takes the 
place of ut non (see Rule 80).] 

mdns ixnpendebat ut tranaZre ndn posaent, a mountain 
overhung so that ihiy could not go across, 

50. Characteristic. Occasionally, the logical connection of 
a relative clause is to define some quality or characteristic of 
its antecedent. This is called a '* relative clause of charac- 
teristic," and is written in the subjunctive. Otherwise, the 
mode is indicative. 

[Note : The test of mode may be this : May the words " of the 
sort that " be reasonably inserted before the relative, then the clause 
is characteristic. 

Three of the following are of characteristic. Find them : " There 
were some who pitied Caesar " ; " Let us compel a peace which shall 
have no plots"; "There are studies which sharpen the wits"; 
" This is He who is called King of the Jews."] 

51. Cum Causal. Cum often introduces a clause of cause, 
the verb of which is subjunctive. 

quae ciun ita sint, now, since this is so, , . , 

52. Cum Concessive. Cum, in the sense of *< though," in- 
troduces a clause of concession, whose verb is subjunctive. 
The main verb usually has tamen. 

cum primi concIdiBBent, tamen reliqui resistSbantp though 
the first had fallen^ yet the rest resisted, 

53. Relative Time — Cum. Cum, in the sen^e of " while " 
and " after," introduces a clause of relative time, whose verb is 
subjunctive. 

[Note: The tenses are imperfect, to express "while"; pluper- 
fect, " after."] 

cum Caesar in Gallia esset, while Cassar was in Gaul, 
ciui Caesar In Oalliam pervSnisset, after Ccesar had ar- 
rived in Gaul. 



RULES OF SYNTAX 8/ 

54. Quod Causal. Quod, quia, quoniam, all meaning " since/' 
often introduce reasons which are given on another's authority, 
not that of the writer or speaker. 

[Note : By this use, the writer disclaims all responsibility. The 
reason being thus indirectly quoted, the clause is properly subject to 
the rules of indirect discourse. See Rule 68.] 

quod sit dSstitutuB queritur, he complains because, as he 
says, he has been deserted. 

55. Dum, Donee, Quoad sometimes take the indicative of 
actual event in the past, but often their idea is of purpose, 
doubt, futurity of a contingent event. The mode is then sub- 
junctive. 

[Note : Test this for mode : " I was happy until he came."] 

Caesar ezspect&vit dum n^vSa convenirent, Ccesar waited 
until the ships should assemble. 

56. Indirect Question. The indirect quotation of a direct 
question is in the subjunctive. 

[Note: The question is made the object of a verb of asking, 
telling, and the like.] 

quid sentio, what do I think f 

quid ipse aentiam exp5nam, / will explain what I think. 

Addendum : Subjunctive of Fearing. (See Rule 90.) 

Special Functions of the Indicative 

57. Cum Temporal — Present. When cum introduces a 
clause of time in ihe present or the /uture, it takes the indica- 
tive. 

dun vidSbia, tum aciSa, when you see, then you will know- 

58. Absolute Time — Cum. Cum, in the sense of "when," 
sometimes merely defines the time in the past at which some- 
thing was or was done. It then takes the indicative mode of 
"absolute time." 



88 THE BECmi^EIi'S C^SAR 

[Note: For "relative time," />., defining the circumstances or 
condiHans under which something was or was done, see Rule 53.] 

pftmit cum pftr6re necesse erat, he obeyed when it was 
necessary, 

59. Al>80lute Time — Other Conjunctions. Postquam or 
posteaquam^ after: «/, ubi^ when or whenever; cum primum^ 
simul^ simul cu:, simul atque, as soon as, introduce clauses of 
absolute time, and take the indicative. 

[Note : The tense is usually perfect or " historical " present, al- 
though ut and ubif in the sense of " whenever," take the pluperfect.] 

Caesar, cum primiun potuit, ad ezercitum contendit, 
as soon cu he was cUfle, Ccesar hastened to the army. 

id ubi dlziaset, hastam mittebat, whenever he said this^ 
he hurled a spear, 

60. Causal. The conjunctions quod^ quia^ quoniam^quandb 
usually take the indicative of cause. 

[NoTK: For exception, see Rule 54.] 

quod altisslml sunt m&i, Caesar multos di6s morftbitur, 
because the walls are very his^h^ Ccesar will linger 
many days. 



Conditional Sentences 

[Note : There is a two-fold classification of conditions ; the one, 
called " simple," offering no hint of the truth or falsity of the con- 
dition; the other necessitating a distinct supposition of the fulfil- 
ment or non-fulfilment of the condition.. For purpose of distinction, 
we may call the latter kind " complex," since it is varied in form, 
and requires perhaps more careful analysis. 

There are two parts in every complete conditional sentence ; the 
one, called protasis^ being subordinate and containing the condition ; 
the other, called apodosis^ containing the conclusion. 

The conjunctions usually employed to introduce the protasis are 



RULES OF SYNTAX 89 

fi, if ; nisi^ unless ; sin^ but if. The apodosis is often introduced by 
siC't ita, turn. 

Often the protasis is omitted, but implied, and sometimes the 
whole structure is mixed and confusing.] 

61. Simple Condition. If the protasis offers no means to 
enable one to determine its truth or falsity, the condition is 
called simple, and the mode of both parts is indicative. 

[Note : The English sentence above is an illustration of such a 
condition. See Rule 68.] 

Bi fortlB est eiim laud5, if he is brave, I praise him. 

62. Future Condition — «« More Vivid." If the future ful- 
filment of the condition is regarded as probable, that is, as 
actually going to happen, the future indicative is used in both 
clauses. 

[Note : The future perfect is used in the protasis if its accom- 
plishment is to precede the result.] 

81 plignabit, turn eum laudftbd, if he fights, then I shall 

praise him. 
Caesar pftcem faciet, id host6s obsid6s dederint, Casar 

will make peace if the enemy will have surrendered 

hostages. 

63. Future Condition— «« Less Vivid." If the fulfilment of 
the condition is regarded as improbable, the present subjunctive 
is used in both clauses. 

mentiar, sX negem, / should lie if I should deny it. 

64. Contrary to Fact — Present. Often the supposition is 
known to be false, then the imperfect subjunctive is used in 
both clauses, when the condition still exists. 

id amlcl mel adesaent, laetus essem, if my friends were 
present, I would be happy. 

65. Contrary to Fact — Past. In a known false condition 
of past time, the pluperfect subjunctive is used in both clause^. 



90 THE BEGINNER'S CjESAR 

nlai tfl amlslssSs, nunquam recSpisaem, unless you had 
lost it^ I should never have recovered it. 



Indirect Discourse 

66. Indirect Discourse is the expression of another's thoughts 
without regard for his exact words. 

[Note : The incalculable advantage of this device of speech was 
slow to occnr to the human mind. It is comparatively recent in the 
history of language, being found for the first fully developed in the 
Greek and Latin. Of the earlier tongues, only the Sanscrit has the 
germ of it. To-day, in common speech, it is universal. 

For an extended illustration of the application of the following 
rules in the change of discourse, see the text of chapter 17, second 
part.] 

67. The Infinitive. The main verb of the direct discourse 
becomes infinitive when written indirectly. 

[Note: The infinitive clause is always the object of a verb — 
whether present or implied — of sayings tellingy etc.] 

miles est fortis (direct). 

dudt militem esse fortem (indirect). 

68. Subordinate Clauses are regularly subjunctive in indirect 
discourse. 

[Note: Sometimes the student will find them indicative; the 
clause may then be regarded as an insertion of the writer or speaker 
— as given on his own authority — and hence not an integral part of 
the quotation.] 

Let the pupil select examples from the text. 

69. Real Questions become subjunctive in indirect discourse. 

[Note : " Real " questions, which are used to obtain information, 
are opposed to " rhetorical " questions, which are really declarative 
in meaning. The latter are treated as declarative, and thus fall 
under Rule 67 ; as in chapter 14, sixth sentence, quod . . .posse\ 



RULES OF SYNTAX 9 1 

quid tibi vis ? what do you wish f 

AxiovistuB Caesari respondit : quid sibi vellet, Arunds- 
tus asked Ccesar what he wanted. 

70. The Imperative becomes subjunctive in indirect dis- 
course. 

[Note: The negative remains he. Chapter 13 contains several 
illustrations.] 

DIvic5 Caesan dixit: 116 suae virtuti tribueret, Divico 
told CcBsar not to attribute it to his (Caesar'6) valor. 

(Let the student give the original command in the last sentence.) 
70a. Addendum : Tenses in indirect discourse, see Rule 93. 



ni. ADDENDA 

71. Purpose Constructions. There are found eight distinct 
ways of expressing the idea of purpose. Of the following, the 
first two are the most common, and the first six not infrequent. 
The seventh is used only after intransitive verbs. The last is 
quite rare, late, and not in Cicero. 

In all of them, the purpose construction is best translated 
into English by the infinitive ; as, *< to attack the city " (see 
JVote in Rule 48). 

a. By ut, etc. (see Rule 48). 

3. By the relative clause (Rule 48). 

c. By ad and the gerundive. 
ven6runt ad urbem oppfLgnandam. 

d. By causa and the genitive of the gerund^ or the genitive 
of a noun or pronoun. 

venSrunt urbem oppiignandi causft. 

e. By causa and the genitive of the gerundive. 
ven6runt urbis oppugn&adae caus£. 



92 THE BEGINNERS C^SAR 

f. By the supine in -^m^ after verbs of motion. 
ven6nint urbem oppiignfttiim. 

g. By ad and the gerund^ after intransitive verbs, 
venenint ad urbem oppHgnSUidum. 

h. By ih^Jiiiure participle. 
venfinint urbem oppHgnattbi. 

72. Historical Infinitive. Sometimes, to give the impression 
of rapid movement of events in narration, the infinitive is used 
instead of a past indicative. 

[Note: Its subject is nominative; see Rule 26. 

For example, see the text of chapter 16, first sentence, ,^!d^VJr^.] 

73. Sttperlative of Eminence denotes a very high degree of 
a quality, when no distinct comparison is present. 

Rli6nus altdsaimuB est, the Rhine is very deep (chapter 2). 

73a. Note : With quam or vel, the superlative denotes the very 
highest possible degree ; as, 

quam maadmae cdpiae adsunt, as many troops as possible 
are present. (See, also, chapter 7.) 

74. Complementary Infinitive expresses an additional action 
or state of the same subject^ thus completing the meaning of 
the main verb. 

R5ma proficiBCl mfttfimt, he hastens to depart from Rome. 

[Note : Let the pupil analyze this sentence with careful reference 
to the above definition.] 

75. The Latter Supine (in •^) is used with certain adjectives, 
nouns, and verbs, as an ablative of specification. 

[Note : The adjectives commonly found are those meaning easy 
or difficulty and those with reference to effects produced on the 
senses ox feelings. The verbs found are about twenty-five in number, 



RULES OF SYNTAX 93 

and include prominently audita^ dictu^ faciii. The nouns are fds^ 
nefasy opus."] 

perfacile factii est, it is very easy to do (literally, // is very 
easy with respect to the doing — see Rule 38). 

f oeda sunt auditii, // is shocking to hear. 

76. Infinitive as Subject or Object. These are the usual 
constructions of the infinitive. For an exception as to use, see 
Rule 72. 

a. As Subject : The predicate is usually some form of esse 
or an impersonal verb ; as, 

eum poenam seqid oportet, the penalty ought to follow 
him, 

b. As Object: This use is of a two-fold kind: the one, de- 
scribed in Rule 74 ; the other being chiefly that described in 
Rule 67, note. 

In addition, the following verbs take the infinitive as direct 
object: iubed^ to order; veto^ to forbid; patior and sino, to 
allow ; voldy'^nolo^ maid, cupioj as, 

■Igna InferrX iubet, he orders the standards to be advanced, 

77. The Preposition Ad, with the accusative, expresses the 
idea of " near," in number or place. 

oppida sua, numer5 ad duodecixn, Incendunt, they bum 

their towns ^about twelve' in number. 
p5ns ad Ghenftvam erat, there was a bridge near Geneva, 

78. Quo introduces a clause of purpose, when the clause 
contains a comparative. 

castella copimfLnit, qu5 facillus e5s prohibfire possit, he 
fortifies^edoubts in order to check them the more easily 
(chapter 8), 

79. Apposition. A noun which closely follows and ex- 
plains another noun agrees with the latter in case, and is 
called an " appositive." 



94 THE BEGINNER'S CjESAR 

opera dcerdnls drfttoria legimus, we are reading the 
works of Cicero^ the orator, 

80. Qum introduces a clause of result after negatived ideas 
of " doubt," " hinder," " prevent," and " resist" 

[Note : The following are common in this construction : du- 
bium esty impedioy deterred. An exception to this, usually, is pro- 
hibedy which takes an infinitive object, instead of the qutn clause. 
For example, see Rule 86.] 

n5ii dubium est quin h5c fficexit, there is no doubt he has 

done this, 
nihil ixnpedit quin veniat, nothing hinders his coming, 

81. Degree of Difference. The ablative is used with com- 
paratives and words denoting comparison to express measure 
or degree of difference. 

[Note : The words of comparison usually found are post^ antg, 
tn/ra, suprd."] 

proelium paucis ante diSbus factum est, a battle was 
fought a few days before (chapter i8, last sentence). 

82. Predicate Noun or Adjective is one used after esse^ or 
similar meanings, to complete the sense, and agreeing with the 
subject in case. 

populuB R5mSnus testis est, the Roman people is witness. 
flOmen est l&tum, the river is wide. 

83. Coordinate Participle. The perfect passive participle is 
sometimes used when the English would rather employ a 
coordinate clause. 

Caesar su£s legi5nSs coftctfts praemisit, Ccesar collected 
his legiofts and sent them forward. 

84. Periphrastic Conjugation — Active. The future parti- 
ciple may be combined with all forms of esse to denote what is 
or was likely or going to happen at any time. 

castra m5tilri erant, th^ were going to moi'e camp. 



RULES OF SYNTAX 95 

85. Periphrastic Conjugation — Passive. The gerundive 
may be combined with all forms of esse to denote moral obliga- 
tion and necessity. 

For further explanation and example, see Rule i6. 

86. The Imperfect Tense. Besides its regular significance 
of continued past state or action, the imperfect expresses the 
ideas of habitual^ repeated^ and attempted action. 

[Note: The latter use is called the " conative."] 
ad montSs Ibam, / used to go to the mountains. 
frUmentum flftgitabat, he repeatedly demanded grain. 
hoBtSs no8tr58 pr5gredX prohibSbant, the enemy tried to 
keep our men from advancing 

[Note: For the construction with prohibebanty see Rule 8o, 
note.] 

87. Personal Separation. The dative of persons is used as 
the indirect object of verbs of " taking away " and the like, 
the thing taken being made the accusative object. 

[Note: Compare this with Rule 27, in which the person is the 
direct object.] 

nihil tibi dStrSbdt aenecttlB, old age has taken nothing from 
you. 

88. The Comparative has sometimes a special significance 
in expressing the idea of a considerable or undue degree of a 
quality, and may then be translated by " rather," " somewhat," 
" too." 

senectfLB est loquaclor, old age is rather talkative. 
luventfiB est wiASsAox^ youth is too bold. 

89. Copulative Relative. Sometimes the relative pronoun 
begins a sentence, and serves to connect it closely to the pre- 
ceding narrative. 

quae omnia ab his facta aunt, now^ all these things were 
done by them. 



9^ THE BEGINNER'S CMSAR 

[Note : Let the papil notice that the relative is then translated 
by " now " and a demonstrative pronoun.] 

90. Verbs of Fearing take the subjunctive with ne^ " lest," 
and «/, " that not*' 

[Note : This apparent anomaly in the use of the conjunction is 
explained by the fact that originally the subordinate clause was re- 
garded as an independent optative subjunctive. — See Rule 46.] 

time5 116 veniat, I fear he will come (originally, *< I am 
afraid. May he not come ! "). 

91. Future Infinitive Periphrasis. Verbs which have no 
supine lack the future infinitive. Hence a substitute is neces- 
sary. Usually this substitute is also used instead of the regu- 
lar infinitive in the passive voice of any verb. The substitute 
is fore ut or fatflrum esae ut, with a subjunctive of result 

8p6r5 fore ut t6 paeniteat levltatis, I hope you will repent 

of your fickleness. 
8p6r5 fntflrum eaae ut hoatSs vinoantur, I hope the enemy 

will be conquered. 

[Let the student translate: ** Caesar said he would demand 
hostages/' using the verb/^jf J.] 

92. Tenses of the Infinitive in indirect discourse may be 
readily determined by returning the discourse to its original 
direct speech. This shows the original tense, and the infinitive 
must preserve it The only difference is in the past tenses, in 
which case the perfect infinitive serves a threefold use — 
representing the imperfect, perfect, and pluperfect tenses. 

[Let the student follow the above direction, and determine the 
tenses of the infinitives in the following : — 

" He says that he has come." 

'* He said that he would come." 

" He will say that he came." 

" He saw that the soldiers were brave." 

** He thought that the enemy had gone."] 



RULES OF SYNTAX 97 

93. Sequence of Tenses. In complex sentences, a " princi- 
pal" tense of the main clause is followed by a "principal" 
tense of the subordinate clause ; an " historical " tense is like- 
wise followed by an " historical." 

[Note: The "principal" tenses are those denoting present and 
future time, embracing t\ie present^ future^ present perfect^ 2Jid. future 
perfect. The " historical " tenses are those dfenbting past time, em- 
bracing the imperfect^ historical perfecty and pluperfect^ and often an 
" historical " present. - 

Let the pupil examine various complex sentences in the text, with 
reference to the foregoing law.] 

94. Subjunctive by Attraction. Sometimes a verb which 
would regularly be indicative is written in the subjunctive 
under the influence of the infinitive or subjunctive verb upon 
which it depends, especially when the two clauses form one 
complex idea. 

For example, see chapter 27, second sentence, quo turn essent. 

95. A, ab, de (dis), e, and ex, in composition with verbs, 
take the ablative without a preposition if the idea of separa- 
tion is figurative ; in literal or actual separation or motion the 
preposition accompanies the ablative. 

[Note : See Rules 27 and 40, of which this is a part.] 
c5nftttl dSalBtunt, they desist from the attempt. 
d6 pr5vinclft dScesalt, he withdrew from the province, 

96. Imperfect vs. Historical Perfect. The imperfect is the 
tense of description; the perfect, of narration. The former 
describes a situation; the latter advances the narration of 
events. 

97. Hendiadys is a figure of syntax consisting of two nouns 
in coordinate construction, one of which is logically dependent 

fidem et iHs liirandum dant, they give the oath of alle- 
giance. 



9^ THE BEGINNER'S CMSAR 

98. Dative with Special Verbs. The dative is used as the 
object of libet^ licet ^ and compounds of satis ^ bene, and male. 

id nobis facere licet, we are allowed to do this, 
mihi ipal nunquam BatisfaciS, / never satisfy myself, 

99. Personal Instrument or Means is expressed hyper with 
the accusative. 

Caesar certior factus est per 16gftt5s, Ccesar was in- 
formed through envoys. 

100. Substantive Clauses are those which are used like 
nouns, as subject or object, or in apposition. 

[Note : Such clauses are usually infinitive^ subjunctive of purpose 
or result, indicative with quod, indirect question. 

For example, see chapter lo, second sentence, »/ . . . haberet^ 

101. Greek Accusative. The synecdochical or Greek accu- 
sative of specification is found in Latin — f requendy in poetry, 
occasionally in prose. 

Examples in prose : — 

id temporis, a^ to that titne. 

quod si, but if (literally, as to which, if), 

102. The genitive occurs with causa, gratia, " for the sake 
of " ; ergo, " because of " ; Instar, " like " ; pridie, " the day be- 
fore " ; postridie, " the day after " ; tenus, " as far as." 

Authorities differ in the technical assignment of this geni- 
tive ; some call it simply " subjective," others " partitive." 
Logically neither seems wholly satisfactory. 

103. The Adjectival Partitive. Superlatives and some com- 
paratives of adjectives expressing the idea of order, rank, or 
succession, also medius, ceterus, and reliquus, mean not what 
object, but what part of it. 

prim& nocte, in the first part of the night. 



RULES OF SYNTAX 99 

104. lAgkal Agreement of the Verb. Sometimes the verb 
agrees not with its gTamma.tica] subject, but with the subject 
appositive or a predicate noun, serving as the /n^a/ subject. 

mimma onmloiu faSnmt, they were in all. 

105. The Adjectival Participle. The participle is often the 
equivalent of a subordinate clause or phrase, expressing time, 
cause, condition, concession, manner, and means. 

damnStum poenam aeqnl oportSbat, if condemned, he 
muit suffer punishment. 



NOTES 



Being Mainly Geographical and Historical 

Caesaris commentarii is the proper title of the complete account 
of Caesar's campaigns as proconsul of Gaul, from the spring of 5S 
B.C., when on his arrival he began his operations against the Hel- 
vetii, to 52 B.C., when he won his memorable victory over Gaul, 
united under the intrepid Vercingetorix, " the greatest of the Gauls, 
the first national hero of France." These seven campaigns were 
written by Csesar himself, and the account is popularly called the 
" seven books of the Gallic war." Each " book " is a concise chron- 
icle of one year. The short interim, from the fall of the town of 
Alesia in 52, when, as Plutarch says, "Vercingetorix came out of 
the gate, threw off his armor, and sat quietly at Caesar's feet," to the 
last futile rally of the Gauls in the southwest, is narrated in the 
eighth and final book by one of Caesar's officers and friends, Hirtius 
Pansa. 

As present and indubitable testimony of the fact of these closing 
experiences of the great commander, it is pertinent to state here that 
about 1865 the government of France made extensive investigations 
on the site of old Alesia, and in these excavations innumerable relics 
and traces of the siege were found. Camps, redoubts, trenches, 
staked pits, and coins, swords, spear-heads and other articles, testify 
not alone to the truth but the accuracy of Caesar's account of this 
siege, which is " one of the most remarkable on record, and which 
may well rank among the decisive military operations of the world's 
history." 

Supplementary Reading on the Bellum Helveticum 

Froude's Caesar, pp. 214-231. 
Fowler's Julius Caesar, Chap. 8. 

lOI 



I02 THE BEGIN^TEFTS C^SAR 

Guizot's Histoiy of France, VoL I, pp. 47-51. 

Merivale*s History of Rome, Vol. I, pp. 237-262. 

Mommsen's History of Rome, Vol. IV, pp. 289-295. 

Napoleon's Caesar, Vol. II, Ch. 3. 

Plutarch's lives, Caesar. 

Trollope's Caesar's Commentaries, Chap. 2. 



THE HELVETIAN WAR 

Chapter I 

GAlUdy or Ganl, may be regarded roughly as the region now 
covered by France. More particularly, it was the section of conti- 
nental Europe west of the Alps and the Rhine, including Switzerland, 
and north of the Pyrenees mountains. To this may be added the 
land below the Alps, which Caesar calls Gallia ciUrior^ and which 
the northern tribes of Europe, some five hundred years before, had 
overrun, not stopping short of the sack of the great Rome itself. 

Notice carefully that Caesar sometimes speaks of Gallia as merely 
one of the three divisions of " Gaul as a whole." 

BelgaCy Aqnitaniy Celtae : These nations are represented to-day 
by the Welsh, Basques of northwestern Spain, and the Irish and 
Highland Scotch, respectively. 

The Belgae : The Belgian tribes commonly claimed German origin. 
Strabo calls them yepftaviKbv iOvos, a " Germanic people." And Hir- 
tius, in the Eighth Book, says, " They are not much different from 
the Germans." 

The Celtae: These are the people whom the Romans meant 
especially when they spoke of Gauls. In Caesar's time they had 
fallen from the position of headship of all France to a third part in 
the territorial division which he describes. They called themselves 
" Children of Night," whence the origin of our expression /crtni^kt 
and se'nnight — in accordance with the Gallic manner of reckoning 
time by night. Modem scholars have learned a little of their lan- 
guage from proper names and inscriptions, which show them to be 
a branch of the Aryan race, which swept westward from Asia over 
Europe long before the time of Greece or Rome. For the English 



NOTES 103 

meaning of some Celtic proper names, see the Vocabulary of this 
book. 

MercatoreSy or ** Italian traders " : Caesar tells us that the Belgians 
were yet untouched by Roman civilization, they being too remote for 
the visits of the Italian traders, coming up from Marseilles along the 
natural highway of the Rhone, the Saone, and then the Loire. But 
upon the great and open central portion, the land of the Celts, was 
being dumped, from pack-horse, mule, or cart, every luxury of the 
Roman epicure — and with it all, slowly, the attendant vices. The 
most common article of traffic was the sparkling southern wines, for 
which, it is said, these people would barter their sons. 

Thus Rome was waging a double-headed warfare oi arms and de- 
bauchery. The one followed the ravages of the other, and already 
in Caesar's day the former bold and hardy tribes of Gaul, that ** once 
magnificent people, were in a state of change and decomposition." 

In order that the pupil may understand better the environment of 
the people against whom Caesar planned and executed his victorious 
campaigns, we quote here a few lines from Froude : 

"The Gauls had yielded to contact with the Roman Province. 
They had built towns and villages. They had covered the land 
with farms and homesteads. They had made roads. They had 
bridged rivers, even such rivers as the Rhone and the Loire. They 
had amassed wealth, and had adopted habits of comparative luxury, 
which, if it had not abated their disposition to fight, had diminished 
their capacity for fighting. 

" The chief was either hereditary or elected, or won his command 
by the sword. The mass of the people were serfs. The best fight- 
ers were self-made nobles, under the chief's authority. Every man 
in the tribe was the chief's absolute subject; the chief, in turn, was 
bound to protect the meanest of them against injury from without. 
War, on a large scale or a small, had been the occupation of their 
lives. When the call to arms went out, every man of the required age 
was expected at the muster, and the last comer was tortured to death 
in the presence of his comrades as a lesson against backwardness." 

Thus we see a rude resemblance to feudalism. 

Oceano : This means the Atlantic, and especially that part adja- 
cent to France, now called the Bay of Biscay. 



I04 THE BEGINNER'S C^SAR 



Chapter II 



Orgetorix : He first suggested his scheme in B.C. 6i, three years 
before Caesar's appearance in Gaul. This date is confirmed by a 
sentence in the next chapter. Note how the Romans expressed 
dates, viz., by designating the consuls of the particular year. 

loci natnra : *' These bold, hardy mountaineers occupied modem 
Switzerland." 

proyinciam nostram : See Vocabulary. 

pro mnltitudine : The population of Helvetia, as given by Caesar 
in chapter 29, was only 263,000^ As the same region now has a 
population of about three millions, the fact of over-crowded condi- 
tions must be disregarded in accounting for the migration. Rather 
is it attributable to the increasing encroachment of the Germans, 
and the report of broad, fertile fields far to the west along the shores 
of the Bay of Biscay between the Garonne and the Loire. Above 
all is the fact of their inherent unrest, as shown by the escapades of 
previous generations; their part in the Cimbri invasion, their al- 
liances with the Teutons on lesser occasions, their campaigns of fire 
and sword down the Rhone. The disaster at Aix, forty years be- 
fore, was now forgotten, and time was ripe for another outbreak. 
This is rather the natural explanation of their desire for new homes. 

in "latitudinem : The Jahrbucher fur classische Philologie sug- 
gests that Caesar wrote LXXX, and this was changed to CLXXX 
by mistake of some early copyist. The region in question measures 
80 Roman miles in width, instead of 180, as given. The Roman 
mile, or "a thousand paces,'' is about .9 of the English mile, or 
4,854 feet. The/fljjwj is 4 feet lo^ inches. 

Chapter III 

regnnm obtinoerat : Catamantaloedis had formerly held the chief- 
taincy among his people. His son, Casticus, was induced to make 
an effort to secure the same position for himself. From this we in- 
fer that the chief authority was no longer hereditary, but elective or 
won by the sword or political chicane. 

principatnin : A close distinction is drawn by some authorities 



NOTES I OS 

between this word and regnum. The latter was distinctly political, 
necessarily involving official position and authority, a power con- 
ferred by the tribe. The principatum was the prerogative of one 
bom to rank and wealth, being a position of prominence without 
constitutional or official power. This distinction seems to be con- 
firmed by the case of Dumnorix. He already possessed the princi- 
patuMi and was induced to try for the regnumy that is, the political 
sovereignty. (See notes to chapter i<^y principatum,) 

regna : The plural is used because the political sovereignty of 
three states is meant. 

tres populos : Helvetii, iEdui, Sequani. 

Chapter IV 

Ba res : The conspiracy. 

Ex yincnlis : " In chains." 

damBatum . . . oportebat : Note that Csesar omits eutity which is 
the implied object of sequi, the whole being the subject of the im- 
personal verb. 

igni: Barbarous and inhuman practices seem to have been not 
uncommon among the Gauls. See the quotation from Froude, in 
Chapter I, last sentence. Human sacrifice was sometimes offered 
in religious ceremony. Fire was the common fate of traitors. 

snain familiam : The meaning of this is now a mooted question. 
The derivation of this word, irom famulus y ** servant," seems to show 
plainly that it means a gang of servants or slaves, rendered by the 
one word "household." Caesar*s sentence is then properly con- 
structed, for the clients and debtors are separate and additional 
members of the entire retinue of Orgetorix, and not to be considered 
a part of the familia. If not so, then his sentence is carelessly 
written. The latter fact is sometimes argued. 

clientes : Retainers or devoted followers, whom oath and sacred 
custom compelled to follow their chief, like the vassal of the middle 
ages. Caesar here uses a Latin word which to the Roman gave at 
once a clear idea of that relationship of lord and vassal which reached 
its fullness of growth in mediaeval times ; for it existed in Rome as 
well as Gaul under the name of client and patron. Thus Caesar 
does not enter into explanation of the matter, for he knows his 



I06 THE BEGINNER'S CjESAR 

people are already familiar with it at home. In a subsequent book, 
however, he again mentions this institution, and shows especial 
interest in a peculiar feature of it. In Book III, Chapter 22, Csesar 
tells us that when Crassus was campaigning in the southwest and 
besieging an Aquitanian town, a certain leader of the enemy came 
rushing out from another less well-guarded part of the town, accom- 
panied by six hundred devoted followers called solduriu Caesar's 
brief account of the condition of these retainers is valuable. He 
says they enjoy all the advantages of life with him to whose service 
they are sworn, and if misfortune befalls him, they suffer the same 
fate or commit suicide. Caesar adds that never in human memory 
has a soldurius refused death after his master. This relationship 
was the natural, perhaps inevitable, growth of a time when might was 
right, and the rule that only of the strong. It is a mark of a higher 
civilization than that of the past, that we have been able to devise a 
better social order than that of vassalage. 

se eripuit : Exactly how he effected this is not explained. Some 
commentators say that the large retinue of the accused man awed 
the court to silence. 

multitudinem cogerent : See again the extract from Froude, in 
regard to the mustering of men (Notes, Chapter I). 

ut arbitrantur : Notice that tU is often used with the indicative in 
the sense of " as." 

Chapter V 

quod constituerant : This means the emigration. At first the 
older men had opposed the project, but they had at last been over- 
ruled by the less cautious and less experienced younger element. 
Thus, prudence and wisdom of age gave way to the indiscretion and 
enthusiasm of youth, and again to the unfortunate people was to 
come a repetition of the reverses of Aix, forty years before. 

Oppidum vs. yicus : The distinction of meaning of these words is 
not more a question of size than of fortifications. About the former 
was always a wall. The latter was a group of houses in the open 
country. The existence of towns, villages, buildings, and farms, 
herein mentioned, shows the Gauls to have advanced far beyond the 
primal state of human life. 



NOTES 107 

reliqua aedificia : This means all buildings not already burned ; 
that is, all structures on the outlying farms, beyond town or village 
limits. 

trium mensium : This would seem to show how long a time it 
might take them to reach their new home. Let the pupil pause to 
contemplate what a vast amount of food would be required for 
368,000 people for three months ! It has been variously estimated 
that it took six to twelve thousand wagons and about twenty-five 
thousand draught animals, extending along a line of thirty to fifty 
miles, to transport this food. 

Ranraciy Tulingi, Latobrigi : It will be profitable for the pupil to 
take a good map of modern Europe and locate the regions occupied 
by these early people. The Rauraci were near Basle ; the Tulingi, 
near Schaffhausen ; the Latobrigi, in the Black Forest (Schwarzwald). 
Notice the repetition of the conjunction ^/; this is called /^/yjyif- 
deton: 

Boii: These were properly a Gallic tribe, although at this time 
rather widely scattered and homeless, many being in Germany, just 
across the Rhine. Schweizer-Sidler is authority for the statement 
that the Gauls in Germany were a remnant left behind in the great 
Aryan migration from east to west. 

Hoieia : Modern site of Neumarkt, about one hundred miles 
southwest of Vienna. 

Chapter VI 

itinera : " There were only two ways by which they could leave 
home." If the pupil will examine a good modern map, he will see 
how effectually the ways to the south and west were blocked. Nature 
has raised an almost unbroken barrier about that little country. 
Along the south and southwest tower the highest ridges and peaks 
of the whole Alps, including the famous Rosa, St. Gothard, Great 
St. Bernard, Finster Aarhom, Jungfrau, and the highest of all — Mt, 
Blanc. To the west stood the then impassable Jura range. Whether 
the comparatively open route down the Rhine, along the base of the 
Vosges, was considered or not we are not informed. One may infer 
that it was rejected, because of its long and tedious circuit through 
a country particularly hostile. 



I08 THE BEGINNER'S CMSAR 

Thus, nature conspired with man and matter to force a conflict 
between Gaol and Roman. So down the lake to Geneva they were 
to go. At that point a choice of way opened : they might cross the 
bridge at Geneva into the country of the Allobroges, who, although 
under Roman dominion, were not loyal to the master. Their way 
would then be through country easy to traverse; or, they might 
continue down the river along its northern bank and emerge into an 
open country, through the narrow defile where the river bends around 
the southern limb of the Jura. This way was at last forced upon 
them. This defile or pass is now called the Pas de TEcluse, and is 
situated on the line of railway from Paris to Geneva, via Micon, 
about an hour's ride out of Geneva. An idea of the wildness of this 
region may be gained from the fact that a tunnel of two and one-half 
miles has been constructed to avoid one of the most difficult parts. ! 

per proYinciam nostram : This really means the land of the Alio- ^ 

broges, south and southeast of Geneva, being now called Dauphm^ 
and Savoie. 

The region had been subjugated in b. c. 121. It had revolted I 

and was again pacified by Pomptinus in b. c. 61, and made a part 
of the Roman Province, the proconsular authority thus being extended 
quite to Geneva. 

Vado transitur: Caesar says there were fords at some places. 
Now there is only one, and that is only a few miles down from 
Geneva. The river is very swift, and thus probably its current has 
worn away the bed. From Lyons to almost the mouth, the current 
is so strong that only the largest steamers can navigate it. 

Genaya : This is a Celtic word, gena^ meaning mouth, since at 
this point the Rhone gorges the waters of the lake into its narrow 
bed. 

pons : This is mentioned, since the Helvetii planned to cross it 
into the land of the AUobroges. Hence, Caesar's first act was to 
destroy it (see chapter VII). 

a. d. v. Kal. Apr. : ante diem qutntum Kalendas ApriUs^ " the 
fifth day before the Kalends of April,** nominally March 28. This 
is a peculiar construction. It is an instance of case by attraction, 
corresponding to mode by attraction, explained in Rule 94. Kalendas 
is the object of ante* Diem is said to be drawn away from the usual 



NOTES 109 

ablative of time when by its proximity to ante, Apriles is an adjec- 
tive, modifying Kalendas, 

Chapter VII 

Caesari: Notice that this is the first mention of Caesar. It is 
peculiar that he, the writer, speaks of himself, the actor, always in 
the third person, as though he were writing of another. 

Let the pupil now consider how Caesar had come to be so con- 
cerned in Gallic affairs that word was brought directly to him. It 
was the custom to grant to the consuls, at the close of their term of 
office, the governorship of some province, for one year, with the title 
of proconsul. Caesar had just finished his year as consul (b. c. 59). 
He was the ablest Roman living, not excepting the great Pompey, 
who had achieved undying fame in his swift victory over the pirates 
of the Mediterranean and over Mithridates, the scourge of the East. 
Now, again, good service would be rendered Rome if she were 
relieved of fear of Gaul and German, who were hovering " like an 
ominous cloud charged with forces of uncertain magnitude," the par- 
tial strength and fury of which Italy had already more than once seen 
in action. 

Now again was the need of an able man. The Senate, as usual, 
was lethargic. The people, however, were spurred by personal 
anxiety and fear to something of the old fire. It was they who had 
urged the matter of Pompey's mission, mentioned above, and now 
again they were to make no mistake in their choice of a man to care 
for their interests on the northern frontier. They played their hand 
with a vengeance, and instead of the usual one year, they determined 
to send Caesar as proconsul or governor of Gaul for five years. The 
choice of Caesar may be largely attributed to his popularity. He 
was the idol of the people, who seem to have come to feel that with 
him naught was impossible, in him " was the divine majesty of gods, 
who are the masters of kings." It was a case of prejudiced choice ; 
for, as Froude says, ** No Roman general was ever sent upon an 
enterprise so fraught with complicated possibilities, and few with less 
experience of the realities of war." 

Thus to Caesar, as the newly appointed governor of Gaul, was 



I lO THE BEGIXNER'S C^SAR 

■ 

brought word of a condition of affairs requiring his immediate 
presence. 

Haturat ab iirbe : When urbs is alone, that is, without its apposi- 
tive of the particular city, it means Rome. 

Max. pot. itineribus : He travelled sometimes a hundred miles a 
day, either walking at the head of his legions, or mounted on his . 

own favorite horse, which would suffer no one but his master to | 

mount him, or borne in his litter while dictating to four or sometimes 
seven amanuenses — reading, writing, dictating, and listening all at 
once. '* Under the rains of Gaul, swimming its rivers, climbing its 
mountains on foot, and making his bed among rains and snows in 
its forests and morasses," of which Michelet, Suetonius, and Plutarch 
all tell us, he spared himself none of the hardships of the common 
soldier. 

Proyinciae . . . legio una : Caesar went by way of Marseilles, I 

where he probably had left a legion on his return to Rome from 
Spain, one year before. This was the legion which was to become 
the famous " tenth." Then, after levying other troops, he hurried 
on, reaching the vicinity of Geneva in eight days (Plutarch). 

L. Cassium: This is an incident of the attempted invasion of 
Italy by the Cimbri and Teutones, Germanic tribes, with Gallic allies, . 
in 107 B. c. The army of L. Cassius Longinus was one of five or 
six to be defeated by the barbarians during those fearful years from 
1 13-105 B. c. Only in 102 B. c, by Marius at Aquae Sextiae (Aix), 
near Marseilles, and in 10 1 b. c. at Vercellae, in Italy, were these 
disasters fully avenged. " The homeless people of the Cimbri and 
their comrades were no more" (Mommsen). 

ab Helyetiis pulsum : After the Cimbri had defeated the Roman 
consul, Papirius Carbo, in Noricum, B. c. 113, they turned w^estward 
and instigated the Helvetii to similar action. 

8ub iugum: "under the yoke." This ceremony was the usual 
token of surrender. Livy, the greatest contemporary Roman histo- 
rian, the personal friend of the Caesars, the Gibbon- Macaulay of his 
day, describes the construction of the yoke as follows : "Tribus hastis 
iugum fit ; humi fixis duabus, superque eas transversa una deligata." 
Under this the defeated army marched. Note our word subjugate. 



NOTES III 



Chapter VIII 



interea: **in the meantime/' i.e., from the time the Helvetian 
agents left him, April i, until the designated time of their return, 
April 13. 

murum fossamque perducit: Thus entrance into the Province 
was prevented, but the way to the west still lay open through the 
Pas de TEcluse. Caesar's force was small. He must replenish it. 
Leaving Labienus to guard the newly constructed line of defenses 
along the south bank of the Rhone, he set out for Italy. But before 
he could return with his five new legions, the enemy had accom- 
plished their exodus through the Sequani, and were plundering and 
ravaging the land of the ^Edui, as given in chapters 9, 10 and 1 1 
following. 

As to the wall and moat which were constructed from Geneva to 
the pass of the Jura, a distance of about eighteen miles by the river, 
but only half that in a straight line, the labor of construction does 
not seem wonderful when we are told that recent surveys show that 
the total extent of space requiring fortification was only about three 
miles. The work was probably done in as many days. The reason 
for this short distance is that the south bank of the river is very 
rugged, being quite precipitous in most places. Thus only at ex- 
posed places, where the bank was sloping, were defenses necessary 
to prevent the enemy from fording and scaling the opposite shore. 
A clear idea of the appearance of these walls and ditches will be 
gained by a study of the cut on page 44. 

praesidia, castella : The former were forces, occupying the latter. 
The castella were little forts, built at the more open and accessible 
points along the river. The engineers who surveyed the ground by 
direction of Napoleon III, already mentioned in these Notes, found 
traces of these structures. About four redoubts, or castella^ were 
located. It would be ill advised to associate these fortresses with 
the fords, since the Helvetii were in possession of boats and rafts, 
which made them independent of shallows. Knowing this, the 
Romans certainly took no notice of fords in locating their castella. 
Hence the statement that in those days there were more fords than 
at present does not follow from this fact of the castella. 



112 THE BEGINNER'S CMSAR 



Chapter IX 



Seqnanis inyitis : However willing the Sequani might be to see 
the Helvetii in their neighbors* territories, they objected to the pres- 
ence, in their own, of such a flight of devouring locusts. Evidently, 
however, there was some general scheme^ of which the entry of the 
Helvetii into Gaul was an essential part; thus, the Sequani were 
induced to agree (Froude). 

To see what this general scheme was will help the pupil to com- 
prehend the political situation in Gaul at this time. The iEdui seem 
to have inherited the Celtic leadership of old, and the Romans, in 
their desire to extend their power over Gaul, had taken them under 
their protection. But this subtle influence was resisted, not only by 
tribes quite as strong as the i£dui, but even by parties within tribes 
nominally favorable to Rome, even within the i£dui themselves. 
The national spirit was not dead in Gaul. Everywhere the patriots, 
proud of their independence, rankling against the fetters Rome was 
slowly forging for them, were at work marshalling their strength 
within and without their country, soliciting assistance from whatever 
source, even from the Germans. As Caesar tells us in Book VI, 
chapters ii and 12, in every district, in every hamlet, were these two 
factions, one in sympathy with Rome, the other bitterly averse to all 
foreign interference, each seeking external assistance, looking for 
friends beyond the confines of their own coimtry. The prowess of 
the Helvetii, and especially their experience in warfare- with both 
Roman and German, made them especially welcome to the national 
or patriotic party. Their presence would be a most desirable acqui- 
sition in a struggle for maintenance of Gallic independence. Thus, 
since the party of the patriots was now everywhere ascendant, the 
entry of this hardy people was easily effected, being an important 
part of the general scheme to resist the encroachment of the Romans. 

Dumnorigem Aeduum: In Book VI, chapter 12, Caesar says 
the leaders of the two factions were the ^Edui, for Rome ; the Se- 
quani, for the people. This is but a broad statement of the situa- 
tion; for, as he himself says again, as stated above, in every district, 
in every hamlet, and even in families, there was the same factional 
strife. Dumnorix was the ardent leader of the national faction 



NOTES 113 

among the ^EduL Thus he favored the coming of the Helvetii. 
With the success of the patriots, he hoped for the regnutn (see Notes 
to chapter 3), not of the Sequani alone, but perhaps of Gaul. 

obsides dant : This fact shows the utter decomposition and alien- 
ation of the Gallic people as well as their extreme barbarism, since 
thb guaranty of a peaceful passage was deemed necessary. This 
proved to be a wise foresight of the Sequani, when the passing 
throng reached the land beyond. (See chapter 11.) 

Chapter X 

Quiet at last followed the repeated but vain attempts of the Hel- 
vetii to scale the south bank of the Rhone, and enter the possessions 
of the AUobroges, as described in chapter 8. To know the cause 
of the lull and what was transpiring in the Helvetian quarters, Caesar 
sent scouts, who brought back word (Caesari renuntiatur) of the in- 
tended movements of the enemy. 

In this chapter Caesar states fully why he was so opposed to the 
emigration of the Helvetii. Some writers are inclined to discredit 
him, and feel that his reasons were but pretexts for interference, dis- 
guising his real purpose of extending Roman sovereignty over Gaul. 

Judging Rome by her previous history and even by events then 
going on in other parts of her frontier, this may be true. Yet the 
force of Caesar's argument, that it would be dangerous to have such 
a hostile and warlike people as the Helvetii as neighbors to the 
Romanized tribes of the western part of the province, separated not 
by impassable mountains, but by reaches of open and level plains, 
must be credited. Furthermore, there was no surety that the emi- 
grants would abide in their new home. Caesar's keen mind foresaw 
that the whole movement was but the prelude of the play, and 
sooner or later the whole region would rise and move as one great 
tide over the borders of the empire. The beginning must be stopped 
once for all. Some commentators have argued the emptiness of 
Caesar's excuse of opposition to the Helvetii, and have said that, in- 
stead of being nearer to the Roman dominions, the emigrants in 
question would be still further away. In respect to miles, as the 
crow flies, this claim is true, virtually it is absurd. As Cicero once 



1 14 THE BEGINNER'S C^SAR 

said, the gods placed the Alps to shelter Rome in her weakness. 
Helvetia lay beyond that barrier, while on the far west, from the 
northern bank of the mouth of the Garonne, whither the emigrants 
were making, to the borders of the Province, was a stretch of only a 
hundred miles of open country. To cross this would be, for any 
warring party of horse, but the casting of a pebble. 

Another conclusive reason for resisting the emigration itself is 
found to have been in Caesar's mind, by the fact that after the defeat 
of the enemy at Bibracte, near Autun (chapter 26), he ordered the 
remnant of the people to return to Helvetia ; for he knew, if it were 
left vacant, hordes of Germans would fill it, and from there out again 
they would follow in the wake of the Helvetii, and thus Rome would 
soon have to do with a still fiercer and still more dreaded foe. 

in Italiam : Nominally, Italy extended north only to the Rubicon 
river. Csesar went only to Aquileia, near the head of the Adriatic, 
now Aquila, an inconsiderable city, long since outgrown by Venice. 
At that time Aquileia was the chief recruiting station for the north- 
west, and very strongly fortified. 

magnis itineribus : From 20 to 25 miles per day. 

prozimum iter: He returned from Aquileia by way of Turin, 
where he levied the dims legiones mentioned, and thence on to the 
pass of Mont Gen^vre, just south of the famous Mt. Cenis tunnel of 
to-day, and near the modern Brian9on. Here he was attacked by 
mountaineers, whom he speedily repulsed. 

quinque legiones : There was already one legion on the Rhone 
with Labienus. This made six legions, or about 25,000 men, now 
under Caesar's command, besides some native recruits of Gallic 
cavalry. 

Ocelum : The modern site of this town is not known. Certainly, 
it was very near, if not quite, where Brian9on now stands. Some 
suggest, rather, the city of Grenoble, pop. 65,000, situated at the 
confluence of the Is^re and the Drac, in the magnificent plain of 
Graisivaudan, surrounded by imposing mountains. 

Segnsiayi : These were clients of the ^Edui, hence mainly favor- 
able to Rome. They were situated around modem Lyons. Caesar 
crossed the Rhone above Lyons, keeping a northwesterly route to- 
ward the Sa6ne, thus aiming to reach the rear of the advancing host 



NOTES IIS 

In tracing his route at this point, there is a little uncertainty. If 
he crossed the Rhone below Lyons, into the main country of the 
Segusiavi, as is to be inferred from his last statements in this chap- 
ter, then it were necessary that he recross the Rhone or pass over 
the Sa6ne above Lyons, in order to get into the rear of the enemy, 
who were crossing the latter river on their w^ay westward, as de- 
scribed in chapter 12. But Caesar makes no mention of such a 
detour. Thus it is generally interpreted that the Segusiavi reached 
across the river at Vienne, and occupied more or less of the region 
on the east side northward from that point. Thus, as stated, it is 
generally understood that he kept on in a northwesterly route, 
across this arm of the Segusiavan country, crossing the Rhone above 
Lyons, where it turns to the east. 

Chapter XI 

iam : " By this time." Napoleon III estimated that Caesar was 
absent on his recruiting expedition around Aquileia about 40 days. 
During this time, the Helvetii had marched but about 100 miles, that 
is, from Geneva, via the pass of the Jura, to Macon on the Sadne. 
But it is also estimated that the line of march was 50 miles long. 
Hence at the time of Caesar's return, the van of the enemy was well 
into the ^Eduan country beyond the river, at least to Chalons. In 
the next chapter, he says three-fourths were already beyond the river. 

The .Sdui : Why these people were especially despoiled, and with 
what confidence they could send appeals to Caesar, as here related, 
the pupil will readily understand from what has already been given 
in these notes. 

The Ambarri and Allobroges: Caesar speaks of them in terms 
showing that they had been utterly ravaged, since through this region 
the whole multitude had passed. The iEdui were yet to feel the 
full and complete effect of the onslaught. They were crying out 
more in fear of the coming storm. 

Chapter XII 

de tertia vigilia : From midnight to 3 a.m. (see Vocabulary). 
Tignrini : These were one of the Gallic tribes or districts, whom 



1 1 6 THE BEGINNER'S CJESAR 

the Cimbri persuaded to join in the invasion of Italy. They assisted 
in the defeat of the consular army of Junius Silanus in 109 B.C. and 
of that of Cassius in 107 B.C. Hence Caesar's exultation that fate 
had reserved for him the vengeance. 

This thought turns us to the question of Caesar's religious creed. 
Froude says in his admirable chapter on Caesar, the man : ** He 
found no reason for supposing that there was a life beyond the 
grave. He respected the religion of the Roman State as an institu- 
tion established by the laws. His own writings contain nothing to 
indicate (prove?) that he himself had any religious belief at all." 
Another writer has said : " A disbeliever in the superstitions of his 
day, he yet seems to acknowledge the presence of a controlling 
power." 

Chapter XHI 

pontemi in Arare : This was, of course, a bridge of boats, called a 
** pontoon," probably constructed of the vessels which were bringing 
food up the river, as stated in chapter 16. 

diebtts yiginti : This shows us how long the Helvetii were cross- 
ing the river. 

Diyico : As Caesar says, he had been a leader of the Helvetii in 
the Cimbri invasion, when Cassius was defeated, 107 B.C. The year 
was now 58 b.c, making the event 49 years before. Thus was Di- 
vico an old man, and probably the oldest among them in military 
experience. This was probably the reason why he was chosen envoy 
on this occasion. 

In the choice of this man, who must have awakened in any pa- 
triotic Roman the most bitter and revengeful thoughts, some writers 
have questioned both the wisdom and the motive of the Helvetians. 
If they hoped or cared for amnesty, it was certainly unwise if not 
indelicate to offer overtures through a man so identified with the 
offences of the past. Rather is the question of motive probable. 
We can understand how Caesar's sudden appearance with an army 
of six legions, or 25,000 disciplined men, whereas when last seen he 
had only one, momentarily startled the enemy into this conference, 
but still, mingling with and overtopping their anxiety, were a certain 
disregard and contempt of a foe so inferior in numbers. It were 



NOTES 117 

well, they thought, to remind the Roman leader in their rear, that 
the Helvetii had done something in the past and were not to be de- 
spised in the present. 

The truth of the above analysis seems to be confirmed by two or 
three facts: In the conference, they themselves dictated terms of 
settlement, and when these were displaced by Caesar's own, they 
broke off the negotiations and continued on their way, as though 
nothing had happened. Again, when Caesar temporarily changed his 
tactics, as mentioned in chapter 23, the enemy readily construed 
it as due to fear. 

Hence we see that Divico may have been purposely selected to 
offend and taunt the Romans, possibly even to frighten them from 
further pursuit. Unfortunately for them, Caesar was their Nemesis. 



Chapter XIV 

Caesar's reply : Let the pupils take advantage of this opportunity 
to study Caesar as an orator. It is advised that the student write 
this speech to Divico in the most eloquent and forcible English that 
he can command. 

Caesar was not merely a great general. As Chateaubriand once 
declared, he is the most complete man of all history ; his genius was 
transcendent in three respects — in statecraft, in war, and in litera- 
ture and eloquence. 

Plutarch says that he had happy talents from nature for a public 
speaker, and as he did not lack ambition to cultivate them, he was 
undoubtedly the second orator in Rome. But he never rose to that 
pitch of eloquence to which his powers might have carried him, being 
rather engaged in those wars and political intrigues which at last 
gained him the empire. 

The eloquence he showed at Rome, in his earlier career, in the 
prosecution of certain cases of impeachment, won him a considerable 
interest, and his engaging address and conversation gained the hearts 
of his people. 

Caesar supplemented his native oratorical talent by a course of 
training at Rhodes, under the most skillful teacher of rhetoric and 
oratory of his time, Apollonius Molon. 



Il8 THE BEGINAER'S CAiSAR 

Cicero, who often heard him, said that there was a pregnancy in 
his sentences and a dignity in his manner which no orator in Rome 
could approach. He surpassed those who had practiced no other 
art. 

Quintilian says that he spoke with the same spirit with which he 
fought, and by application would have equalled Cicero. 

Caesar as a writer : While this thought of Caesar as an orator is 
in our minds, it may be well to add a few words to complete the 
general topic of Caesar as a man of letters. Only a small part of his 
writings is extant, their loss being perhaps assignable to the bigotry 
of the time succeeding Augustus, when the law of majestas was 
revived and extended to include defamatory writing, and there may 
have been much in Caesar's works offensive to a narrow imperialism 
like that of Tiberius. Among these lost works may be mentioned 
the Anti-Cato^ written in reply to the eulogy which Cicero published 
on the death of that zealous and conservative censor. There is 
much to be admired in Cato's honor and integrity and stem insistence 
upon the preservation of the old time virtue. He is the Cato of 
whom Portia boasts of being fathered. He sided with Pompey in 
the Civil War, and hence was an enemy to Caesar. It is to be 
greatly regretted that Caesar's reply is lost. 

Besides this, he wrote treatises on philosophy, language, natural 
science, and augury. Nor did he disdain verse. He wrote a Latin 
grammar to amuse himself as he led an army over the Alps. He 
even wrote a book on the motion of the stars. 

His surviving works are seven Books of the Gallic War, and three 
on the Civil War, and a few fragments on other subjects. 

His style is a recognized model of unadorned nau-ration, pure, 
graceful, easy. Even in his story of the Civil War, of which he was 
by far the largest part, there is not the slightest trace of strutting or 
boasting, no straining for effect, no malice, bitterness, or invective, 
naught but the simple yet eloquent story, told with his usual strong 
but subdued emotion. 

Of this trait Cicero speaks in his masterly way : "... Nudi omni 
omatu orationis, tanquam veste detracta — " bare of all adornment, 
like an undraped human form." 

We are reminded of Scott's headlong speed, when Hirtius tells us, 



NOTES 119 

in speaking of the Gallic Commentaries, *' While others know how 
faultlessly they are written, I know with what ease and rapidity he 
dashed them off." 

Chapter XV 

castra moyent : " They break camp." 

The Roman Camp : This was the solace of the Roman soldier, an 
ever present help in time of trouble. To-day, in the reverses of 
battle, an army is exposed to all the dangers of a disorderly retreat, 
only to be more widely and hopelessly scattered, as it withdraws ; in 
the days of Rome, however, the army frequently retired before its 
advancing foe into the shelter of its camp, — soils occasu suas copias 
in castra reduxit, — being one of the stereotype phrases, soon familiar 
to every reader. 

To enable the student to understand the many references in Caesar 
to the Roman camp, the following brief account is given : — 

A Roman army never halted for the night without entrenching 
itself. As the day's march approached its close, being usually about 
noon, the army having marched from about four or five a.m., a de- 
tachment of centurions, scouts, and surveyors was sent ahead to 
select a spot for encampment, and stake out the camp. In Book II, 
chapter 17, we read : exploratores centurionesqtu praemittit^ qui locum 
idoneum castris deligant. 

Thus, the outlines of the camp having been already marked out 
with great accuracy, no time was lost after the arrival of the army ; 
laying aside all instruments of war, the soldiers began to dig a ditch 
or moat [/ossa)^ about nine feet wide and six feet deep. With this 
earth they built also a wall (7fa//um)f usually about six feet above 
the level of the ground, and six or eight feet broad on the top, to 
enable standing-room for the soldiers in event of an assault on the 
camp. To strengthen the defenses, branches of trees, stakes, and 
even logs were imbedded and the sides covered with sods, and along 
the outer edge of the top was a line of green stakes driven into the 
ground, and the branches intertwined, rising four or five feet above 
the top, and forming a breastwork. For a cross-section view of this 
complete structure, see cut on page 44. 

A favorite site for a camp was the rlope of a hill (j«3 co/lg^ sub 



I20 THE BEGINNER'S CMSAR 

fnonU\ with wood, water, and grass in abundance near by. In Book 
II, chapter i8, Caesar describes the natural features of the location 
of a certain camp. 

In form, the camp was either square or rectangular, as nearly as 
the situation would allow. Let the pupil draw the plan from the fol- 
lowing description. See also the camp-plan in any book of antiquities. 

On each side was a gateway. From the porta prctetoria^ facing 
the enemy, to the rear gate, porta decumana^ ran a road or " street," 
fifty feet wide. Likewise, the gates on the right and left were joined 
by a still wider road, called the via principalis^ thus dividing the 
camp into two unequal parts. The larger part was assigned to the 
legionaries, and was itself cut by the via quintana. The smaller 
part was chiefly the headquarters of the general and his staff {legati^ 
quaestoresy and tribuni). Between the rampart or wall {vallum) and 
the tents was a space, 200 feet wide, reaching around the camp. 
This was to prevent the enemy from firing the tents, and also to give 
room for deploying the troops. 

Great precautions were taken day or night to guard against sur- 
prise. One or two cohorts were in statione before each gate, and a 
squadron {turtna) of horse patrolled the camp. Another cohort 
guarded the quarters of the general and quaestor. At night, the 
guard was divided into four reliefs to correspond with the divisions 
of the night {yigiliae). The three reliefs not on duty slept on their 
arms, ready for action. 

The Cayalry : Caesar here mentions for the first time the cavalry. 
It is said he had no horsemen when he came into Gaul, but he com- 
menced at once and raised a force of about 4000, as stated, from the 
Province and especially from the iEdui and their client tribes. 
Others say that there was always a regular contingent of cavalry in 
every legion, mercenary troops from Spain and Germany, as well as 
from Gaul. These contingent forces of cavalry, however, are rarely 
mentioned, Caesar's pride being in his own Roman legionaries. 
Whatever the fact may be concerning the existence at Caesar's time 
of a regular cavalry, it is certain that temporary levies were made 
from Gallic states subject or favorable to Rome. These probably 
disbanded on the approach of winter, appearing again in the spring. 

Thus, the cavalry is to be regarded as of two kinds : one forming 



NOTES 121 

a regular part of the legion, hence often called Ugionarii equites^ the 
other being a distinct body, and usually retaining its native dress and 
equipment and manner of fighting. Both were completely foreign. 

The cavalry was divided into regiments {aloe) of about 300 men 
each ; these again divided into ten squadrons {iurmae) of thirty men ; 
and these again into three decuries {decuriae) of ten men each, in 
charge of decurions (chapter 23). The chief officer of an ala was 
caXa^dipraefectus equiium^ being usually a Roman, sometimes a native, 
as in chapter 18, where Dumnorix is mentioned as being in com- 
mand of the Mdxxasi cavalry. 

Caesar placed little dependence upon his cavalry, using them rather 
for scouting purposes, and to harass an enemy^s line of march. In 
actual conflict they proved unstable, as shown in chapters 1 5 and 24. 
Their presence, too, gave a show of numbers. 

de nostris : This is pointed out as being the beginning of those 
changes, chiefly declensional, which have produced the modem 
Romance tongues of Italy, France, and Spain. 

8U0S a proelio continebat : They were now moving down along 
the west bank of the Saone, toward Chalons. The region here is 
very broken, and so did not give Caesar the wished for opportunity 
to fight. This may account for his delay to attack. 



Chapter XVI 

propter frigora : '* On account of the frosts." 

It was now at least the middle of June, and the region was south 
of the central part of France. This leads us to believe that the 
climate of sunny France has changed since Caesar's day. This 
change may have come from cutting down the extensive forests, and 
draining the marshes, which Caesar often mentions. 

fmmenta : In the plural, this means " standing grain.** 

pabuli : green fodder. Why was there not much for Caesar? 

ab Arare : The Helvetii had left the river, making westerly into 
the valley of the Loire. 

fnimentam militibus metiri : The regular food was coarse flour, 
or unground wheat or barley, which the soldier himself must grind. 
Every fifteen days he received two modiiy or pecks. Each day he 



122 THE BEGINNER'S CMSAR 

ground about two pounds and boiled it into a thick paste, or made 
a kind of unleavened bread. Any other food or delicacy had to be 
obtained by foraging, or bought of the merchants {mercatores\ who 
always followed the army in large numbers. 

yergobretus : The real title in the Celtic language was giurgbreth^ 
** executor of judgment." Caesar latinizes the word into vergobretus. 

(Aedaorum) precibus abductus: In chapter ii, Caesar told us 
that the i£dui sent envoys to ask aid of him against the Helvetii. 

Chapter XVII 

esse nonnallos : Review the Notes of chapter 3. 

The principes were not necessarily the same men as the magis- 
trains, 

praestare . . . erepturi : These were the favorite arguments of the 
national party. (See Notes to chapter 9.) 

" Among the i^dui, too, there were fiery spirits who cherished the 
old traditions, and saw in the Roman alliance a prelude to annexa- 
tion." 

tacnisse: This shows how strong the anti-Roman feeling had 
become, even among the people hitherto most loyal to Rome. 



Chapter XVIII 

Domnoriz : Read again the text of chapters 3 and 9. 

What was the conspiracy of Orgetorix ? 

dimittiti retinet : The omission of the conjunction is called <isyn- 
deton. What '\s polysyndeton ? (See Notes of chapter 5.) 

rerum noyarum : Usual expression for a political revolution. 
The frequency of such uprisings and changes among semi-barbarian 
people may be easily understood. The world has not yet outgrown 
them. Recent South American history is replete with fit examples. 
Likewise, in the late overthrow of the Obrenovitch dynasty in Servia, 
consummated by the murder of the king and queen and their ad- 
herents, and the immediate establishment of a liberal constitutional 
government, the student finds a striking similarity to the violent coup 
d'itats of old. 



NOTES 1^3 

Farming the revenues 

portoria : These were duties or customs collected on imports and 
exports on the frontier, and on goods passing through the country, 
whether by land or water. Sometimes these tolls were levied by 
blackmail, i.e. by force, threats, or intimidation. The iSdui were es- 
pecially well situated for the collection of large revenues, since by 
bridge tolls they controlled a considerable part of the Sadne, which 
was the main water route into central Gaul from Marseilles. 

After the Roman fashion, these revenues were " farmed out," that 
is, the privilege of collecting them was sold at auction. The buyer 
then made all collections, and kept for himself as profit all money re- 
maining over the price which he bid and paid to the State. Often 
the successful bidder would sublet certain districts to various individ- 
uals, these underlings being the " publicans " mentioned in the New 
Testament. 

ez Helvetiis uzorem: Who was the wife of Dumnorix? (See 
chapter 3.) 

sororem ex matre : " A half sister, on his mother's side." 

Diyitiacus : He had long been a personal friend of Caesar. He 
had been in Rome several times before Caesar came to Gaul. It was 
he who went in person to notify the Roman Senate of the inroads of 
the Germans in B.C. 63, and again of the proposed exodus of the Hel- 
vetia Hence the deference and affection which Caesar shows him in 
chapter 19. 

si quid accidat Romanis : This softened expression of a harsh 
thought is called euphemism. Translate : " in case of any disaster to 
the Romans." 

proelium equestre adyersum : The unsuccessful cavalry skirmish, 
mentioned in chapter 1 5, is thus explained as due to the treachery 
of Dumnorix. Review topic Cavalry in Notes to chapter 15. 

Chapter XIX 

inittsso suo et ciyitatis : suo refers to Caesar ; civitatis means the 
iEdui. 
inscientibtts ipsis : ipsis refers to both Caesar and the iEdui. 
a magistratu Aeduorum: To whom does this refer? What was 



124 THE BEGINNER'S CMSAR 

his official title, in both Celtic and Latin ? What was his authority ? 
(See Notes and text of chapter 15.) 

animadyerto : What is the literal meaning of tins word ? What 
is its inferred meaning ? What is such studied toning of harsh thought 
called ? 

Studium . . . temperantiam : Notice the omission of conjunc- 
tions. What is this frequent omission in Caesar called ? 

eius : i.e. of Dumnorix. 

interpretibus : Why were interpreters necessary in the Roman 
army in Gaul ? 

Did Divitiacus understand Latin ? 

Procillus : This man was a cultured Gaul, an intimate friend and 
important character in Csesar's chronicle. In Book I, chapter 47, 
Caesar speaks highly of his birth, character, and linguistic attain- 
ments. 

principem: One enjoying a prittcipatum, Le., "a leading and in- 
fluential man." (See Notes to chapter 3.) 

ipso and eius: These both refer to Divitiacus. In chapter 16, 
the student will remember that Divitiacus is mentioned as being 
summoned to the meeting. 

eo : To whom does this refer t 

causa cognita : Let the student be always careful in the trans- 
lation of the ablative absolute. Never render it literally. Never 
sacrifice one's own tongue to any foreign idiom. Render this: 
" after trying the case." 



Chapter XX 

Find an example of euphemism in this chapter. Let the pupil 
compare carefully the direct and the indirect discourse of the speech of 
Divitiacus, and be prepared to convert the one into the other at 
dictation in class. 

ipse, se, suam, sese : All these refer to Divitiacus, the speaker. 

ille: This refers to the one remote, i.e. to the one spoken of, 
Dumnorix. 

condonare: What is the literal meaning of this word? The 
literal meaning accounts for its double object. 



NOTES 125 

Damnorix : What was his fate ? (See Vocabulary.) Give in review 
an account of him, as given by Caesar. 

Chapter XXI 

Officers of a Roman army 

1. Dux belli: Before entering upon the duties of his new office, 
the commander in chief took the vows in the Capitol, and assumed 
the paludameniumy or cloak of scarlet wool, gold-embroidered, as 
token of his imperium militare. His title was dux belliy but after 
his first victory he received, from his soldiers, the courteous appella- 
tion of imperator. 

Usually he was narrowly restricted by the Senate, subject to its 
whims, but Caesar in Gaul was autocratic. He could increase his 
forces at will, and make war or peace without consulting the Senate. 

2. Legati : These were lieutenant-generals of the dux bellu appointed 
by the Senate, and usually three in number. Caesar had ten in 
Gaul. They were entirely subject to their commander, having been 
chosen on his nomination. Caesar usually placed them in command 
of a legion each, and in his absence he conferred upon them the im- 
perium, the lieutenant then being called legatus pro praetor e. 

3. Quaestor: The quaestor , or quartermaster, was elected- by the 
people annually to accompany the army and attend to the financial 
affairs. He took charge of the military treasure-chest, and super- 
vised the supplies and equipment of the soldiers. He also rated and 
disposed of the booty. 

Each dux belli had a quaestor, 

4. Tribuni militum : Until displaced by the legati, these, six to 
each legion, held rank next to the commander. In earlier times they 
led the legion in turn, but in Caesar's army we find them outranked 
by the legati, and reduced to subordinate services. This was a most 
beneficent reform, for these tribuni were of the equestrian rank, or 
order of knights, and had been appointed through family influence, 
and not because of military skill. This change awakened no animo- 
sity on the part of these deposed favorites of fortune, for Caesar used 
his customary tact, and to them were given functions more genteel ; 
for, instead of leading rough men to the fray, they hereafter were to 
sit in councils of war and preside at courts -martial. 



126 THE beginner: S CAUSA K 

5. Centnriones : These were the real leaders of the soldiers. 
Their position was like that of captain, sergeant, and corporal com- 
bined. They were of humble birth, and promoted solely because of 
fighting qualities. They were the pride and envy of the common 
soldier ; their office, the goal of his ambition. 

6. Below the centurions and above the common soldier, or " pri- 
vate,*' were privileged classes ; as veterans, reenlisted men, orderlies, 
standard bearers, musicians, etc. 

exploratoribus : Soldiers, sent out for scouting purposes, were 
called speculatores^ if alone ; if in parties, exploratores. 

sub monte : This was Mt. Tauffrin, in the Cote d'or ridge. 

yigilia : About what hour was it ? (See Vocabulary.) 

pro-praetore : The governor of a province was usually called 
praetor or pro-praetor. He was supreme in military and civil 
authority. In case of a critical state of war in any province, a consul 
was sent as governor of the province, with the title pro-consul. Such 
in name was Caesar in Gaul. But he was practically praetor of Gaul, 
i.e. governor of Gaul. In as much as the praetor was supreme in 
military affairs, the word praetor means ''commanding general," as 
well as governor. Caesar uses the word in this sense in the text. 
Labienus was sent on this mission, like an envoy plenipotentiary, 
with full authority of a commanding general. 

quid sui consilii sit : His plan may be inferred from the errand of 
the scouts. What was this errand ? Caesar planned a flank move- 
ment, that is, to pass around to the rear, and occupy the heights 
above the enemy, who lay encamped at the base. 

equitatum : What does Caesar do with his cavalry in this instance ? 
Understand that this was their usual position in the line of march. 
Describe the source, use, and organization of the cavalry. (See 
Notes to chapter 15.) 

de quarta yigilia: The fourth watch had begun when Caesar 
commenced his march. As the night watch began at sunset and 
continued until sunrise, and as the night was divided into four 
watches, the student must know the season of year to determine 
the exact hours of any given watch. Estimating the number of 
night hours, and dividing by four, we obtain the length of a watch, 
from which the time of any watch is easily determined. For exam- 



NOTES 127 

pie : It was about the first of July, the sun setting at 7.29 and rising 
at 4.38. If Caesar started about the beginning of the fourth watch, 
what was the approximate hour of the night ? (Answer : About 
2 A. M.) Using the almanac, let the teacher give like examples. 

The fact that it lacked yet about two and one-half hours of dawn 
explains how Caesar could hope to gain his vantage-ground unseen. 
It also helps to excuse the blunder of Considius mentioned in the 
next chapter. 

Considius: What had been his military experience ? Answer: He 
had been in active service under two of the most successful generals, 
in several of the greatest wars waged by Rome, the Mithridatic and 
the Servile. 

Chapter XXII 

prima luce : At what hour ? 

mons : What mountain ? 

ipse : Caesar. How far had he marched since two o'clock ? 

captivis : What officer had charge of booty ? 

A Gallicis armis : " from," an unusual meaning, since it contains 
the idea of meansy which does not admit the preposition. 

What was Caesar's probable inference, from the report of his 
scouts, as to Labienus ? 

Labienus : Was he really, or only nominally, praetor, as he stood 
there on the summit at dawn, watching in vain for Caesar ? Why ? 

interyallo : At what distance did Caesar follow the enemy ? (See 
chapter 15.) 

Chapter XXIII 

fromentum : Describe the food of the Roman soldier as to kind, 
quantity, mode of preparation, and apportionment. What officer dis- 
bursed supplies ? How might the soldier obtain delicacies ? (See 
Notes to chapter 16.) 

Bibracte: Now identified with Mont Beuvray, a considerable 
elevation of about 3,000 feet, in the highlands of Nivernais, about 
ten miles west of Autun. Scholars formerly placed Bibracte on the 
site of Autun, but this opinion was changed as a resi-.lt of the inves- 
tigations of Napoleon III of France in 1865, as already mentioned in 



128 THE BEGINNER'S CMSAR 

these Notes, He showed that the Gauls usually chose for their 
towns places difficult of access, either on rugged elevations, or in 
the midst of extensive marshes, which were so abundant in France 
in those days. In Book III, Caesar gives an elaborate account of 
the sites of the towns of the Veneti, on the west coast, and how 
difficult it was for him to reach them. Napoleon traced several 
ancient roads leading to the summit of Mont Beuvray, and on exca- 
vation found there the remains of foundations of Gallic walls and 
towers. 

decurionis : What was his command in the army ? (See Notes to 
chapter 15.) 

superioribus locit : What is the allusion ? 

Chapter XXIV 

The battle 

The place : Colonel Stoff el, in his Histoire de Jules Cisar^ says 
the field of battle was near the village of Montmort, southeast of 
Mont Beuvray, and three miles northwest of Toulon. 

in prox. coUem : Caesar could have hoped for no more fortunate 
turn of affairs. He was now put on the defensive, and could choose 
his own position. What do you notice concerning the usual situa- 
tion of the battle lines ? In this battle, where did he station his 
veteran legions ? His newly enrolled legions ? His foreign allies ? 
His baggage .? His camp ? 

Describe the form and defenses of a Roman camp. Name one 
particular purpose of a Roman camp, which in modem warfare it 
does not serve. (See Notes to chapter 15.) 

T%e legion 

legiones : All legionary soldiers were milites gravis armaturae, 
" soldiers with heavy armor." 

The number of men in a legion is variously estimated from 3,000 
to 5,000. This contrariety is probably due to the fact that the dead 
and disabled were not replaced ; so the older the legion in service, 
the smaller it became. Instead of recruits in a veteran legion, new 
legions were enrolled. In Caesar's legions in Gaul, it is generally 



NOTES 129 

agreed with Rustow that each contained 3,600 men. Each legion 
contained ten cohorts of 360 men each, each cohort three maniples 
of 120 each, each maniple two centuries of sixty each. In legions 
thus reduced in number below the normal, the century was often 
called ordo. 

The triple formation 

On the field of battle, the cohorts were drawn up in triplex acies. 

The men of each cohort stood ten deep, and each cohort in a line 

stood 120 feet apart. The veteran cohorts stood in front, and the 

best troops were in the first cohort. The following diagram will 

show the arrangement of a legion in triplex aciesy so often mentioned 

by Caesar : 

4321 

765 

10 9 8 

Auzilia : The auxiliaries were milites levis armaturae, " soldiers in 
light armor." These were slingers, who hurled stones or lead bullets, 
the archers or bowmen, and the cavalry. 

sarcinas : The personal baggage of the legionary. On the march 
he carried his own food supply, cooking utensils, blanket, and one or 
two rampart stakes. This luggage was done up in a bundle and 
suspended from a forked pole, which he carried over his shoulder. 
The pole was forked, like a crutch, and served much the same pur- 
pose to a weary soldier, standing at rest. Marius devised this, and 
hence the phrase, the " mules of Marius." The entire weight of this 
individual luggage, or sarcinae^ was often fully sixty pounds. 

phalange : This was a common Gallic form of charge or defense. 
The infantry was arranged in close masses, like the old Greek 
phalanx, with their heavy shields overlapping, forming a complete 
obstruction to the opposing javelins. The test of this arrangement 
was in the first furious onslaught, which often swept everything be- 
fore it. If the first charge failed, the rest of the fight was at a woful 
disadvantage to the crowded Gauls. Sometimes, as Caesar relates in 
the next chapter, the heavy javelins of the Romans penetrated the 
overlapping shields, thus binding them firmly together and imprisoning 
the wiggling, stifling mass beneath. 



130 THE BEGINNER'S CAESAR 



Chapter XXV 

SUO eqno : Plutarch says : " When he had drawn his forces up, as 
described, his horse was brought to him. Upon which he said, 
* When I have won the battle, I shall want my horse for the pursuit ; 
at present let us march, as we are, against the enemy.* ** 

Again, at the battle of Munda, Caesar ordered his horse taken to 
the rear. May one reason for this have been his solicitude for his 
horse ? (See Notes to chapter 7.) Was he a skillful rider? 

Answer : " He was a good horseman, and brought that exercise to 
such perfection by practice that he could sit a horse at full speed, 
with his hands behind him." — Plutarch, 

scutis : The Gallic shield was rectangular, sometimes oval, four 
feet long, two and one half feet wide. 

capto monte: "When the mountain was reached," i.e., by the 
enemy. 

latere aperto : " on the exposed flank." As the shield was carried 
on the left arm, which side would be the " exposed flank " ? 

Boii et Tulingi : Semi-Germanic tribes. Explain how they came 
to be in the migration (chapter 5). They had been in the van of the 
line of march thus far ; show how they were now in the rear. 

oonyersa signa : This refers only to the third battle line. What 
cohorts? What cohorts were engaged with the main body of the 
Helvetii ? (See diagram in Notes to chapter 24.) 

Venientes : Who were these ? 



Chapter XXVI 

diu atqae acriter : It cost him a long and severe conflict to drive 
their army out of the field. The fight lasted from noon till night. 
The barbarians fought gallantly, and in numbers were enormously 
superior. Plutarch says there were 190,000 fighting men among them, 
while Caesar's army did not exceed 25,000. " But the contest was 
between sturdy discipline and wild valor; and it concluded as such 
contests always must." 

ancipiti proelio : That is, on two fronts. Explain this. 

alter! ; alter! : The Helvetii ; the Boii and Tulingi. 



NOTES 131 

carros : About how many carts are estimated to have been in the 
migration ? 

hora septima : ** The seventh hour." What o'clock was it ? 
(Answer : The hora was the unit of daylight. The time from sun- 
rise to sunset was divided into twelve equal parts, or horae. The 
length of an hora^ then, varied with the season from about 45 minutes 
to one hour and a quarter. At this particular season, the sun rose 
about 5 and set at 7. How many hours of daylight ? Answer 14. 
How many minutes in each hora ? Answer 70. Then what o'clock 
was it when the battle began ? Answer i p. m.) Let the pupil 
show the solution of this problem. Let the teacher give others like it. 

pro vallo carros : This was the usual fortification of a Gallic 
camp. How does this compare with the Roman ? 

carros rotasque : Some MSS. have reddsque^ the reda being a four- 
wheeled wagon. However, the frequency with which hendiadys oc- 
curs renders the first reading probable. (See Rule of Syntax, 97.) 

Orgetorigis filia : With whom was she in camp ? 

fines Lingonum : This region lies north of Mont Beuvray ; it is 
now called Champagne. Scholars have sometimes located the end 
of the flight of the Helvetii at Langres, about ninety miles from 
Mont Beuvray, but Napoleon makes it at Tonnerre, sixty miles west 
of Langres. 

The soryivors : " Half of the fighting men of the Swiss were 
killed ; their camp was stormed ; the survivors, with the remnant of 
the women and children (a little more than a third remained of those 
who had left Switzerland), struggled on to Langres, where they sur- 
rendered." — Froude, 

sepultumm occisomm : The burial of the dead was a most sacred 
duty. The Romans believed that the spirit of the unburied roamed 
aimlessly on the banks of the Styx, unable to gain entrance to the 
land of rest. 

The long delay here shows that Caesar's army had likewise suffered 
sorely. 

Chapter XXVII 

quo turn essent : Where were the Helvetii at this time > 
Verbigenus : How many cantons composed the state of Helvetia ? 
Name two. 



132 THE BEGINNER'S C^SAR 

This district lay between modern Berne and Lucerne, 
maltitudine dediticiomm: What was the number of prisoners 
of war ? (See text of chapter 26.) 

Chapter XXVIII 

in hostimn numero : Euphemistic for slaughtering or selling into 
slavery. 

ipsos : The Helvetii and their associates. 

Oppida vicosque : Whose towns and villages ? How many of each ? 
(See chapter 5.) What is the difference between oppidum and 
vicus? 

mazime ratione : " chiefly for this reason," as explained in the 
^iM</ clause following. Only about 100,000 people returned to their 
mountain home in Helvetia, where 300,000 had been before, and 
where 3,000,000 are to-day. Even these 100,000 were in large part 
broken-hearted women and children, a petty restraint to a horde of 
Germans. But this little colony, whom Caesar could now rely upon 
to remain quiet and contented at home for another fifty years, was 
better on that treacherous frontier than no colony at all. And yet, 
history does show us that little by little the Germans did creep into 
that region, and were ready to issue into Gaul and Italy in concert 
with the entire Teutonic north, to wrest from Rome her possessions, 
carry pillage through her very streets, and leave the Western Roman 
Empire but a shadow of being. 

As to the history of the Helvetii after their melancholy return, 
there is reason to believe they never recovered. Caesar speaks of 
them again in the battle of Alesia, about six years later (b.c. 52), 
when they sent 8,000 troops. It is probable they were assimilated 
into the German tribes, which settled slowly in Helvetia. To-day, 
Switzerland is largely Germanic. 

Boios . . . concessit: The more usual order would be Aeduis 
petentibus^ ut Boios infinibus suis collocarent^ quod Boii egregia virtute 
cogniii erant^ CcBsar id concessit. 

Virtute (Boiorum) : What had the Boii done of remarkable cour- 
age ? 

petentibus Aeduis : Why did the M6m\ want these brave allies ? 
See Notes to chapter 9, as to the political situation. 



Chapter XXIX 

t&bnlu : These lists were written on the usual " writiug-taUeta," 
which were thin, small boards, hinged at the back, so as to fold and 
protect the sides, covered with wax. Upon this wax, the impressions 
were made with an instrument called stilus. 

littrals Graecis : " In Greek characters or letters," i.e. using the 
Greek alphabet merely, not the language, since their own language 
had no alphabet. The Gauls learned these letters from the Greek 



TABLES 



OF 



DECLENSION AND CONJUGATION. 



NOUNS. 



First Declension. --A-StemB. 



Singular. 

N. naut-a, a sailor, 

G. naut-ae, of a sailor. 

D. naut-ae, to or for a sailor, 

A. naut-am, a sailor, 

V. naut-a, O sailor. 

A. naut-a, with, fyj from a 
sailor. 



Plural. 

naut-ae, sailors. 
naut-arum, of sailors. 
naut-is, to or for sailors. 
naut-as, sailors. 
naut-ae, O sailors. 
naut-is, wUhy by^ from 
sailors. 



Second Declension. — O-Stems. 





Singular. 


Plural. 


Singular. 


Plurau 


N. 


serv-us 


serv-i 


oppid-um 


oppid-a 


G. 


serv-i 


serv-onim 


oppid-i 


oppid-orum 


D. 


serv-6 


serv-is 


oppid-5 


oppid-Is 


A. 


serv-um 


serv-6s 


oppid-um 


oppid-a 


V. 


serv-e 


serv-i 


oppid-um 


oppid-a 


A. 


serv-6 


serv-is 


oppid-o 


oppid-is 



135 



136 



THE BEGINNER'S CMSAR 



siNa 



Plu. 



Sing. 



N. puer puer-i ager 

G. puer-i puer-orum agr-i 

D. puer-6 puer-is agr-6 

A. puer-um puer-6s agr-um 

V. puer puer-i ager 



Flu. Sing. 

agr-i vir 

agr-orum vir-i 

agr-Ts 

agr-6s 

agr-i 



A. puer-o puer-Ts agr-6 agr-is 



Flu. 

vir-I 

vir-orum 
vir-o vir-Is 
vir-um vir-6s 
vir vir-I 



vir-6 vir-is 



Singular. 

N. homo 

G. homin-is 

D. homin-i 

A. homin-em 

V. hom5 

A. homin-e 



Third Declension. 



Liquid Stems. 



Plural. 

homin-es 

homin-um 

homin-ibus 

homin-es 

homin-es 

homin-ibus 



Singular. 

frater 

fratr-is 

fratr-i 

fratr-em 

frater 

fratr-e 



Flural. 

fratr-es 

fratr-um 

fratr-ibus 

fratr-es 

fratr-es 

fratr-ibus 



N. consul 

G. consul-is 

D. c6nsul-I 

A. c5nsul-em 

V. consul 

A. consul-e 

N. tempus 

G. tempor-is 

D. tempor-I 

A. tempus 

V. tempus 

A. tempor-e 



consul-es 

consul-um 

consul-ibus 

consul-es 

consul-es 

consul-ibus 

tempor-a 

tempor-um 

tempor-ibus 

tempor-a 

tempor-a 

tempor-ibus 



scriptor 

scrTptor-is 

scriptor-i 

scriptor-em 

scriptor 

scrTptor-e 

flumen 

flumin-is 

flumin-i 

flumen 

flumen 

flumin-e 



scrTptor-es 

scrTpt5r-um 

scrTpt5r-ibus 

scriptor-es 

scriptor-es 

scrrpt5r-ibus 

flumin-a 

flumin-um 

flumin-ibus 

flumin-a 

flumin-a 

flumin-ibus 



TABLES OF DECLENSION 



13; 



Mute Stems. 





Singular. 


Plural. 


Singular. 


Plural. 


N. 


virtus 


virtut-es 


hiems 


hiem-es 


G. 


virtut-is 


virtut-um 


hiem-is 


hiem-um 


D. 


virtut-I 


virtut-ibus 


hiem-T 


hiem-ibus 


A. 


virtut-cm 


virtut-es 


hiem-em 


hiem-es 


V. 


virtus 


virtut-es 


hiems 


hiem-es 


A. 


virtut-e 


virtut-ibus 


hiem-e 


hiem-ibus 


N. 


dux 


duc-es 


rex 


reg-€s 


G. 


due-is 


duc-um 


reg-is 


reg-um 


D. 


duc-i 


duc-ibus 


reg-i 


reg-ibus 


A. 


duc-em 


duc-es 


reg-em 


reg-es 


V. 


dux 


duc-es 


rex 


reg-es 


A. 


duc-e 


duc-ibus 


reg-e 


reg-ibus 


N. 


princep-s 


princip-es 


pes 


ped-es 


G. 


princip-is 


princip-um 


ped-is 


ped-um 


D. 


princip-i 


princip-ibus 


ped-I 


ped-ibus 


A. 


princip-em 


princip-es 


ped-em 


ped-es 


V. 


princep-s 


princip-es 


pes 


ped-es 


A. 


prindp-e 


princip-ibus 
Stems 


ped-e 
in i. 


ped-ibus 




Singular. 


Plural. 


Singular. 


Plural. 


N. 


civ-is 


civ-es 


host-is 


host-es 


G. 


civ-is 


civ-ium 


host-is 


host-ium 


D. 


cTv-I 


cTv-ibus 


host-i 


host-ibus 


A. 


cTv-em 


cTv-es, -Is 


host-em 


host-es, -is 


V. 


civ-is 


civ-es 


host-is 


host-es 


A. 


civ-e 


civ-ibus 


host-e 


host-ibus 



138 



THE BEGINNERS CMSAR 



'\ 





Singular. 


Plural. 


Singular. 


Plural. 


N. 


nox 


noct-es 


animal 


animal-ia 


G. 


noct-is 


noct-ium 


animal-is 


animal-ium 


D. 


noct-I 


noct-ibus 


animal-i 


animal-ibus 


A. 


noct-em 


noct-es, -IS 


animal 


animal-ia 


V. 


nox 


noct-es 


animal 


animal-ia 


A. 


noct-e 


noct-ibus 


animal-i 


animal-ibus 




Fourth Declension. -— U-Stems. 




Singular. 


Plural. 


Singular. 


Plural. 


N. 


fruct-us 


fruct-us 


corn-u 


coru-ua 


G. 


fruct-us 


fruct-uum 


corn-US 


corn-uum 


D. 


fruct-uT, -u 


fruct-ibus 


corn-u 


com-ibus 


A. 


fruct-um 


fruct-us 


corn-u 


corn-ua 


V. 


fruct-iis 


fruct-us 


corn-u 


com-ua 


A. 


fruct-u 


fruct-ibus 


corn-u 


com-ibus 




Fifth Declension. — E-Stems. 




Singular. 


Plural. 


Singular. 


Plural. 


N. 


di-es 


di-es 


r-es 


r-es 


G. 


di-ei 


di-erum 


r-el 


r-erum 


D. 


di-el 


di-ebus 


r-ei 


r-ebus 


A. 


di-em 


di-es 


r-em 


r-es 


V. 


di-es 


di-es 


r-es 


r-es 


A. 


di-e 


di-ebus 


r-e 


r-ebus 






Special Paradigrms. 






Singular. 


Plural. 


Singular. 


Plural. 


N. 


dom-us 


dom-us 


de-US 


de-i, di-i, di 


G. 


dom-us 


dom-uum, -orum de-i 


de-6rum, de-um 


D. 


dom-ui, -6 


dom-ibus 


de-6 


de-is, di-is, d-Is 


A. 


dom-um 


dom-os, -us 


de-um 


de-os 


V. 


dom-us 


dom-us 


de-US 


de-T, di-i, di 


A. 


dom-6, -u 


dom-ibus 


de-o 


de-iSy di-is, d-is 



TABLES OF DECLENSION 



139 





Singular. 


Plurat.. 


N. 


senex 


sen-es 


G. 


sen-is 


sen-um 


D. 


sen-T 


sen-ibus 


A. 


sen-em 


sen-es 


V. 


senex 


sen-es 


A. 


sen-e 


sen-ibus 



Singular. 


Plural. 


iter 


itiner-a 


itiner-is 


itiner-um 


itiner-i 


itiner-ibus 


iter 


itiner-a 


iter 


itiner-a 


itiner-e 


itiner-ibus 



ADJECTIVES. 



First and Second Declensiona* 



Singular. 



N. bon-us 

G. bon-i 

D. bon-6 

A. 

V. 

A. 



bon-a bon-um 

bon-ae bon-i 

bon-ae bon-6 

bon-um bon-am bon-um 

bon-e bon-a bon-um 

bon-o bon-a bon-o 



Plural. 
M. F. N. 

bon-i bon-ae bon-a 

bon-orum bon-arum bon-orum 

bon-is bon-is bon-is 

bon-os bon-as bon-a 

bon-I bon-ae bon-a 

bon-is bon-is bon-is 



M. 



N. 


miser 


G. 


miser-i 


D. 


miser-o 


A. 


miser-um 


V. 


miser 


A. 


miser-o 



Singular. 
F. 

miser-a 

miser-ae 

miser-ae 

miser-am 

miser-a 

miser-a 



N. 

miser-um 

miser-i 

miser-o 

miser-um 

miser-um 

miser-o 



I40 



THE BEGINNER'S CMSAR 







Plural. 








M. 


F. 




N. 


N. 


miser-i 


miser-ae 




miser-a 


G. 


miser-orum 


miser-arum 




miser-orum 


D. 


miser-Is 


miser-Is 




miser-Is 


A. 


miser-OS 


miser-as 




miser-a 


V. 


miser-i 


miser-ae 




miser-a 


A. 


miser-Is 


miser-Is 
Singular. 




miser-Is 




M. 


F, 


N, 






t5t-us 


tot-a 


t5t-um 




tot-Ius 


t5t-Ius 


tot-Ius 




tot-I 


tot-i 


tot-i 






tot-um 


t5t-am 


tot-um 




tot-o 


tot-a 


tot-o 





Possessive, Singular Ownership. 
Singular. Plural. 

meus, -a, -um, my, mel, -ae, -a 

tuus, -a, -um, thy ^ your. tul, -ae, -a 

suus, -a, -um, his^ ker, its. sul, -ae, -a 

Possessive, Plural Ownership. 
noster, -tra, -trum, our. nostrl, -ae, -a 

vester, -tra, -trum, your. vestri, -ae, -a 

suus, -a, -um, their. sul, -ae, -a 

Third Declension. 





Singular. 


Plural 


.* 




M. and F. 


N. 


M.andF, 


N. 


N. 


sapiens 


sapiens 


sapient-es 


sapient-ia 


G. 


sapient-is 


sapient-is 


sapient-ium 


sapient-ium 


D. 


sapient-I 


sapient-i 


sapient-ibus 


sapient-ibus 


A. 


sapient-em 


sapiens 


sapient-es 


sapient-ia 


V. 


sapiens 


sapiens 


sapient-es 


sapient-ia 


A. 


sapient-i 


sapient-i 


sapient-ibus 


sapient-ibus 



TABLES OF DECLENSION 



141 





Singular. 


] 


Plural, 


( 




M, and F. 




N. 


M, and F. 




N. 


N. 


fort-is 




fort-€ 


fort-es 




fort-ia 


G. 


fort-is 




fort-is 


fort-iiim 




fort-ium 


D. 


fort-I 




fort-i 


fort-ibus 




fort-ibus 


A. 


fort-em 




fort-€ 


fort-es 




fort-ia 


V. 


fort-is 




fort-e 


fort-es 




fort-ia 


A. 


fort-i 




fort-i 


fort-ibus 




fort-ibus 




M. 


F. 


N. 


M. 


F. 


N. 


N. 


acer 


&cr-is &cr-e 


acr-«s 


acr-es 


acr-ia 


G. 


acr-is 


&cr-is acr-is 


acr-ium 


acr-ium acr-ium 


D. 


5cr-i 


5cr-i 


acr-i 


acr-ibus 


acr-ibus acr-ibus 


A. 


acr-em 


acr-em acr-e 


acr-es 


acr-es 


acr-ia 


V. 


acer 


acr-is acr-e 


acr-es 


acr-es 


acr-ia 


A. 


. acr-i 


acr-i 


acr-I 


acr-ibus 


acr-ibus acr-ibus 



Irregrular Comparison. 



PosinvB. 

bonus, -a, -um, good. 
malusy -a, -um, bad. 
magnusy -a, -um, great. 
parvus, -a, -urn, small. 
multus, -a, -um, much. 
vetus (gen. -^ris), old. 

senex (gen. senis), tf^^. 
iuvenis, -^^ young. 



COMPARATTVK. 


SUPBRLATIVS. 


melior, -ius 


optimusy -a, -um 


peior, -ius 


pessimus, -a, -um 


maior, -ius 


maximus, -a, -um 


minor, -us 


minimus, -a, -um 


, plus 


plurimus, -a, -um 


vetustior, -ius 


veterrimus, -a, -um 


' senior 
.maior natu. 


maximus natu 


iunior 
.minor natii. 


minimus natu 



142 



THE BEGINNER'S CjESAR 



PosmvB. 
facilis, •«, easy. 
difficilisy •«, difficult. 
similis, •«, like, 
dissimilis, -e, unlike. 
humilis, -e, low, 
gracilis^ -e^ slender. 



COMPARATIVS. 

facilior, -ius 
difficilior, -ius 
similior, -ius 
dissimilior, -ius 
humilior, -ius 
gradlior, -ius 



exterus, outward. exterior, outer. 



inferusy below. 
posterns, following. 

superus, ahove. 

Preposition. 
cis, citra, on this side. 
in, intra, within, 
prae, pro, before. 

prope (adv.), near. 

ultra (adv.), beyond. 



inferior, lower. 
posterior, latter. 

superior, higher. 

Comparative. 
citerior, hither. 
interior, inner. 
prior, former. 

propior, nearer. 

ulterior, farther. 



Superlative. 
facillimus, -a, -urn 
difficillimus, -a, -urn 
simillimus, -a, -um 
dissimillimus, -a, -um 
humillimus, -a, -um 
gracillimus, -a, -um 



{extremus 
extimus 
{infimus 
Imus 
r postremus 
I postumus 

{supremus 
summus 



I outmost. 
\ lowest. 
\last. 
\ highest. 



Superlative. 
citimus, hithermost. 
intimus, inmost. 
primus, first. 

nearest. 



proximus 



next- 



ultimus, farthest. 



Declension of Comparatives. 



Singular. 



M. and F. 
N. fortior 
G. fortior-is 
D. fortior-T 
A. forti5r-em 
V. fortior 



N. 
fortius 
fortior-is 
fortior-i 
fortius 
fortius 



Plural. 
M.andF. 
fortior-es 
fortior-um 
fortior-ibus 
fortior-es, -is 
fortior-es 



N. 
forti5r-a 
forti5r-um 
forti5r-ibus 
forti5r-a 
forti5r-a 



A. fortior-e, -T fortior-e^ -T 



fortior-ibus fortior-ibus 



TABLES OF DECLENSION 



143 





Singular. 






Plural. 


M.a$td F, 


N, 


M.andF, N. 


N. 




plus 


plur-es 


plur-a 


G. 




plur-is 


plur-ium plur-ium 


D. 






plur-ibus plur-ibus 


A. 




plus 


plur-es, 


-Is plQr-a 


A. 




plQr-e 


plur-ibus plur-ibus 






Numerals. 








Cardinals. 




I. 


unus, -a, -um 




28. 


duodetrlgintil 


2. 


duo, duae, duo 




29. 


undetriginti 


3- 


tresy tria 




30- 


triginti 


4. 


quattuor 




40. 


quadr§gint2l 


5- 


qulnque 




50. 


quinqu£gint& 


6. 


sex 




60. 


sexaginti 


7- 


septem 




70. 


septu&gint& 


8. 


octd 




80. 


octdgint& 


9- 


novem 




90. 


n5n§gint2 


10. 


decern 




100. 


centum 


II. 


undecim 




lOI. 


centum Onus 


12. 


duodecim 




200. 


ducenti, -ae, -a 


13- 


tredecim 




300. 


trecenti 


14. 


quattuordecim 




400. 


quadringenti 


"5- 


quTndecim 




500. 


quTngenti 


16. 


sedecim 




600. 


sexcenti 


17. 


septendecim 




700. 


septingenti 


18. 


duodeviginti 




800. 


octingentf 


19. 


undSvigintl 




900. 


nongent! 


20. 


viginti 




1,000. 


mille 


21. 


'vlginti unus 
.unus et Vlginti 




5,000. 


qulnque milia 


mMU 




10,000. 


decern milia 






100,000. 


centum milia 



144 



THE BEGINNER'S CjESAR 



Ordinals. 



1st piifmus, -a, -um 

2d secundus {or alter) 

3d tertius 

4th quartus 

5 th quTntus 

6th sextus 

7th Septimus 

8th octavus 

9th Ddnus 

loth declmus 

nth undecimos 

1 2th duodecimus 

13th tertius decimus 

14th quartus decimus 

15th quintus decimus 

1 6th sextus decimus 



17th 
1 8th 
19th 
20th 

2ISt 
22d 

29th 

30th 

40th 

1 00th 

lOISt 

200th 
I 000th 
2000th 



Septimus decimus 
duodevTcesimus 
undevicesimus 
vicesimus 
JvTcesimus primus 
lunus et vicesimus 
J vicesimus secundus 
I alter et vicesimus 
undetricesimus 
tricesimus 
quadragesimus 
centesimus 
centesimus primus 
ducentesimus 
millesimus 
bis millesimus 



Declension of Numerals. 





M. 


F. 


N, 


AT, 


F. 


N. 


N. 


unus 


una 


unum 


duo 


duae 


duo 


G. 


unius 


unius unius 


duorum 


duarum 


duorum 


D. 


uni 


unl 


uni 


duobus 


duabus 


duobus 


A. 


unum 


unam unum 


du5s, duo 


duas 


duo 


A. 


un5 


una 


una 


du5bus 


duabus 


dudbus 


M.andF. 




N. 


Singular. 


Plural. 


N. 


tres 




tria 


mille 




milia 


G. 


trium 




trium 


miUe 




milium 


D. 


tribus 




tribus 


mille 




milibus 


A. 


tres 




tria 


mille 




milia 


K. 


tribus 




tribus 


mille 




milibus 



TABLES OF DECLENSION 



I4S 









Pronouns. 








First Person. 


Second Person. 


Third Person. 




SING. 


PUJ. 


SING. 


PLU. 


SING. 


PLU. 


N. 
G. 


ego 
me! 


nos 
nostrum, 


tu 
-tri tui 


vos 
vestrum, -t 






ri sul 


sui 


D. 


mihi 


ndbis 


tibi 


vobis 


sibi < 


sibi 


A. 


me 


n5s 


te 


vos 


se, sese 


sc, sese 


A. 


me 


nobis 


te 


vobis 


se, sese 


se, sese 








Demonstratives. 










Singular. 






Plural. 






M. 


F. 


N. 


M, 


F, 


N, 


N. 


hic 


haec 


hoc 


hi 


hae 


haec 


G. 


huitis 


huius 


huius 


horum 


harum 


horum 


D. 


hulc 


huic 


huTc 


his 


his 


his 


A. 


hunc 


banc 


hoc 


hos 


has 


haec 


A. 


hoc 


hac 


hoc 


his 


his 


his 


N. 


Ule 


iUa 


illud 


illl 


illae 


ilia 


G. 


illius 


illius 


illius 


illorum 


illarum 


illorum 


D. 


mi 


illi 


ilh- 


ilHs 


mis 


mis 


A. 


ilium 


illam 


illud 


illos 


mas 


ilia 


A. 


1115 


ilia 


illo 


iUis 


mis 


mis 


N. 


• 

IS 


ea 


id 


ei, ii 


eae 


ea 


G. 


eius 


eius 


eius 


eorum 


earum 


eorum 


D. 


el 


ei 


ei 


els, ils 


els, lis 


els, ils 


A. 


eum 


eam 


id 


e5s 


eas 


ea 


A. 


eo 


ea 


eo 


els, ils 


els, ils 


els, lis 


N. 


iste 


ista 


istud 


istl 


istae 


ista 


G. 


istlus 


istius 


istius 


istorum 


istarum 


istarum 


D. 


istl 


istl 


istl 


istis 


istIs 


istls 


A. 


istum 


istam 


istud 


istos 


istas 


ista 


A. 


isto 


ista 


isto 


istIs 


istIs 


is^ 



^ 



146 



THE BEGINNEI^S CMSAR 



Singular. Plural. 

N. Idem eadem idem eidem eaedem eadem 

G. eiusdem eiusdem eiusdem eorundem earundem eorundem 

D. eidem eidem eidem eisdem eisdem elsdem 

A. eundem eandem idem eosdem easdem eadem 

A. eddem eadem eddem eisdem eisdem eisdem 



N. ipse 

G. ipsTus 

D. ipsi 

A. ipsum 

A. ipso 



ipsa 

ipslus 

ipsi 

ipsam 

ipsa 



ipsum 

ipsTus 

ipsi 

ipsum 

ipsd 



ipsi 

ipsorum 

ipsis 

ipsos 

ipsis 



ipsae 

ipslrum 

ipsis 

ipsSs 

ipsis 



ipsa 

ipsorum 

ipsis 

ipsa 

ipsis 



Relative. 



Singular. 
Jl/. F, 

N. qui quae 

G. cuius cuius 

D. cui cui 

A. quem quam 

A. quo qua 



quod 

cuius 

cui 

quod 

quo 



AT. 

qui 

quorum 

quibus 

qu5s 

quibus 



Plural. 
F. N. 



quae 

quarum 

quibus 

quas 

quibus 



quae 

quorum 

quibus 

quae 

quibus 



Interrogative. 







Singular. 






Plural. 






il/. 


F. 


N. 


M. 


F, 


N. 


N. 


quis 


quae 


quid 


qui 


quae 


quae 


G. 


cuius 


cuius 


cuius 


quorum 


quarum 


quorum 


D. 


cui 


cui 


CUI 


quibus 


quibus 


quibus 


A. 


quem 


quam 


quid 


quos 


quas 


quae 


A. 


qu5 


qua 


quo 


quibus 


quibus 


quibus 



TABLES OF DECLENSION 



147 



Indefinite. 

Singular. 

M, F, N, 

N. aliquis aliqua aliquid 



Plural. 
AT. F. N. 

aliqui aliquae aliqua 



G. alicuius alicuius alicuius aliquorum aliquarum aliqudrum 



D. alicul alicul alicui 
A. aliquem aliquam aliquid 
A. aliquo aliqua aliquo 



aliquibus aliquibus aliquibus 
aliquos aliquas aliqua 
aliquibus aliquibus aliquibus 







Singular. 






M, 


F. 


N. 


N. 


quTdam 


quaedam 


quiddam 


G. 


cuiusdam 


cuiusdam 


cuiusdam 


D. 


cuidam 


cuTdam 


cuidam 


A. 


quendam 


quandam 


quiddam 


A. 


quodam 


quadam 
Plural. 


quodam 




Af, 


F. 


N. 


N. 


quidam 


quaedam 


quaedam 


G. 


quorundam 


quarundam 


quorundam 


D. 


quibusdam 


quibusdam 


quibusdam 


A. 


quosdam 


quasdam 


quaedam 


A. 


quibusdam 


quibusdam 


quibusdam 



148 



THE BEGINNER'S C^SAR 



BBQULAB VERBS. 
First Conjugation.— A-Verbs. 

am5y love. 
Principal Parts: am5, amftre, amftvl, amfttns. 

Il>n)ICATIVE. 

Active Voice. Passive Voice* 

Present. 

/ love^ am loving, do lovCy etc. / am loved, etc. 



amo 


amamtis 


amor 


amamur 


amas 


amatis 


amaris or -re 


amamini 


amat 


amant 


amatur 


amantur 



Imperfect. 
I loved, was loving, did love, etc. 



I was loved, etc. 



amabam amabamus 


amabar amabamur 


amabas amabatis 


amabaris or -re amabaminl 


amabat amabant 


amabatur amabantur 




Future. 


I shall love, etc. 


/ shall be loved, etc. 


amabo amabimus 


amabor amabimur 


amabis amabitis 


amaberis or -re amabimin! 


amabit amabunt 


amabitur amabuntur 



Perfect. 
I have loved, I loved, etc. I have been {was) loved, etc. 



amavi 


amavimus 




sum 




sumus 


amavisti 


amavistis 


amatus 


es 


amati • 


estis 


amavit 


amaverunt or -re 




est 




. sunt 



TABLES OF CONJUGA TION 



149 



Pluperfect. 



/ had loved, etc. 

amaveram 

amaveras 

amaverat 



amaveramus 

amaveratis 

amaverant 



/ had been loved, etc. 

r eram r eramus 

amatus \ eras amatl \ eratis 
erat I erant 



Future Perfect. 
/ shall have loved, etc. / shall have been loved, etc. 



amavero 


amavenmus 




ero 


> 


enmus 


amaveris 


amaveritis 


amatus 


eris < 


amatl • 


eritis 


amaverit 


amaverint 




. erit 


» 


erunt 




Subjunctive. 








Present. 




amem 


amemus 


amer 


amemur 


ames 


ametis 


ameris or -re 


amemini 


amet 


ament 


ametur 
Imperfect. 


amentur 


amarem 


amaremus 


amarer 


amaremur 


amares 


amaretis 


amareris or -re 


amaremini 


amaret 


amarent 


amaretur 
Perfect. 


amgrentur 


amaverim 


amaverimus 




sim 




simus 


amaveris 


amaveritis 


amatus * 


sis 


amatl 


sitis 


amaverit 


amaverint 




.sit 




. sint 






Pluperfect. 




amavissem 


amavissemus 


r essem 




' essemus 


amavisses 


amavissetis 


amatus • 


esses 


amilti 


essetis 


amavisset 


amavissent 




I esset 




. essent 



ISO 



THE BEGINNEI^S CjESAR 



zxsAj lave thou, 
amate, love ye. 



Imperative. 
Present. 



amare, he thou loved, 
amaminl, be ye laved. 



amatOy thou shalt love, 
amato, he shall love, 
amatote, you shall love, 
amantd, they shall love. 



Future. 



amator, thou shalt be loved, 
amator, he shall be loved. 



amantor, they shall be loved. 



Infinitive. 



Pres. amare, to love, 
Perf. amavisse, to have loved, 
FuT. amaturus esse, to be about 
to love. 



amarl, to be loved, 
amatus esse, to have been loved, 
amatum In, to be about to be 
loved. 



Participles. 

Pres. amans, -antis, loving. Pres. 

FuT. amaturus, -a, -um, about Ger.^ amandus, -a, -um, to be 

loiied, 
Perf. amatus, -a, -um, lovedy 

hamng been loved. 



to love. 



Perf. 



Gerund. 



N. 

G. amandi, of loving, 
D. amando, for loving, 
A. amandum, loving. 
A. amand5, by^Mnng. 



Supine. 



A. amatum, to love, 

A. amatu, to love, to be loved. 



1 Gerundive/^^etimes cSiWed future passive participle. 



TABLES OF CONJUGATION 



ISI 



Second Conjugation. — B-Verbs. 

moneo, advise. 
Principal Parts: moneo, monSre, monai, monitus. 



Active* 

I advise^ etc. 
mone5 monemus 

mones monetis 

monet monent 

Twos advising^ etc. 
monebam monebamus 
monebas monebatis 
monebat monebant 

I shall advise^ etc. 
monebo monebimus 
monebis monebitis 
monebit monebunt 



Indicative. 
Present. 



Passive, 



I am advisedy etc. 
moneor monemur 

moneris or -re monemini 
monetur monentur 

Imperfect. 

/ was advisedy etc. 

monebar monebamur 

monebaris or -re monebamini 
monebatur monebantur 

Future. 

I shall be advised^ etc. 

monebor monebimur 

moneberis or -re monebimim 
monebitur monebuntur 



Perfect. 
I have advised, /advised, etc. I have been (was) advised, etc. 



monui 


monuimiis 




' sum 




' sumus 


monuisti 


monuistis 


monitus 


es 


monlti 


estis 


monuit 


monuerunt or -re 




.est 




. sunt 



Pluperfect. 

I had advised, etc. I had been advised, etc. 

monueram monueramus r eram r eramus 



monueras monueratis 
monuerat monuerant 



litus J 



monitus •*. eras moniti 
I erat 



eratis 
I erant 



152 



THE BEGINNER'S CjESAR 



Future Perfect. 
I shall have advisedy etc. / shaU have been advised, etc. 



monuero 


monuenmus 




ero 




' enmus 


monueris 


monueritis 


monitus 


eris 


monitl 


eritis 


monuerit 


monuerint 




erit 




.erunt 






Subjunctive. 










Present. 






moneam 


moneamus 


monear 




moneSmur 


moneas 


moneatis 


monearis or -re 


moneamini 


moneat 


moneant 


moneatui 
Imperfect. 




moneantur 


monerem 


moneremus 


monerer 




moneremur 


moneres 


moneretis 


monereris or -re 


monereminl 


moneret 


monerent 


moneretur 


monerentur 






Perfect. 






monuerim 


monuerimus 




sim 


simus 


monueris 


monueritis 


monitus 


SIS 


^ibnitl sltis 


monuerit 


monuerint 


Pluperfect. 


sit 


sint 


monuissem 


monuissemus 


r essem 




r essemus 


monuisses 


monuissetis 


monitus 


esses 


monitl • 


essetis 


monuisset 


monuissent 




. esset 




. essent 






Imperative. 










Present. 






mone, cuhnse thou. 


monere, i 


W thou advised. 


monete, advise ye. 


monemin 


1, be ye 


advised 


• 



monetdy thou shalt advise, 
monetd, he shall advise, 
monetote, you shall advise, 
monento, they shall advise. 



Future. 

monetor, thou shalt be advised, 
monitor, he shall be advised. 



monentor, they shall be advised. 



TABLES OF CONJUGATION I S3 

Infinitive. 

Pres. monere, to advise, monen, to be advised, 

Perf. monuisse, to have ad- monitus esse, to have been 

vised, advised, 

FUT. moniturus esse, to be monitum iri, to be about to be 

about to advise, advised. 

Participles. 

Pres. monens, -entis, advising, Pres. 

FuT. moniturus, -a, um, abotU Ger. monendus, -a, -um, to 
to advise, be advised. 

Perf. Perf. monitus, -a, -um,fl^/z//>^^, 

having been advised. 

Gerund. Supine. 



N. — 

G. monendi, of advising, 

D. monendo, for advising, 

A. monendum, advising, A. monitum, to advise, 

A. monend5, by advising. A, monitu, to advise, to be 

advised. 

Third Conjugation.— B-Verbs. 

rego, rule. 

Principal Parts: rego, regere, rSxI, rectus. 

Indicative. 
Active. Passive. 

Present. 
/ rule, etc. / am ruled, etc. 

rego regimus regor regimur 

regis regitis regeris or -re regimini 

regit regunt regitur reguntur 



154 



THE BEGINNER'S CjESAR 



I was rulings etc. 
reg€bam regebamus 
regebas regebatis 

regebat regebant 

/ shall rule, etc. 
regam regemus 

reges regetis 

reget regent 

/ have ruledy etc. 
rexl reximus 

rexisti rexistis 

rexit rexerunt or 



Imperfect. 

I was ruledy etc. 

regebar regebamur 

regebaris or -re regebamini 
regebatur regebantur 

Future. 

/ shaJl be ruledy etc. 

regar regemur 

regeris or -re regemini 
regetur regentur 

Perfect. 

/ have been ruled, etc. 
' sum r sumus 

rectus < es recti -I estis 

-re I est L sunt 

Pluperfect. 



/ had ruledy etc. 


/ had been ruled. 


etc 


rexeram rexeramus 




' eram 


' eramus 


rexeras rexeratis 


rectus 


eras recti 


eratis 


rexerat rexerant 




. erat 


. erant 



Future Perfect. 
/ shall have ruledy etc. / shcUl have been ruled, etc. 



rexero 


rexenmus 




' ero 




enmus 


rexeris 


rexeritis 


rgctus 


eris 


recti ■ 


eritis 


rexerit 


rexerint 




. erit 




. erunt 






Subjunctive. 








Present. 




regam 


regamus 


regar 


regemur 


regas 


regatis 


regaris or -re 


regamini 


regat 


regant 


regatur 




reganti 


ir 



TABLES OF CONJUGATION 



IS5 







iMPERFECr. 








regerem 


regeremus 


regerer 


regeremur 


regeres 


regeretis 


regereris or -re 


regeremini 


regeret 


regerent 


regeretur 
Perfect. 


regerentur 


rexerim 


rexerimus 




' sim 




' simus 


rexeris 


rexeritis 


rectus 


SIS 


recti 


sitis 


rexerit 


rexerint 




.sit 




. sint 






Pluperfect. 




rexissem 


rexiss^mus 




' essem 


' essemus 


rexisse^ 


rexissetis 


rectus < 


esses 


recti essetis 


rexisset 


rexissent 




. esset 




, essent 



rege, rule thou. 
regite, rule ye. 

regitOy thou shall rule. 
regitOy he shall rule, 
regitote, ye shall rule. 
reguntOy they shall rule. 



ImperatTve. 
Present. 

regere, be thou ruled. 
regimini, be ye ruled. 

Future. 

regitor, thou shalt be ruled. 
regitor, he shall be ruled. 



PRES. regere, to rule. 



reguntor, they shall be ruled. 

Infinitive. 

regi, to be ruled. 
Perf. rexisse^ to have ruled. rectus esse, to have been ruled. 
FuT. recturus esse, to be rectum iriy to be about to be 
about to rule. ruled. 

Participles. 

pRES. regensy -entis, ruling. Pres. 

Fut. recturus, -a, -urn, about Ger. regendus, -a, -um, to be 

to rule ruled. 

Perf. — Perf. rectus, -a, -um, ruledy 

having been ruled. 



156 



THE BEGINNER'S CyESAR 



Gerund. 

N. 

G. regendi, of ruling, 

D. regendd, for ruling. 

A. regendum, ruling, 

A. regendd, by ruling. 



Supine. 



A. rectum, to rule, 

A. rectu, to rule^ to be ruled. 



Third Conjugation.— Verbs in -io. 

capiS, take. 
Principal Parts: capiS, capere, cSpI, oaptos. 

Indicative Mood. 



capio 

capis 

' capit 



Active. 

I take^ etc. 

capimus 

capitis 

capiunt 



Passive, 



Present. 



/ am taken, etc. 
capior capimur 

caperis or -re capimini 

capitur capiuntur 

Imperfect. 

/ was taken, etc 

capiebar capiebamur 

capiebaris or -re capiebamim 

capiebatur capiebantur 

Future. 

/ shall be taken, etc. 
capiar capiemur 

capieris or -re capiemini 
capietur capientur 

Perfect. 

captus sum, es, est, etc. 

Pluperfect. 
ceperam, ceperas, ceperat, etc. captus eram, eras, erat, etc. 

Future Perfect. 
ceper5, ceperis, ceperit, etc. captus ero, eris, erit, etc. 



/ was taking, etc. 
capiebam capiebamus 
capieb^ capiebatis 

capiebat capiebant 

/ shall take, etc. 
capiam capiemus 

capies capietis 

capiet capient 

cepi, cepistT, cepit, etc. 



TABLES OF CONJUGATION 157 

Subjunctive. 
Present. 
capiam, capilLs, capiat^ etc. capiar, -iaris or^x^ -iatur, etc 

Imperfect. 
caperem, caperSs, caperet, etc. caperer, -ereris or -re, -eretur, etc. 

Perfect. 
ceperimy ceperis^ ceperit, etc captus sim, sis, sit, etc. 

Pluperfect. 
cSpissem, cepiss€Sy cSpisset, etc captus essem, esses, esset, etc 

Imperative. 

PRES. cape, take thou. capere, be thou taken, 

capite, take ye, capimini, be ye taken, 

FuT. capit5, thou shalt take^ capitor, thou shalt be taken^ 
etc. etc. 

Infinitive. 

Pres. capere, to take, capl, to be taken, 

Perf. cepisse, to have taken, captus esse, to have been taken. 

FuT. capturus esse, to be captum iri, to be about to be 
about to take* taken. 

Participles. 
Pres. capiens, -ientis, taking, Pres. 



FuT. capturus, about to take. Ger. capiendus, to be taken, 

Perf. ^'E.KF,cacgtxi&jha7nng been taken. 

Gerund. Supine. 

G. capiendl, of takings A. captum, to take, 

etc A. captu, to takey to be taken. 



158 



THE BEGINNER'S CjESAR 



Fourth Oonjugration. — I-Verbs. 

audio, hear. 

Principal Parts: audiS, audire, audlvi, audltua. 







Indicative. 




Active, 


Passive, 
Present. 


I hear y etc 


/ am heard, etc 


audid 


audlmus 


audior audlmur 


audis 


audltis 


audlris or -re audlmini 


audit 


audiunt 


audltur audiuntur 
Imperfect. 


Iwast 


hearings etc. 


/was heard, etc 



audiebam audiebamus 
audiebas audiebatis 
audiebat audiebant 



audiebar audiebamur 

audiebaris or-r^ audiebamini 
audiebatur audiebantur 



Future. 



/ shall heary etc 




/ shall be heardy etc 


• 


audiam audiemus 




audiar audiemur 


audies audietis 




audieris or -re audiemini 


audiet audient 




audietur audientur 




Perfect. 


/ have heard, etc. 




I have been heard, etc 


audlvi audivimiis 






' sum r sumus 


audivistr audivistis 




auditus 


es audit! - 


estis 


audlvit audiverunt or 


-re 




est 


sunt 



TABLES OF CONJUGATION 



159 



Pluperfect. 

/ had heard^ etc. / had been heard^ etc. 

audiveram audiveramus 
audiveras audiveratis 
audiverat audiverant 



audltus 



eram 




r eratnus 


eras 


audit! • 


eratis 


. erat 




. erant 



Future Perfect. 
/ shall have heard, etc. / shall have been heard, etc. 



audivero 


audivenmus 




' ero 




r erimus 


audiveris 


audlveritis 


audltus ^ 


eris 


audit! ' 


eritis 


audiverit 


audiverint 




. erit 




.erunt 






Subjunctive. 








Present. 




audiam 


audiamus 


audiar 


audiamur 


audias 


audiatis 


audiaris or -re 


audiamin! 


audiat 


audiant 


audiatur 
Imperfect. 


audiantur 


audlrem 


audiremus 


audlrer 


audiremur 


audires 


audlretis 


audlreris or -re 


audlremin! 


audiret 


audlrent 


audiretur 
Perfect. 


audlrentur 


audiverim 


audiverimus 




rsim 




^ simus 


audiveris 


audlveritis 


auditus ■ 


sis 


audit! 


sitis 


audiverit 


audiverint 




I sit 




. sint 






Pluperfect. 




audlvissem 


audivissimus 


{ 


^ essem 




r essemus 


audivisses 


audivissetis 


audltus • 


esses 


audit! < 


essetis 


audlvisset 


audivissent 




esset 




, essent 



i6o 



THE BEGINNER'S Cj^SAR 



Imperative. 



Present. 



audi, hear thou. 
audite, hear ye. 



audire, be thou heard. 
audiminiy be ye heard. 



Future. 



auditd, thou shaft hear. 
audito, he shall hear* 
auditote, ye shall hear. 
audiunto, they shall hear. 



auditor, thou shaU be heard. 
auditor, he shall be heard. 



audiuntor, they shall be heard. 



Infinitive. 



Pres. audire, to hear. 
Perf. audlvisse, to have heard. 
Fut. auditurus esse, to be 
about to hear. 



audiri, to be heard. 
audltus esse, to have been heard 
audltum iri, to be about to be 
heard. 



Participles. 



Pres. audiens,-entis,^^/ir/»^. 
Fut. auditurus, -a, -um, about 

to hear. 
Perf. 



Gerund. 



N. 

G. audiendi, of hearing. 

D . audiendo, for hearing. 

A. audiendum, hearing, 

A. audiendo, by hearing. 



Pres. 

Ger. audiendus, -a, -um, to 

be heard, 
Perf. audltus, -a, -um, heardy 

having been heard. 

Supine. 



A. audltum, to hear. 
A. auditu, to hear^ to be 
heard. 



TABLES OF CONJUGA TION 



l6l 



IBBEQULAR VERBS. 
BTim, be. 

Principal Parts: siim, esse, fnl, fnttlrtui. 

Indicative. 
Present. 



SINGULAR. 

sum, I am, 

es, thou art, 

esty he (she, it) is. 

eram, / was. 
eras, thou wast, 
erat, he was, 

ero, /shall be, 
eris, thou wilt be, 
erit, he will be, 

fiiT, I have been^ was, 
fuisti, thou hast been, wast, 
fuit, he has been, was. 



fiieram, I had been, 
fiieras, thou hadst been, 
fiierat, he had been. 



PLURAU 

sumus, we are, 
estis, you are, 
sunt, they are. 

Imperfect. 

eramus, we were, 
eratis, you were, 
erant, they were. 

Future. 

erimus, we shall be, 
eritis, you will be, 
erunt, they wiU be. 

Perfect.- 

fiiimus, we have been, were, 
fuistis, you have been, were, 

J fuerunt or 

\ fiiere, they have been, were. 

Pluperfect. 

fueramus, we had been, 
fueratis, you had been. 



fiierant, they had been. 

Future Perfect. 
fuero, / shall have been, fuerimus, we shall have been, 

fiieris, thou wilt have been, fueritis, you will have been, 

fiierit, he will have been, fuerint, they will have been. 



1 62 



THK BEGINNER'S CMSAR 



Present, 
singular. plurau 

sim slmus 



Subjunctive. 

Imperfect, 
singular. plural. 

essem essemus 



SIS 


sitis 


esses 


essetis 


sit 


sint 


esset 


essent 


fuerim 


PERKECr. 

fiierimus 


Pluperfect. 
fiiissem fuissemus 


fiieris 


fueritis 


fuisses 


fuissetis 


fucrit 


fuerint 


fiiisset 
Imperative. 


fuissent 


SINGULAR. 

esy be thou. 


Present. 

PLURAU 

este, be ye. 


estOy thou shalt be. 


Future. 

estote, 


ye shall be. 


estd, he shall be. 


sunto, 


they shall be. 




Infinitive. 




Participle. 



Pres. esse, to 
Perf. fuisse, to have been. 
Fut. futurus esse, to be about 
to be. 



futurus, -a, -urn, about to be. 



possum, posse, potul. 

Indicative. 

SINGULAR. PLURAL. 



'y be able^ can. 
Subjunctive. 



Pres. possum 
potes 
potest 
Imp. poteram 
FuT. poterd 
Perf. potul 
Plup. potueram 
F. P. potuero 



possumus 

potestis 

possunt 

poteramus 

poteriraus 

potuimus 

potueramus 

potuerimus 



singular. 
possim 

possTs 

possit 

possem 

potuerim 
potuissem 



PLURAL. 

possimus 
possitis 
possint 
possemus 

potuerimus 
potuissemus 



Infinitive. 
Pres. posse Perf. potuisse 



TABLES OF CONJUGATION 



163 



pr5Bumy prGdessa, prGfuI, prGfutilmB, benefit. 
Indicative. 

SINGULAR. 

PRES. pr5sum 

prddes 

prodest 
Imp. prdderam 
FuT. prodero 
Perf. profui 
Plup. prdfiieram 
F. P. prdfiierd profuerimus 

Imperative. 
pRES. prddes, prodeste Fut. prodesto, prodest5te 

Infinitive. 
pRES. prodesse Perf. profiiisse Fut. profuturus esse 

Participle. 
Fut. profuturus, -a, -um 



VE. 


Subjunctive. 


PLURAL. 


singular. 


PLURAU 


prosumus 


prdsim 


prosimus 


prddestb 


pr5sls 


prositis 


prdsunt 


prosit 


prosint 


prdderamus 


prodessem 


prodessemus 


proderimus 






profuimus 


profuerim 


prdfiierimus 


profueramus 


profuissem 


prafiiLssemus 



▼ol5, Telle, volnl, - 
nGlG, nGlle, nGluI, - 
mSUG, mSUle, mSluI, 



-, be willing^ wUl, wish. 
•y be unwillingy will not. 
— , be more willing^ prefer* 







Indicative. 




Pres. 


V0I6 


nold 


malo 




vis 


non vTs 


mavis 




vult 


ndn vult 


mSLvult 




volumus 


nolumus 


malumus 




vultis 


n5n vultis 


mavultis 




volunt 


nolunt 


mElunt 


Imp. 


volebam 


nolebam 


malebam 


Fut. 


volam, volgs, etc. 


nolam, ndles, etc. 


malam, males, etc. 


Perf. 


volui 


ndlul 


malui 


Plup. 


volueram 


nolueram 


malueram 


F.P. 


voluero 


noluerd 


m&luer5 



1 64 



THE BEGINNER'S CjESAR 







SUBJUNCTIVB. 




Pres. 


velim 


nolim 


mSLlim 




veils 


n5lls 


malls 




veUt 


nolit 


malit 




velTmus 


ndlimns 


malimus 




velitis 


n5litis 


malTtis 




velint 


ndlint 


malint 


Imp. 


vellem 


noUem 


mallem 


Perp. 


voluerim 


noluerim 


maluerim 


Plup. 


voluissem 


n5luissem 
Imperative. 


maluissem 


Pres. 




noli 
nolite 




FUT. 




nolitd, etc. 
Infinitive. 




Pres. 


velle 


nolle 


malle 


Perf. 


voluisse 


noluisse 
Participle. 


maluisse 


Pres. 


volens 


nolens 





e5, Ire, IvI (il), itfLrus, go. 

flo, fieri, factuB sum (supplies passive to faoi5), makty he 
madiy become. 











Indicative. 




Pres. 


eo 




Tmus 


fio 


fimus 




is 




itis 


fis 


ntiR 




it 




eunt 


fit 


fiunt 


Imp. 




ibam 






fiebam 


FUT. 




ibo 






fiam 


Perf. 




11 






(actus sum 


Plup. 




ieram 






foetus eram 


F. P. 




ierd 






factus ero 



TABLES OF CONJUGATION 



I6S 



PRES. earn 


Subjunctive 


9 


fiam 


Imp. irem. 








fierem 


Perf. ierim 








factus sim 


Plup. iissem 








factus essem 




Imperative. 






PRES. I 


ite 




fi 


fite 


FUT. . . 

ito 


itote 
euntd 






__^ ■ 




Infinitive. 






Pres. Ire 








fieri 


Perf. isse 








factus esse 


FuT. iturus esse 






factum in 




Participles. 






Pres. iens^ Gen, euntis 


Pres. 




FuT. iturus, - 


a, -um 


Ger. 


faciendus 


Perf. 




Perf. 


factus 


Gerund. 






Supine. 


N. 










G. eundi 










D. eundd 










A. eundum 






A. 


itum 


A. eundd 






A. 


itu 


fer5, ferre, 1 


bull, IfttUB, 


bear 


, carry ^ endure. 




Indicative. 






Active 


• 






Passive, 


fero 


ferimus 




feroi 


ferimur 


Pres. • fers 


fertis 




ferris or -re ferimim 


fert 


ferunt 




fertur feruntur 


Imp. ferebam 








ferebar 


FuT. feram 








ferar 


Perf. tuli 








latus sum 


Plup. tuleram 








latus eram 


F. P. tulero 








latus erd 



i66 



THE BEGINNER'S CMSAR 



Pres. 
Imp. 
Perf. 
Plup. 



feram 
ferrein 
tulerim 
tulissem 



Subjunctive. 



Imperative. 



Active, 



Pres. fer 

_ / ferto 

FuT. \ - . 

[ferto 



ferte 

fertote 

ferunto 



ferar 
ferrer 
latus sim 
latus essem 

Passive. 

[ferre] ferimini 

fertor 

fertor feruntor 



Infinitive. 



Pres. 
Perf. 

FUT. 



ferre 
tulisse 
laturus esse 



ferri 

latus esse 
latum in 



Pres. ferens 

FuT. laturus 

Perf. 

Gerund. 

G. ferendi 

D. ferendd 

A. ferendum 

A. ferendd 



Participles. 

Pres. 

Ger. 

Perf. 



ferendus 
latus 



Supine. 



A. latum 
A. latu 



VOCABULARY 



..^-A. 



. against f near ; (with nmnerals) 

adv., about, 
A.y see Aului. - addiicS, -ducere, -duxi, -ductum, 

dy ab, prep, with abl., from^ by, ^■"" 'lead or bring to, influence. 



on the side of, 
abdSy -dere, -didi, -ditum, put 

away, withdraw, hide, 
abduo5, -ducere, -duzi, -ductum, 

lead away. 
abstineS, -tinere, -tinui, -tentum, 

holdfroniy keep from. 
absum, -esse, -afui, be away or 

distant. 

ac, see atque (fio is used only be- 
fore consonants). 

acced5| -cedere, -cessi, -cessum, 
go to, approach, be added, 

accidOi -cidere, -cidi, fall to or 
upon, befaJl, happen, 

accipiSy -cipere, -cepi, -ceptum 
[capio], take to, receive, ac- 
cept. 

accurr5| -currere, -curri, -cursum, 
run or hasten to. 

accosd ( I ) [causa] , call to account, 
reprimand, accuse. 

acies, -ei, f ., battle-line, 

acriter, adv., sharply, fiercely. 

ad, prep, with ace, to, toward. 



adgredior, see^iggredior. 

adhibed, -ere, -ui, -itum, bring in, 
summon, 

admiror (i), wonder at, cuimire, 

admittSy -mittere, -misi, -missum, 
[ad + mitto] (3), let go ; admit, 
receive ; become guilty of com- 
mit. equO admissO, with his 
horse at full speed (i. 22). 

adorior, -orirl, -ortus sum, rise 
againsti -attack. 
TkdsciscS, -sciscere^-scivi, -scitum, 
■ take to, receive, culop>i^\^^ 

adsom, -ISsse, -fui, be at hand or 
near, be present, assist. 

adyentiis, -us, m. [venio],tfrm'a/, 
approach, 

adyersuSy' -a, -um (perf. pass, 
part, of adverto), turned to, 
opposite, unfavorable, unsuc- 
cessful, 

adverts, -tere, -ti, -sum [ad + 
verto] (3), turn to^ direct, turn, 
animnm advertO, perceive, no- 
tice, observe. 



167 



i68 



\ 



THE BEGINNER'S CJESAR 



aedificinm, -i, n., a building. 

Aeduus, 'i, m., an ^duan, 

aegerrime, adv. (sup. of aegre), 
Vfith the greatest difficulty. 

aequ5 (i), make even or equal. 

afflciS, -ficere, -feci, -fectum [ad 
-f- facio] (3), do something to^ 
treaty use; visit with, afflict, 
trouble, weaken, impair. mfifln^O 
dolOre affiol, to be greatly an- 
noyed (i. 2). BnpplioiO affioere, 
to punish (i. 27). 

affinitas, -atis, f., alliance by 
marriage, kinship, 

ager, agri, m., land under culti- 
vation, ^^/</, territory, domain; 
pi., lands, territory, country, 
the country. 

aggredior, -gredi, -gressus sum 
[ad + gradior, step^go to, ap- 
proach, attack. 

agmen, -minis [ago], Xi.,army on 
the march, marching column ; 
line of march, agmen clan- 
dere, to bring up the rear. 
noyissimnm agmen, the rear. 
prlmum agmen, the van. 

agO| agere, egi, actum, put in 
motion, drive, discuss. 

alieniiSy -a, -um [alius], another* s, 
foreign, unfavorable. 

aliqui (-quis), -qua, -quod (-quid), 
some, any. 

alius, -a, -ud, another, other (of 
more than two). 

Allobroges, -um (ace. Allobrogas, 
i. 14), m., pi., a Gallic people 



in the northeastern part of 
"the Province," between the 
Rhone and the Alps. i. 6, 10, 
II, 14, 28. 

aid, alere, alul, alitum (altum), 
nourish, sustain, 

Alpes, -ium, f ., the Alps. 

alter, -era, -erum, one (of two), 
the other, second, 

altitudS^ -u^f ^* [altus], height, 
depth, 

altus, '% -um, hi^, deep. 

Ambaixiy -5rum [Kel. ambi, =< 
Lat. ambi- + Arar], m. pi., a 
people on both sides of the 
Arar (Sa5ne) near its junction 
with the Rhone; intimately 
connected with the iEdui. 
i. II, 14. 

amicitia, -ae, f . [amicus] ,^>»</- 
ship. 

amicus, -a, -um, friendly ; (as 
subst.) xn,, friend. 

amittd, -mittere, -misT, -missum, 
send away, let go, lose. 

amor, -oris, m. [am5], Iwe, de- 
sire. 

amplus, -a» -um, large or full, 
ample, 

anceps, -cipitis [amb5, both + 
caput, head^ two-headed^ two- 
fold, doubtful, 

angustiae, -arum, f. [ango, 
squeeze^, narrowness, a narrow 
pass or defUe. 

angustus, -a, -um [ang5], nar- 
row. 



VOCABULARY 



169 



animadyertSf >rvertere, -verti, 
-versum, attena^ punish. 

animiis, -1, m., sauiy mind^ feel- 
ingi spirit^ courage, 

annus, -I, m., a year, 

annunSy -a, -um, for a year^ an- 
nuaL 

ante, adv. or prep, with ace, 
before, 

antea, sAv,,, formerly, 

antiquus, -a, -um [ante], ancient ^ 
former, 

aperiOy -Ire, •111, •turn, uncover^ 
open, disclose, 

appellO (i), call. 

Apnlis, -e, of April j April, 

apad| prep, with ace, among, 
near, with. 

Aqaileia, -ae, f., a city at the 
head of the Adriatic Sea. See 
n. to chap. X. i. 10. 

Aquitani, -drum, m., the Aqui- 
tani, Aquitanians. 

Aquitania, -ae, f ., Aquitania, 

Arar, -aris, ace, -im [Kel., =» 
'sluggish'], m., Arar river, 
now the Sadne, It rises in the 
Vosges Mts., and flows south- 
ward into the Rhone, i. 12, 
13, 16. 

arbitror (i), decUe, think. 

arma, ^&rum, n., arms, 

ascendO, ascendere, ascendi, as- 
censum [ad -f* scand5, climb'] , 
climb up, ascend. 

ascensus, -us, m., a climbing up, 
ascent. 



atque, ac [ad + que], conj. : 

1. CG^x^a^^\&, and, and also, 
and even, and in particular. 

2, Comparative, after words 
of likeness or unlikeness, as, 
than. 

attingo, -tingere, -tigi, -tactum 
[ad + tang5, touch], touch or 
border upon, lie near to, reach. 

auctSritas, -atis, f., influence, 
authority, 

audacia, -ae, f. [audax], bold- 
ness, 

audacter, adv., boldly, 

audeo, audere, ausus sum, dare. 

ailge5, augere, auxi, auctum, in^ 
crecue. 

Aulus (abbr. A.), Aulus, a Ro- 
man name. 

ant, conj., aut . . . aut, either . . . 
or, 

autem, conj., on the other hand, 
but, moreover, 

auxilium, -1, n. [auge5], help, 
aid ; (in pi.) auxiliaries, 

averts, -vertere, -verti, -versum, 
turn off ox away, 

aynSy -1, m., grandfather, 

B 

Belgae, -arum, m., the Belga, 
Belgians, a powerful people of 
Northeastern Gaul. 

bells (i), make or wage war, fight. 

bellicSsus, -a, '\xm,fond of war, 
warlike. 



I/O 



THE BEGINNER'S CMSAR 



benefidwil, -I» n., kindness^ bene- 
fit^ favor, 

Bibracte, -is, n., Bibracte, 

biduum, -i, n., two days, 

bienninm, '\;ti,\9Xin\ys\^two years, 

bipartitS, adv. [pars], in two di- 
visions, « 

Bitnriges, -um [Kel., r=. * World- 
kings/ or 'Ever kings*], m. 
pi., a people in Central Gaul, 
across the liger (Loire) from 
the iEdui. 

BOii (or B5ji), -drum, m., pi, a 
Keltic people widely diffused 
over Central Europe, whose 
name survives in Bohemia ; 
32,000 joined the Helvetii in 
their migration, the remnant 
surviving being settled with 
the iEduL 

bonit&s, -tatis [bonus], i,^ good- 
ness^ excellence; of land, ySrr- 
Hliiy (L 28). 

bonus, -a, -um, comp. melior, sup. 
optimus, adj., good, advanta- 
geous ; pleasant, well-disposed, 
friendly, bonO animO esse, to 
be favorably disposed, (L 6.) 

bracchiom, -1, n., the forearm. 



C. (abbr. for Gains), Caius or 
Gains, a Roman name. 

cad5, cadere, cecidi, casum,y^//. 

Caesar, Caesaris, m., full name 
Gaius lulius Caesar. 



calamitas, -atis, f., disaster, de- 
feat, 

caplG, capere, cepi, captum, take, 
seize, 

caput, capitis, n., head, 

cairns, i, m., cart. 

-Cassianns, -a, -um, Cassian, of 
Cassius, 

Cassins, -I, m., Lucius Cassius 
Longinus, 'praetor B. c. 1 1 1 ; 
when consul, 107 b. c, he en- 
gaged in battle with the Tigu- 
rini in the territory of the 
Allobroges, and was defeated 
and slain. L 7, 12. 

castellum, -1, n. [diminutive of 
castrum] , a small fort, fortress, 
redoubt, 

Casticns, -1, m., Casticus. 

castra, -orum, n. [castrum,^^/], 
a fortified camp ^ camp, 

casns, -us [cado], a falling, fall, 
ctccidetU, calamity, chance. 

Catamantaloedis, -is [Kel., » 
*Man of Even Temper*], m., 
foremost man of the Sequani 
before Caesar's time. L 3. 

CatnrigSs, -um [Kel., = * Battle- 
Kings *], m. pi., a Gallic peo- 
ple in the eastern part of the 
Province. L 10. 

causa, -ae, f ., cause, reason, 

caye5, cavere, cavi, cautum, take 
precautions, 

celeriter (comp. celerius, sup. ce- 
lerrime), adv., quickly, 

Celtae, -arum [Kel.], m., pl.« 



VOCABULARY 



171 




/ 



CeltSj inhabitants of that part 
of Gaul between the Garonne 
and the Seine, extending from 
the Atlantic to the Alps. They 
belonged to the great Keltic 
family, and were divided into 
many states or tribes, i. i. 

census, -us, m., enumeration, 

centnm, indecL num., one hun- 
dred, 

certns, -a, -um, sure, certain, 
aliquem oertiOrem facere, to 
inform some one, 

Centrdnes^ -um, m., the Ceu- 
trones. -^ 

cibarins, -a, -um, pertaining to 
food ; (as subst.) cibaria, -orum, 
n., food, provisions. 

circiter, adv., about, 

circnitus, -us, m. [circum + eo], 
a going round, circuit. 

circum, prep, with ace, around, 
about. 

circumyeniS, -venire, -veni, -ven- 
tum, surround. 

dterior, -oris, comp. adj. (no po- 
sitive), nearer, hither. 

citra, adv. and prep, with ace, 
this side, within. 

ayitas, -atis, f ., citizenship, state, 
citizens. 

claudo, claudere, clausi, clausum, 
shut, close, 

cUens, -entis, m. f., client, depen- 
dent,^ 

COemS, -emere, -emi, -emptum, 
pyrc^se. 



coepi, coepisse, defect, verb, be- 
gan. 

coerceo, -ere, -ui, -itum, control. 

c5gn58c5, -gnoscere, -gnovl, -gni- 
tum, learn thoroughly; (in 
perf .) have learned, know. 

c5gd, cogere, coegi, coactum, 
drive together', ^oflecpfcompel, 

COhortor (l), urge earnestly, ex- 
hort, encourage. 

COlligS (i), bind together. 

CoUis, -is, m., hill, 

COllOCd (i), place together, station, 
ntLptum colloofire, /<? give in 
marriage. 

COUoquor, -loqui, -locutus sum, 
speak together, converse, 

comburS, -burere, -bussi, -bustum, 
burn up, consume. 

comnlbmord (i), recount, state, 
mention. 

comineS (i), resort to or znsit 
(frequently). 

committo, -mittere, -misi, -mis- 
sum, send together, commit, 
combine, join. 

commode, adv., conveniently, 

commonefaciS, -f acere, -feci, -fac- 
tum, remind forcibly, 

commoyeS, -movere, -movi, -mo- 
tum, move deeply, disturb, ex- 
cite, 

communis (s^, fortify completely, 
intrench, [change. 

COmmiititiS, -oms, f ., a changing, 

COmmutS (i), change entirely, re- 
verse. 



172 



THE BEGINNER'S CAESAR 



OOmparS (i), prepare^ furnish^ 

equip, 
comperiS, -penre, -peri, -pertum, 

ascertain, 
complector, -plecti, -plexus sum, 

embrace. 
compleG, -plere, -plSvi, -pletum, 

filly fill upy complete. 
complttres, -a (-ia), several^ many. 
comports, bring or carry together. 
cdnatnm, -i, n., or conatus, -us, 

m., triali attempt. 



cdnficidj^^ere, -feci, -fectum, do 
^^.Jktfroughly^ complete^ accom- 
plish. 
i c5nfidO| -f idere, -fisus sum, trust 
iny rely on, 
cSnfumS (i), make firm, estdb- 

J^hy assure, pfotAise, 
cg jficiS. -icere, -iecl, -iectum, 

throw together, conjecture. 
COniuiatiO, -onis, f. [iur5, swear], 
a swearing together, conspir- 
aty. 



conceddy -cedere, cessi, -cessurus, ^cdnor (i), try, attempt^ 

[com- + cedo] (3), Tvithdraw,/ com^iai^j -qtiirere, -quisivi, -qui- 



depart ; give up, yield, bow, 
submit; allow, grant ; grant 
permission, permit. 

concido, -cidere, -cidl, -cisum, 
cut down, slay. 

concilid (i), call together, win 
over, conciliate. 

conciliunii -i, n., assembly, coun- 
— cil. ^ 

concursus, -us, m., running to- 
gether, onset. 

COndiciS) -onis, f., a speaking to- 
gether, agreement, terms. 

ConddnOi -are, -avi, -atum [com- 
+ don 6] (i), give up, forgive, 
overlook, excuse, pardon, i. 20, 

CondQcOi -ducere, -duxi, -ductum, 
lead or bring together, hire. 

c5nfer5, conferre, contuli, colla- 
tum, bring together, collect, 
compare: b6 oOnferr6, to re- 
treat. 

cSnfertns, -a, -um, crowded. 






situm, search out. 

cSnsangiiineiis/ -a, -um, related 
by blood ; (as subst.) m., kins- 
man. 

cSnsciscd, -scTscere, -scivi, -sci- 
tum, decree, appoint, 

CdnscinSy -a, -um [scio], knowing, 
conscious. 

c5n8cnb5, -scrTbere, -scrips!, 
-scriptum, write together, en- 
roll, levy. 

cdnseqnor, -sequi, -secutus sum, 
follow up, pursue, obtain. 

CGnsidins, -1. m., Coftsidius. 

c5nsid5y -sidere, -sedi, -sessum, 
settle, encamp. 

cSnsiliumy -1, n., counsel, plan. 

cdnsistd, -sistere, -stiti, -stitum, 
take a stand, stand still, stop. 

cdnsolor (i), console, comfort, sol- 
ace. 

cdnspectus, -us, m. [conspido], 
a looking at, sight. 



VOCABULARY 



173 



conspiciS, -spicere, -spexi, -spec- 
turn, see ^ perceive » 
conspicor {\\ perceive, 

CnstituO) -stituere, -stitui, -sti- 
tutuin^[statu5, sei^^ set together j 
arrange <t. determine^. 

consuescd, -suescere, -suevi, -sue- 
tum, accustom^ habituate ; (in 
perf.) to have become (= be) 
accustomed,, be wont. 

Cdnsiil, -ulis, m., consul^ one of 
the chief magistrates at Rome, 
,of whom there were two, 
chosen annually. 

consum5| -sumere, -sumpsi, 
-sumptum, destroy^ consume, 

contendo, -tendere, -tendi, -ten- 
turn^ [tendo, stretchit stretch 
tighty strive ^ fight y hasten, 

continenter [continefts], adv., 
constqfttly^ incessantly , without 
interruption^ continually. 

contineS, -tlnere, -tinui, -tentum 
[com- + teneo] (2), hold to- 
gether ; hold;! hold backy'keePy 
retain^' detai^^ skut in; of 
places and ' regions, hem in, 
bound, border. 

contra, prep, with ace, and adv., 
opposite y against. \,^*ty' 

contumelia, -ae, f ., affront, indig- 

conyenlG, -venire, -veni, -ventum, 
come together, fneet, assemble ; 
oonvenit (impers.), it is fitting, 
it is agreed. 

COnyentttS, -us, m., assembly, 
meeting. 




conyerto, -vertere, -vertl, -versum, 
turn.^Bl^iiB, oonyertere, change 
front, wheel about. 

conyoco (i), call together, sum- 
mon, assemble. 

copia, -ae, f., plenty; (in pi.) 
forces, troops. 

c5pi58tt8, -a, -um, well supplied, 
plentiful, abounding. 

cotidianns (quo-), -a, -um, daily, 
usual, 

COtidiig (quo-), adv., daily. 

Crassus, -1, m. : 

1. Marcus Licinius Crassus, 
consul in B.C. 70, member of 
the triumvirate with Caesar and 
Pompey ; consul again in 55 ; 
perished in the disastrous Par- 
thian expedition, B.C. 53. i. 21. 

2. Publius Licinius Crassus, 
younger son of the triumvir* 
lieutenant of Caesar in Gaul, 
B.C. 58-56, where he distin- 
guished himself; he returned 
to Rome in 55, followed his 
father to the East and fell in 
the same battle. 

cremo, -are, -avi, -atum (i), burn. 

Ignl oremSre, to consume by fire, 

burn to death (i. 4). 
cre5) -are, -avi, -atum (i), create, 

make ; choose, elect, appoint. 
crescS) crescere, crevi, cretum (3), 

inch., grow, increase ; become 

great, become powerful (i. 20) ; 

of a river, becotne swollen. 
caltns, -us [colo], m., cultivatioH» 



174 



THE BEGINNER'S C^SAR 



care; modi of life, civiliza' 

ttOH, 

com, prep, with ablative only, 
with; of association, withy 
along with J in the company of 
together with ; of comparison, 
withy as over against^ compared 
with ; of manner and circum- 
stance, withy under y amidy at; 
of time, together withy at the 
same time with. With the 
personal pronouns and with 
qui, cum is enclitic; as, mS- 
oum, nOblioum, quibusoum. 

com (qnnm), conj., when, sincey 
although. 

cnpide, adv., eagerly. 

cnpiditaSy -atis, f ., eager desirey 
longingy cupidity, 

capidnSy -a, -um, desirous ofy 
eager for. 

cnpiS, -ere, -ivi (ii), -Itum, desire, 
favor. 

CUr5 (i)y care for; (with object 
and gerundive), have. 

cnstSSy -odis, m., f., guard, senti- 
nel. 



damnd (i), condemn, 

dSy prep, with abl., down from, 

fromyfory concerning. 
dSbedydebere, debui,debitum [de 

+ habeo] (2), owe ; pass., be 

due ; foUowed by infin., oughty 

must, should. 
decern, indecl. num., ten. 



decipio, -cipere, -cepi, -ceptum, 
entropy deceive. " 

decuriOy -onis, m. (the leader of 
a squad of ten cavalry), a de- 
curion. 

dediticius, -i [deditus, from de- 
do], aid]., that has surrenderedy 
subject. As subst., dSdlticil, 
-orum, m, ^y prisoners of wary 
captives. 

deditiS, -onis [dedo] f., surren- 
der, aooipere or recipere in 
dSditiOnemi to receive by capit- 
ulation, in dSditiOn^m yenfre, 
to surrender, 

defends, -fendere, -fendi, -fen- 
sum, keep or ward offy defend. 

defessuSy -a, -um (perf . part, of 
def etiscor), weariedy exhausted, 

deiciSy -icere, -ieci, -iectum, throw 
or cast downy dislodge. 

deindeyadv.,/>i^» (of consequence 
or sequence). 

deliberO {i)y ponder y deliberate. 

dSligSy -ligere, -legT^ -Iectum [le- 
go, choose^y pick outy select. 

deminndy -minuere, -minui, -mi- 
nutum [minus], lesseny dimin- 
ish. 

dSmdnstrS ( i ), show plainly yPoint 
out, 

demumy adv., at length. 

deniqney adv., at lengthy lastly. 

deponGy -ponere, -posui,-positum, 
place or lay aside. 

depopnlor (i), ravagCy lay waste, 

deprecfttory -oris, m., mediator. 



VOCABULARY 



175 



> 



designs, -are, -avi, -atum [de + 

signo, tnark'\ (i), mark out, 

paint out^ tnean^ designate, i. 18. 
desistd, -sistere, -stiti, -stitum [de 

+ sisto] (3), stand off from ; 

leave off, cease ^ desist from ^ stop, 

give up, dteistere BententiS, 

to give up the notion, 
desperS (i) [spes, hopel, be hope- 

lessy despair, 
despiciOy -ere, -spexi, -spectum, 

look down on, despise, 
destituOi -stituere, -stitui, -stitu- 

tum [statuo], set aside^ forsake, 

abandon. 
dSstringdy -stringere, -strinxT, 

strictum [stringo, draw], draw 

off^ unsheathe, draw. 
deterreS (2), frighten off, deter, 

discourage. 
deus, -i, m., god. 
dexter, -tera, -tenim, and -tra, 

-tmm, comp. dexterior, sup. 

dextimus, adj., right. 
dextra, -ae [dexter, sc. manus], 

f ., right hand. i. 20. 
died, dicere, dixi, dictum, say, 

tell, speak. 
dictid, -pnis, f ., a speaking, plecui- 

ing. 
dies, die!, m. and f., day ; time 

(i. 7). multO diO, laU in the 

day (i. 22). in dlSs, day by day, 

every day, diem ex diO, day 

after day, (i. 16). 
differGy diiferre, distull, dilatum, 

carry or bear apart, differ, defer. 



difficilifl, -e [dis + facilis], not 
easy, difficult. 

dimitts, -mittere, -misi, -missum, 
send apart, dismiss, 

discedS, -cedere, -cessT, -cessurus 
[dis- + cedo] (3), go apart, 
disperse, scatter ; depart, with- 
draw, leave, go away, go off. 
ab armls dlicMere, to lay down 
one's arms, 

discd, discere, didici, learn. 

disicid (disjicio), -icere, -ieci, -iec- 
tum [dis- + iacio] (3), drive 
asunder ; disperse, scatter, rout 
(i. 25 ; iiL 20). 

disp5n5, -ponere, -posul, -posi- 
tum, place apart, arrange. 

ditissimus, -a, -um (sup. of dives), 
richest. 

diU) 2Av.,for a long time. 

dittturnua, -a, -um [diu], of long 
durcUion, long. 

Kyitiacus, -1, m., an yEduan 
chief. 

Kyic5, -onis, m., a Helvetian 
chief 

diyidSi -videre, -visl, -visum, di- 
vide, separate* 

d5| dare, dedi, datum, give. 

doles (2), suffer pain, grieve. 

dolor, -oris, m., pain, grief. 

dolus^ -T, m., treachery, deceit. 

domus, -us, house, home, domi, 
at home. 

diibitatid, -onis, £., hesitation, 

dttbitd (i), doubt, hesitate, 

dubius, -a, -um, doubtful. 



/ 



176 



THE BEGINNER'S CMSAR 



dncenti, -ae, -a [duo -f centum], 
two hitHdred. 

dttc5, ducere, duxi, ductum, lead^ 
draWf consider, 

dum, conj., while, until. 

Dumnorix, -igis [KeL, = ' Great 
King '], m., an iSduan, brother 
of Divitiacus, and son-in-law 
of Orgetorix ; a bitter enemy of 
Caesar, and apparently leader 
of the iEduan anti-Rofllan 
party, until slain by Caesar's 
orders while trying to escape 
from him, B.C. 54. i- 3) 9» i§s 
19, 20. *^ 

duo, duae, duo, two. 

duodecim [decern], indecl. num., 
twelve. 

duZy ducis [duco], m., f., leader , 
guide. 

B 

e, eZ| prep, with abl., from, out 
of. 

educ5, -ducere, -duxi, -ductum, 
lead forth, draw out. 

efSmind (i), weaken, enervate. 

effeiOi eiferre, extuli, elatum, 
bear away or out, lift up, elate. 

ego (dat. mihi, ace. me), /. 

egredior, -gredi, -gressus sum,^^ 
out, inarch forth. 

ggregius, -a, -um [ex + grex, 
herd, crowd"], adj., eminent, 
marked, distinguished, excel- 
lent. 

emo, emere, emi, emptum, buy. 



emitt5| -mittere, -misi, -missum, 

send forth, discharge. 
enim, conj.,/?^. 

^^imntid (i), tell out, reveal, report. 
e5, ire» ivi (il), itum, go. 
e6, adv., to that place, thither. 
eodem, adv., to the same place. 
equeSi equitis, rider, horseman, 

knight; (in pi.) cavalry. 
equester, -tris, -tre [eques], be- 
longing to a horseman, cavcUry, 

equestrian. ' 

equitatus, -us, m., cavalry, 
equus, -1, m., horse. 
gyjjjp^ , -ripere, -ripui, -reptum 

[rapio], snatch away, rescue. 

■6 Qripere, to escape. 
et, conj., and. et . . . et, both . . . 

and. 
etiam [et' + iam], conj., also; 

evi^. nOn 851am . . . sed etiam, 

not only . . . but also. 
evellOi -vellere, -velli, -vulsum, 

pull or tear out. 
ex, see e. 

ezemplum, -i, n., example. 
ezed| -ire, -ivi (ii), -itum, go out. 
ezercittt8| -us [exerceo, exercise], 

an exercised, trained body ; an 

army. . 
ezistimatio, -onis, f., opinion. 
ezistimo (i), reckon, think. 
ezpedio, -pedire, -pedivi, -peditum 

[ex + pes] (4), disengage, set 

free ; get ready, make ready. 
ezpeditus, -a, -um, comp. -ior, 

sup. -issimus [part, of expe- 



VOCABULARY 



177 



dio],adj., unincumbered, light- 
armed ; ready y easy. lefiriOnSs 
expedltftei legions without bag- 
gage, ^s subst., expedltuS) -I, 
m., light-armed soldier, ^ 

ezpelld, -pejlere, -pull, -pulsum 
[ex -|- pello] (3), drive out, 
drive away, remove, expel. 

ezpl5rator, -5ris, m. [explore, in- 
vestigate'], scout, spy. 

ezpugnS (i), take by storm, over- 
power. ^ 

ezsequor^ -sequi, -secutus sum, 
folloT^ out or up, enforce. 

ezspecto (j), look out, await, ex^ 
pect. 

extra, adv. and prep, with ace., 
without, beyond, 

extremns, -a, -um (sup. from ex- 
ter), outermost, furthest, ex- 
treme. 

exard, -urere, -ussi, -ustum, burn 



up. 



F 



facile, used as adv., easily, 

facilis, -e, easy, 

£aci5, f acere; feci, factum, make, 
do.* ^ - • 

£acult&8, -atis, f. [facio], means 
or opportunity of doing, oppor- 
tunity, means. 

famSs, -is, f., hunger, want. 

familia, -ae, f., slaves of a house- 
hold, household, retinue. 

familiaris, -e [familia], belonging 
to the household, private-, (as 



subst.)/rr>»^. r6s fiEunilifirii, 

private property. 

fayed, f avere, favi, f autum,y&v£v. 

fere, adv., almost. 

f erS, f erre, tuli, latum, bear, carry, 
bring, inflict. - ' 

ferrum, -1, n., iron. 

fides, -el, f., confidence, faith, as- 

*^ surance of good faith, protection. 

filia, -ae, f., daughter. 

filius, -1, m., son. 

finis, -is, m., end, limit, boundary ; 
(in pi.) territory, confines. 

finitimus, -al, -um [finis], border- 
ing upon, adjoining, neighbor- 
ing ; (as subst.) neighbors. 

fi5, fieri, factus sum, be made or 
. done, happen (used as pass, of 
faci5). 

firmus, -a, -um, strong, firm. 

flagitd (i)t demand. 

fled, flere, flevT, fletum, weep. 

flumen, - inis, n. [^vlo\, a fiowing 
stream, river. 

flu5, fluere, fltixi, fixLXMm., flow. 

fortis, -e, strong, brave, 

fortiter, adv., bravely. 

fortitfidS, -inis, f. \iort\!&\,bravery. 

fortuna, -ae, f., chance, fortune. 

fossa, -ae, f. [fodio, dig], ditch, 
trench. 

frater, fratris, m., brother. 

fraternus, -a, -um, pertaining to 
a brother, brotherly, fraternal. 

frigna, frigoris, n., cold, cold 
weather ; pi., seasons of cold, 
cold spells. 



178 



THE BEGINNER'S CyESAR 



Mctns, -us, m., crops, fruit, 
tr&ment&rins, -a, -um [frumen- 

tam], abounding in grain, 

fruitful, 
fr&mentum, -i, n., grain. 
fuga, -ae, f. [iM^b^JUe], flight, 
fugitlTUSi -i, m., runaway slave. 



Gabinius, -i, xpf., a Roman name. 

Gallia, -ae, f ., Gaul, 

Gallicua, %, 'um, Gallic. 

Gallns, -1, m., a Gaul. 

Garnmna, -ae, m., the Garonne 
(a river of Gaul). 

Genayai -ae, f., Geneva. 

Germaniy -5rum, m., the Ger- 
mans, 

ger5y gerere, gessi, gestum, carry 
on^ wage, do. 

gladius, -!, m., sword. 

gl5ria, -ae, f., glory. 

glGrior (i), glory, boast, 

GraecttSy -a, -um, Greek, Grecian. 

Graiocell| -onim, m., the Graio- 
celi. 

gratia, -ae, l„ favor, popularity. 

grayiter, adv. [gravis], heavily, 
severely, graviter ferre, be an- 
noyed or vexed. 



habeO (2), have, hold. 
Helvetia, -ae, f., Helvetia (now 
Switzerland). 



Hely€tlu8, -a, -um, adj., of the 
Helvetii, Helvetian, elyitSB 
EelyOtia, the State of the Hel- 
vetii, Helvetian State, divided 
into four cantons, the names 
of two of which, pSirns Tigu- 
rlnuB, pSguB VerbigenuB, are 
known (i. 12). As subst, Hel- 
yStil, -orum, m. pi., the Helve- 
tians, Helvetii (i. 1-29, 30, 31, 
40). 

hibema, -orvim, n., winter quar- 
ters, 

bio, haec, hoc, this. 

hiemG {l), [hienis, winter], pass 
the winter, 

Hispania, -ae, f., Spain. 

hom5, -inis, m. f ., a human being, 
man. 

honor, -oris, m., honor, distinc- 
tion, office, 

h5ra, -ae, f ., hour, 

hortor (i), arouse, urge. 

hostis, -is, m. f., stranger, (public) 
enemy ; (in pi.) the enemy, 

hiimaiiit&8, -atis, f., refinement. 

I {vowel) 

ibi, adv., in that place, there. 

ictus, -us, m., stroke, blow. 

idem, eadem, idem, the same. 

Idns, -uum, f. pi., the Ides, the 
fifteenth day of March, May, 
July, and October; the thir- 
teenth day of other months. 

i.7. 



VOCABULARY 



179 



ignis, -is, m.^ftre. 

igndro (i), [in, neg. -|- gnarus, 
knowingly not JknoWy be igno- 
rant. 

ille, ilia, illud, that (used of what 
is remote). 

illic [ille], adv., there. 

immortalis, -e, immortal. 

impedimentttm, -1, n., impedi- 
ment ^ hindrance; (in pi.) 
heavy baggage^ baggage-train. 

ImpediQ (4), obstruct^ hamper. 

impended, -ere [pendeo, hang], 
P overhang f impend. 

imperium, -1, n., a command, 
right of command^ ntpr/me 
power, 

imperG (i), command, enjoin, 
make requisition for. 

impetio (i), obtain by entreaty, 
accomplish. 

impetus, -us, m. [peto], attack, 
assault. 
. imports (i), bring in, import. 

impTObns, -a, -um, base, wicked. 

imprGvisd, adv. [pro -|- visus, 
seen], unawares, unexpectedly. 

imp&n6, adv. [in + poena, pun- 
ishment], without punishment, 
with impunity. 

impflnitas, -BX\a,i., freedom from 
punishment, impunity. 

in, prep, with ace. (of motion), 
into, to, against; with abl. (of 
rest), in, on, over. 

in-, inseparable prefix s= un-, not, 
as in inandltus, unheard. 



incendd, -cendere, -cendx, -cen- 
sum, set fire to. 

incitS (i) [cito, urge], urge on, 
incite. 

incol5, -colere, -colui, -cultum 
[colo, cultivate], dtuell in, in- 
habit. 

incommodnm, -1, n. [commodus, 
convenient], an inconvenience, 
disadvantage, disaster. 

incredibilis, -e [cred5, believe], 
incredible. 

inde, ^&v.,from that place, thence. 

indicium, -1, n., information, evi- 
dence, - - 

indued, -ducere, -duxi, -ductum, 
lead in or into, lead on, induce. 

inferior, -ius [infems], lower (in 
place) ; later (in time). 

infero, inferre, intuli, illatum, 
bring into or upon, wage upon, 
attack. 

inflects, -flectere, -flexi, -flexum, 
bend in, curve, 

influd, -fluere, -fluxi, -fLxLXMfXi,flow 
into, flow. 

inimicus, -a, -um, comp. -ior, 
sup. -issimus [in- -|- amicus], 
adj., unfriendly, hostile. As 
subst, inimicus, -I, m., enemy, 
personal enemy, as distin- 
guished from hostis, a public 
enemy, 

initium, -1, n. [in + eo], begin- 
ning, " 

iniuria, -ae, f . [ius, righl], wrong, 
injustice. 



i8o 



THE BEGINNER'S C^SAR 



Ininssu, m. (abl. of assnmed in- 

iussus), without command, 
Inopia, -ae, f., need^ lack, 
Inopin&nSi -antis, unawares, 
InaciSiis, -entis [scio, know^, not 

knowing^ unaware. 
Inieqnor, -sequl, -secutus sum, 

follow upi pursue, 
Insidiae, -arum, f., ambuscade, 

trectchery, 
insignia, -e, remarkable; (as 

subst.) n., sign, decoration. 
insolenter, adv., insultingly. 
institttdi -stituere, -stitul, -stitu- 

tum, set up, establish, 
in^titutum, -i, n., an established 

course, custom, institution, 
instOy -stare, -stiti, -statum, stand 

upon or near, approach, attack, 
instnidi -struere, -struxi, -struc- 

tum, build, draw up. 
intellegG (ligo), -legere, -lexT, 

-lectum, learn, understand, 
inteTi prep, with ace, between, 

among. 
intercedSy -cedere, -cessi, -ces- 

sum, go between, interpose, in- 
tercede, 
interclud5, -cludere, -clusi, -clu- 

sum, shut off. 
interdi&i adv., during the day, 

by day. 
interdunii adv., between whiles, 

sometimes, 
interea, adv., meanwhile. 
interficiS, -ficere, -feci, -fectum, 

kUl. 



interinii adv., meanwhile. 

intermitt5| -mittere, -misi, -mis- 
sum, leave or break off, inter- 
rupt. 

intemecidy -5nis, f., extermina- 
tion, massacre. 

interpreSy -etis, m. f ., interpreter. 

interaum, -esse, -fui, be between, 
intervene. 

intenralJllBiy -i, n., interval. 

inyitnSy -a, -um, unwilling. 

ipse, ipsa, ipsum, dem. pron., 
self, himself, herself, etc. 

is, ea, id,' dem. pron., this, that, 
he, she, it, unemphatic. 

ita, adv., so, thus, 

Italia, -ae, f., Italy. 

itaque, conj., and so, therefore. 

iteni, adv., in like manner, like- 
wise, so also. 

iter, itineris [cf. eo, ire], n., Jour- 
ney, line of march, march; 
road, route, mSgnnm iter, 
forced march, from 20 to 25 
miles a day. 

/ 

I {consonant) 

iactd (i), toss, discuss. 

iam, adv., now, already, at length. 

ittbed, iubere, iussi, iussum, order, 

iiidicium (judicium), -1 [iudex, 
judge], n., l&g?! judgment, deci- 
sion, decree ; place^f judgment, 
trial (i. 4); opinion, judgment. 

iudic5 {i), judge. 

ittgum, -i, n.,yoke, ridge. 



VOCABULARY 



I8l 



ifimentam, -T, n., yoke or draught 

animalt beast of burden, 
iung5y iungere^^ iunxi, iunctum, 

join. 
lura, -ae, m., the mountain range 

running from the Rhine to the 

Rhone. 
inSy iunis, n., rights justice y law, 
iu8ittra;ildiim, iurisiurandl, n., 

^oath, 

ittstitia, -ae, i., justice, 
iuvO| iuvare, iuvi, iut\im, help^ aid, 

iuvat (impers.), it pleases. 



Kalendae (Calendae), -arum, £., 
the Calends (the first day of a 
month). 



L., see Lucins. 

L&bienus, -i, m., Titus Labienus^ 
Caesar's chief lieutenant-gen- 
eral, afterwards deserted to 
Pompey, and fell B.C. 45 at 
Munda. 

lacessS, -ere, -ivi, -itum [obsolete 
lacio, entice\ (3), arouse^ pro- 
voke, annoy^ assail^ attack. 

lacrima, -ae, f., tear, 

lacuSi -us, m., lake. 

largior, largiri, largitus [largus, 
abundant] (4), dep., give freely <, 
imparty bestow ^ bribe (i. 18). 

largiter [largus, abundantly adv., 
abundantly^ much, largiter 



posse, to have great influence 
(i. 18). 

largitid, -onis [largior], f., lavish 
giving^ bribery, i. 9. 

late, adv. [latus], broadly^ widely, 

latitttdo, -inis, f. [latus], width, 

latiiis, see late. 

Latbbrigi, -orum, m. pi., a tribe 
about the head-waters of the 
Danube, bordering on the Tu- 
lingi. i. 5, 28, 29. 

latrd| -onis, m.^ freebooter ^ robber. 

laturus, see fero. 

latus, -a, -um, comp. -ior, sup. 
-issimus, adj., broad^ wide ; of 
territory, extensive, 

latus, -eris, n., side ; of an army, 
flank, latus apertum, exposed 
flank, ab latere, on the flank, 

legatiOy -onis, f., embassy. 

ligatus, -1, m., ambassador^ lieu- 
tenant. 

legi5,-6nis, f., legion, 

Lemannus, -1, m.,in Caesar always 
with lacus, Lake Geneva. 

lenitaSi -atis, f ., smoothtuss^ gen- 
tleness. 

lex, legis, f., law. 

liberalitls, -atis, f., generosity^ 
liberality, 

libere, zAs,, freely. 

liberi, -orum, m., children, 

llbertas, -atis, i.^ freedom ^ liberty, 

liceor (2), bid (at an auction). 

licet, licere, licuit, impers., it is 
permitted. 

Lingones, -um, m., the Lingones. 



l82 



THE BEGINNER'S C^SAR 



lingua, -ae, £., tongue^ language. 
linter, -tris, £., boat^ skiff, i. 12. 
Liacus, -1, m., chief magistrate 

(vergobret) of the iiildui, b.c. 

58. i. 16, 17, 18. 
littera (lltera), -ae, f ., a Utter of 

the alphabet ; (in. pi.) a letter. 
locas, -1, m. (in pi., n^^ place. 
longe, adv. [longus, long'\y far^ 

by far. 
longitiidG, -inis, f. [longus], 

length. 
loquor, loqul, locutus sum, speak, 
L&cius, -1 (abbr. L.), a Roman 

name. 
lux, lucis, f., light. 



M., see Marcus. 



magis, comp. adv. (sup. mazime), f memory. 



dare, to give in marriage (i. 3). 
in mfitrimOninm dfteere, to 
marry (L 9). 

Matrona, -ae, f., Marne, which 
rises near the head-waters of 
the Mease (Mosa) and flows to 
the northwest, joining the 
Seine (Sequana) four miles 
above Paris, after a course of 
more than two hundred miles, 
i. I. 

maturS (i), ripen^ hasten. 

matuniSy -a, -um, ripe, complete, 
early. 

mazimS, sup. adv. [magnus], 
very greatly, most, especially. 

mazimus, see m&gnus. 

me (ace. of ego), me, 

meditts, -a, -um, in the middle of. 
Ymemoria, -ae, f., recollection. 



more, rather. 

magistratns, -us, m., magistracy, 
magistrate, i 

magnopere, adv., greatly, espe- 
cially. 

magnus, -a, -um (comp. maior, 
sup. maximus), great, large. 

maleficium, -I, n., mischief, 
wickedness. 

mand5 (i), entrust, order. 

manus, -us, f., hand, armed force. 

Marcus, -I, m., a Roman name. 

matara, -ae, f., a Gallic javelin. 

mater, matris, f ., mother, mairon. 

matrimonium, -1 [mater], n., 
marriage, in mfttrimOnium 



mensis, -is, m., month. 
mercator, -5ris, m., merchant, 
mereor (2), deserve, earn, merit. 
meritum, -T, n., desert, merit. 
Messala, -ae, m., Marcus Vale- 
rius Messala, consul B.C. 61. 

i- 2. 35- \ 

mStior, metlri, mensus sum, 

measure, 

mihi (dat. of ego), me, to me, 

miles, -itis, m., soldier, 

militaris, -e, pertaining to a sol- 
dier, military, 

mille, indecl. adj., a thousand, 
4^s'subst., milia, -um, n. pi., 
thousand, thousands. 



VOCABULARY 



183 



minime, adv., leasts by no means. 
minimus, -a, -urn (sup. of parvus, 

small), leasty very little, 
minor (comp. of parvus), jma//^r, 

less, 
minu5, -ere, -ui, -utum [minus], 

tnake smaller ^ lessen, 
minus, adv. [minor], less, 
mitt5, mittere, misi, missum, 

send. 
modo, adv., only ; see etiam. 
mol5, -ere, -ui, -itum (3), grind. 

molita cibSria, mealy coarse 

flour, > 

moneo (2), advise , remind, warn, 

admonish. 
mons, montis, m., mountain. 
morior, mori, mortuus sum, die. 
moror (i), tarry, delay. 
mors, mortis, f. [morior], death, 
m5s, moris, m., manner, custom ; 

(in pi.) customs, character, 
moye5, movere, movi, motum, 

m,ove. 
mulier, mulieris, f ., woman. 
multitudd, -inis, f. [multus], 

great number^ multitude. 
mult5 'or multum, comp. plus, 

sup. plurimum [multus], adv., 
much, by far, greatly, multum 

posse or val6re, to have great 

power, influence. 
multum, adv., see multo. 
multus, -a, -um, adj ., comp. 

sup. plurinus, mtuh ; pi., 

many. As subst., m. pi., multl, 

-orum, many people ; plttrSs, 



>. /lus, 



-ium, more, quite a number, 
several; neut. sing.,'' multum, 
much ; pltLs, more ; plUrimum, 
very much: neut. pi., multa, 
many things, many considera- 
tions, multo di6, late in the 
day, when the day was far 
spent (i. 22). 

munio (4) [moenia, walls'\, build 
a wall, fortify, 

miinitio, -onis, i., fortification, 

murus, -1, m., wall. 

N 

nam, con],, for. 

Nammeius, -1, m., a Helvetian 

chief. 
nat&ra, -ae, f., nature, character. 
nayiS|yis, f., ship, t 
ne, conj., not to, that , . . not, lest ; 

(after words of fearing) that, 
-ne, enclitic interrog. particle. 
nee, see neque. 

necessarid, adv., necessarily, un- 
avoidably. 
necessarius, -a, -um, necessar" ; 

(as subst.) m., kinsman. 
nego (i), say not, deny. 
nemo, -inis, m. f., no one. 
neque (nee), conj., and not, and 

also ; neque . . . neque, neither 

. . . nor. 
nervus, -1, m., sinew, tendon ; (in 

"^^ power, strength, 
neve (neu), adv., and not, nor, 
nez, necis, f., death. 



1 84 



THE BEGINNER'S CAESAR 



nihil (nihilum), indecl. noun, 

nothing. 
nisi, conj., if not, unless. 
mtor, nit!, nfsus or nixus sum, 

rest upon, rely upon, strive. 
n5biliS| -e [nosco, know], famous, 

high-born, noble. 
nobilit&S| -atis, f ., nobility, nobles. 
noctUy adv. [nox], by night, 
n51d, nolle, n5lui, not wish, be 

unwilling. 
nSmen, -inis, n., name. 
ndminatim, adv., by name. 
n5n, adv., not. \ 

ndnaginta, ninety. 
nondum, adv., not yet. 
ndnnuUus, -a, -um (not none) 

some ; (in pi. a,s sub^t.) some, 

several. 
nonnumquam (not never), some- 
times. 
N5reia| -ae, f., Noreia (a town of 

the Norici). ' 
nSricus, -a, -um, of the Norici, 

Norican. 
nos (nom. and ace. pi. of ego), 

we, us. — 
noster, -tra, -trum \iios\,our,otfrs. 



nttUuSy -a, -um [ne + ullus, any'], 

not any, no, none. 
num, interrog. particle implying 

a negative answer, 
numenis, -i, m., number. 
vnunti5 (i), report, announce. 
nuntium, -I, n., report, message. 
nuntias, -I, m., one who reports, 

messenger. 
nttper, recently. 



Ob, prep, with ace, on account of', 

(in composition) to, against. 
Obaeratu^ -I, m., one involved in 
"* "^debt, debtor. 
0bici5, -icere, -ieci, -iectum, throw 

in front, oppose. 
Obliviscor, oblivisci, oblitus sum, 
^forget. 

ObsecrS (i), beseech, implore. 
ObseS| -idis, m. f., hostage. 
Obstring5, -stringere, -strinxi, 

-strictum, bind. 
obtinedy -tinere, -tinui, -tentum, 

hold, possess. ^ 
0Ccasui9i -Ss, m.., falling, setting. 
noyem, nine. -^ occidS^ rcidere. -cidi, -cfeum 

nOYUS, -a, -um, new ; novae x^%{ [caedo, cut"], cut off, kill, slay, 

new state of affairs^ revolution. occulto (i), hide, conctal. 



nox, noctis, f., night. 

nubo, nubere, nupsi, nuptum, 

veil one's self (for marriage), 

marry. 
nudus, -a, -um, naked, exposed, 

unprotected. 



OCCUpo(i) {c^'pio], take possession 

of setze,^ccupy, 
Oceanus, -i, m., ocean. 
Ocelum, -I, n., a city of Gallia 

Cisalpina. 
0Ct5, eight. 



VOCABULARY 



I 



185 



octodecim, eig^hteen, 

octiginta, eighty. 

OCttlli^, -1, m., eye. 

0^, 5disse, def . verb, hate. 

offendOy -fendere, -fendi, -fensum, 
strike against^ stumble^ offend. 

OfSnsiOy -onis, £., a striking 
against, offence^ 

OmninSy adv. [omnis], altogether , 
in all, ' 

omniSy -e, all, every. 

oportetf -^re, -uit, impers. verb, 
-^ — ii^is-ytecessary, one ought. 

Oppidom, -1, n., stronghold, town. 

Oppiigno {^)y fight against, storm. 

ops, opis (not used in nom. sing.), 
power, strength; (in pi.) re- 
sources, means. 

opus, -eris, n., work. 

dratiOy -onis [oro], f., speech, 
words, address, plea. 

Orgetorix, -igis, m. [Kel., = * The 
King who slays/ * All-slaugh- 
tering King '], a Helvetian lord 
who formed a plot to seize the 
supreme power, but was appre- 
hended and died, or committed 
suicide, before judgment was 
pronounced, i. 2, 3, 4, 5, 9, 26. 

oriens, -entis [part, of orior], adj., 
rising, orientem s51em, the 
rising sun = the east (i. i). 

orior, orlri, ortus (4), dep., rise, 
arise ; begin, spring from ; 
start from, 

or5 (i), speak, plead, entreat. 

ostenddy -tendere, -tendi, -tentum 



[ob + tendo, stretcli\, expose to 
view, exhibit. 







pabulatio, -onis, i., foraging, 

pabulum, -1, n., food, fodder. 

paco (i) [pax],/a^(^, subdue."' 

paene, adv., almost. 

pagUS, ^I, m., canton, district. 

par, paris, equal. 

paratuS| -a, -um [p. p. of paro], 

prepared, ready. 
^I^Tf?), oSey. 
par5 "t I ), prepare, provide. 
^9l€^ partis, i.,paft, direction. 
parvus, -a, -um (comp. minor, 

sup. minimus), small, little, 
passuSy -us, m., stepy pace (five 

Roman feet), milia passaom, 

miles. 
patefi, -ere, -ul» lie open, extend. 
pater, patris, m., father. 
patior^ pati, passus sum, suffer, 

permit. 
pauci, -ae, •^.,few. 
paz, pacis, f ., peace. 
pello, pellere, pepull, pulsum, 

drivcy beat. 
per, prep, with ace, through, by 

means of. 
perduce, -ducere, -duxl, -ductum, 

lead through. 
perfacilis, -e, very easy. 
perfictG, -ficere, -feci, -fectum 

[facio], do thoroughly, accom- 
plish, complete. 



1 86 



THE BEGINNER'S CMSAR 



perfringOy -fringere, -fregi, -frac- 

tum, break through. 
perfuga, -ae, m., deserter, 
perfugi9| -fugere, -fugi, flee^ de- 
sert, 
pericttlnixii -i, n., danger , risk. 
peritU8| -a, -um, experienced^ 

practised^ skilled. 
pennoyeOy -movere, -movi, -mo- 

tum [per + moveo] (2), deeply 

move^ greatly disturb^ alarm ; 

influence^ induce, 
pernicieSy -el, f ., destruction. 
perpaucuSy -a, -um, very littlcy 

very few, 
perrumpOy -rumpere, -rupi, -rup- 

tum, break through. 
persequor, -sequl, -secutus sum, 

follow after y pursue, 
perseyerD (i), continue ^ persist. 
persolydy -solvere, -solvi, -solu- 

tum, pay in full. 
persuadeOy -suadere, rsuasl, -sua- 

sum, convince^ persuade. 
perterred {2\.Jrighten thoroughly. 

Clpertineo, -tinere, -tipul, 
[per -f- teneo] (2), reach out^ 

extend ; pertain to^ concern, 

belong tOf have to do with, 
peryenio, -venire, -veni, -ventum, 

come through^ arrive, 
pes, pedis, m.^foot. 
pet5, -ere, -ivi (-ii), -itum, attack, 

aim at, seek, 
phalanx, -angis, Greek ace. sing 

phalanga [0<iXa7f],y., compact 

host, mass, phalanx. 



pilum, T, n., a heavy spear (with 
shaft about 4 feet long) thrown 
by Roman legionaries. 

Pis5y -onis, m., name of persons 
mentioned in the Gallic Waf: 

1. Lucius Calpurnius Piso 
Caesoninus, consul B.C. 112; 
killed B.C. 107, when serving as 
lieutenant in Gaul with the 
consul Lucius Cassius Longi- 
nus, i. 12. 

2. Luctus Calpurnius Piso 
Caesoninus, consul with Aulus 
Gabinius, B.C. 58, and father- 
hi-law of Csesar. L 6, 12. 

3. Marcus Pupius Piso Cal- 
purnianus, consul with M, Va- 
lerius Messala, B.C. 61. i. 2, 

35- 

plebs, plebis (plebes, -ei), f ., com- 
mon people, plebeians. 

pliirimuSy -a, -um (sup. of mul- 
tus), very much, most, very 
many. 

plus, pliiris (comp. of multus), 
more, 

poena, -ae, f., punishment, pen- 
alty. 

poUiceor (2), promise, 

p5n5, ponere, posui, positnm, 
put, place, 

p5ns, pontis, m., bridge. 

pOpulati5, -onis, f., ravaging, 

popular (i), devastate, 

populu^ -1, m., people, 

porto (i), carry, bring. 

portorium, -1, n., tax, tariff. 



VOCABULARY 



187 



p08C5y -ere, poposcl, demand. 

pOSSe^siOy -dnis, f ., possession, 

possum, posse, potuT [potis, able 
-\- s^m], be able^ can, 

post, prep, with ace, behind^ 
after, 

postea, adv., afterwards. 

posterus, -a, -w^mi following, 

postquam, conj., after ^ as soon as, 

postridie, adv., on the day after, 

potens, -eviiiSy powerful, 

potentia, -^e, f ., fower^ ability. 

potest&s, -atis, f ., power. 

potiojy.'potiri, potltus sum,^^/ or 
obtain possession of. 

prae, prep, with abl., before ; (in 
composition) before^ over^ very. 

praeced5, -cedere, -cessi, -cessum, 
go before^ surpass^ precede, 

praecipio, -cipere, -cepi, -ceptum, 
take in advance^ order, instruct, 

praeferd, -ferre, -tuli, -latum, bear 
before, choose, prefer, 

praeficid, -ficere, -feci, -fectum, 
set before or aver^ place in com- 
mand, 

praemittd, -mittere, -misi, -mis- 
sum, send before or in advance. 

praeoptd (i), choose rather, pre- 
fer, 

praesentia, -ae, f., the present 
moment. 

praesertim, adv., especially, 

praesidinm, -1, n., protection^ 
guards garrison, 

praest5, -stare, -stiti, -stitum [prae 
+ sto] (i), excels surpass ; ex- 



hibit, manifest, show; discharge, 
perform. Impers. praestat, // 
is preferable, it is better, offl- 
oium praestSre, to do one's duty. 

praestd, adv., at hand. praestO 
esse, to meet. 

praesum, -esse, -ful, [prae 

+ sum], irr., be ox preside over, 
be at the head of, have command 
of, have charge of 

praeter, prep, with ace, past, by, 
be\ond^ except. 

praetered, -iret -Ivi (-il), -itum, 
go by or beyond ; (p. p. as 
subst.) praeterita, -orum, n., 
the past. 

praetor, -oris [praeitor, from 
prae|o], m., general, com- 
mander (i. 21); praetor, a 
Roman magistrate, next to the 
consul in rank, charged with 
judicial functions. 

prend5 (prehendo), prendere, 
prendi, prensum, lay hold of 
grasp, 

pretium, -i, n., price. 

prex, precis, f ., prayer. 

pridie, adv., on the day before. 

primum, adv., in the first place, 
first, 

primiis, -a, -um, sup. adj.,^rj/. 

princeps, -ipis, chief; (as subst.) 
chief, leader. 

principatns, -lis, m., leadership, 
chief position, preeminence. 

pristinus, -a, -wm, former. 

prius, comp. adv., sooner. 



1 88 



THE BEGINNER'S CMSAR 



priniqiUUIli adv., before^ sooner 
than. 

pxiT&timy adv., privately^ as pri- 
vate citizens. {nal. 

priyatUSy -a, -um, private^ perso- 

prt, prep, with abl., before^ for, 
in behalf oft in proportion to. 

prob5 (i), try t prove f approve. 

ProcillllSy -I, m., Gains Valerius 
Procillus (a Gallic chief). 

prOdo, -dere, -did!, -ditnm [d5], 
transmit^ hand down. 

proelimn, -T, n., battle. 

profecti5, -onis, f., setting out^ 
departure. 

profiascor, *pfoficisci, profectus 
sum, set otU^ depart. 

prohibe5 {2)^ keep fronts prohibit, 
prevent. 

pr5ici5y -icere, -iecl, -iectum, 
throw forthj cast down. 

prope, adv. and prep, with ace, 
near, 

propinquuSy -a, -um, mar, neigh- 
boring; (as subst.) relative, 
kinsman. 

pr5pdii5y -p5nere, -posui, -posi- 
tum, place or set forth,, declare, 

propter, prep, with ace, on ac- 
count of. 

propterea, 2Ldv..,for this reason. 

prospici5, -spicere, -spexi, -spec- 
turn, look forward, look out for. 

pr5yincia| -ae, f., provirutj^ub- 
ject territory ; in Caesar often 
the Province, the part of Trans- 
alpine Gaul subdued by the 



Romans before B.C. 58, l3ring 
between the Mediterranean sea 
and the upper part of the 
Rhone, the C^vennes moun- 
tains, and the upper part of the 

. Garonne river. 

proximSy adv. [prope], next, 
I nearjest, last. 

prozimiiSy -a, -um, nearest, Ictst. 

pUblice [publicus], adv., in the 
name of the state, as a state, 
publicly^ opposed in meaning 
to prIvStim. 

publicuSy -a, -um, public. 

Publius, -1 (abbr. P.), m., a Ro- 
man name. 

puer, -1, m., boy, child. 

pugna, -ae, i., fight, battle. 

pugno {i)t fight. 

purg5 (i), clear, acquit, 

ptlto (i), compute, reckon, think, 

Pyrenaeus, -a, -um [?], adj., oniy 
with *• sl^ontes, the Pyrenees 
mountains, between France 
and Spain. 



qua, adv., by which way, where, 

qiiadraginty^forty. 

qiiactfingenti, -2a,^ -2,, four hun- 
dred. 

qiiaero, quaerere, quaesivi, quae- 
situm, seek, ask, 

qualiSy -e, of what sort. 

quam, adv. and conj., how, as, 
than; (with sup.) as possible. 

quantuSy -a, -um, how great; tan- 



VOCABULARY 



189 



tns . . . qnantiu, so (or as) great 

, . . as. [reason, 

qua r§, adv., wherefore, for this 

quartuSy -a, -Mm., fourth, 
qiiattttory/'»r. 
-que, enclitic conj., and, 
queror, queri, questus sum, com- 
plain, 
qui, quae, quod, rel. pron. and 

interrog. adj., who, which, what, 
qoidem, indeed; nS . . . quidem, 

not even, not either. 
qmily conj., that, but that, from; 

quXn etiam, nay more, 
quindecim, fifteen. 
quingentiy -ae, -z.,five hundred. 
quiniy -ae, -a, distrib. num.,yfz/^ 

each, five, 
quinquey^z/^. 
quintus, -a, -yroi, fifth. 
quia, quid, interrog. pron., who ? 

which? what? (as indef.) any 

one, any thing, 
quiaquaniy quidquam (quic- 

quam), any one, any thing, 
quisque, quaeque, quidque, 

(quodque), each one, every one, 

each, every, 
quod, Qonj., because, 
quoque, conj., also, 
quuin, see cum. 

R 

rapina, -ae, £., plunder, rapine. 
rati5y -onis, f ., reckoning, plan, 
reason. 



ratis, -is, f ., raft, 

Sauraa, -omm, m., the Rauraci, 

re- (red-)y inseparable prefix with 
the force of back, again. 

recenSy -entis,/r^5A, recent, 

recipiSy -cipere, -cepi, -ceptum, 
take back, receive, 

rede6| -tire, -ii, -itum, go back, re- 
turn, "- -' 

redimO| -imere, -emi, -emptum 
[em5, buy^ buy back, buy up. 

redintegr5 (i), restore, renew. 

reditiOy -onis, f ., a going back, re- 
turn,^ 

reduco, -ducere, -duxi, -ductum, 
lead back, withdraw. 

leferOy -ferre, -tulT, -latum, bring 
or carry back, report. 

regnum, -1, n. [rex], sovereignty, 

" royal power. 

reiCM, -icere, -ieci, -iectum, throw 
back. 

relinqu5y -linquere, -llqui, -lic- 
tumi leave behind, abandon, 

reliquuSy -a, -um, the rest of, re- 
maining'; (as subst.) remain- 
der. 

reminiscor, -1, call to mind, re- 
member, 

remoYeS, -movere, -movi, -mo- 
tum, move back, 

renuntio (i), bring back word, 
report, 

repello, repellere, reppuli, repul- 
sum, drive back, repulse, 

repentinuSy -a, -um, sudden, un- 
expected. 



190 



THE BEGINNER'S CjESAR 



raperi6| reperire, repperi, reper- 
tuBif^Hdou/f discover. 

reprahendOy -prehendere, -pre- 
hendi, -prehensum, blame, cen- 
sure, 

rep&gnS (i\fi^ back, resist, 

rSSi rei, f., matter, affair; cir- 
cumstance, fact, transaction; 
object, project, business, r6t 
mlliUtris, warfare, ' military 
science, r6t novae, a revolu- 
tion, r6t ptlblioa, the state, 
public business, public interest, 
qnS rS, wherefore, and for this 
reason, r6t neoatsSria, exi- 
gency. 

rascindDy -scindere, -scidi, -scis- 
sum [re- + scindo] (3), cut 
down, break up, destroy. 

readscd, -sc!scere» -scivi or -scii, 
-scitum [rC: .+ seised, inquire] 
(3)1 discover, find out, i. 28. 

rasistSy -sistere, -sdtiy stand back, 
stop, resist, 

raspondedy -spondere, -spondl, 
-sponsum, answer, reply. 

respdnsum, -1, n,, reply, 

zes publica (respublica) rel pub- 
licae, f ., state, 

re8titu5| -uere, -ui, -utnm, set up 
again, restore, 

retineS, -tinere, -tinui, -tentum 
[teneo], hold back, retain. 

rayertSy -vertere, -vertT, -versunii 
turn back, return ; reverter, -T, 
dep., is generally used in the 
tenses of incomplete action. 



RllSnas, -i, m., the Rhine, 
Rhodanus, -i, m., the Rhone, 
ripa, -ae, f ., bank (of a river). 
,rog5 (i), ask,_ 
RDmanas, -a, -um, Roman ; (as 

subst.) BOmSnl, -5rum, m., tht 

Romans, 
rota, -ae, f., wheel, 
runuSi adv., c^in, 

S 

•Mpe, adv., often, 

«alU8, -utis, f., safety, 

Santonesy -um, or Santoni, 
-drum, m. pi., a Gallic people 
on the seacoast north of the 
Garonne; the name survives 
in Saintes and Sainionge. i. 10, 

•arcinae, -arum [sar in sarcio], 
f. pi., baggage, packs, the load 
that each soldier carried on his 
back. 

•atiSy adv. and adj., sufficiently, 
enough, sufficient, 

satisfaciS, -facere, -feci, -factum, 
cU> enough, satisfy, make amends, 

sceluSy -eris, n., crime, 

scio, scire, scivi, scitum, know, 

8CUtum/^i, n., shield, 

secretOy adv., secretly, in pri- 
vate. 

secunduSy -a, -u^, following, fa- 
vorable, second. 

sady conj., but, 

sedecim [sex], sixteen. 



VOCABULARY 



191 



aeditiOsus, -a, -um, seditious. 

Segusiayi, -5rum, m., the Segu- 
siavi. 

sementiSy -is, f ., sowings plant- 
ing, 

semper, adv., always, 

senatns, -us, m., senate, 

seneZy senis, old; (as subst.) old 
man. 

seniy -ae, -a, distrib. num., six 
eachy six, 

sentidy sentire, sensi, sensum, be 
sensible of, feel ^ perceive , think, 

separatim, adv., separately, 

septentriSnes (septem, triones), 
-um, rk. pi., the seven plough 
oxen (the stars of the Great 
Bear). — Hence, the north. — 
Also (by an error), in the sing., 
geptentrio, -onis, the north; 
ft septentriSnibas, in the north ; 
sub Beptentri5nibiu, in the 
norths towards the north, 

Septimus, -a, -um, seventh, 

sepultura, -ae, f., burial, 

Sequana, -ae, m., the Seine, 

Sequaiyiy^orum, m. pi., a Gallic 
stalie ^est of the Jura; chief 
city Vesontio, now Besanfon. 
In their strifes wilJi the ^dui 
they secured the aid of Ario- 
vistus, who made them subject 
to himself. 

sequor, sequi, seciitus syxm, fol- 
low. ♦» 

seryituSy -fitis, f., slavery, 

serruSy -i, m., slave. 



seUy see siye. 

sex, six. 

sezaginta, sixty. 

si, conj., if, 

signum, -1, n., signal, standard, 

silya, -ae, f ., forest, 

simiil, adv., at the same time, at 
once. 

sin, conj., but if, 

sine, prep, with abl., without, 

singuli, -ae, -a, distrib. num., one 
at a time, one by one, single. 

sinister, -tra, -trum, left, 

sive (seu), conj., or if; sive . . . 
Blve, whether . . . or, either . . . 
or. 

socer, soceri, m.., father-in-law. 
^OCius, -I, m., ally, 

sol, sOlis, m., the sun. 

solum, adv., only. 

solum, -1, n., soil, ground, 

solus, -a, -um (gen. -lus, dat. -1), 
alone, only. ■ 

soror, -oris, f ., jister. 

spatium, -1, n^', space, period, 

specto (i), lo4k,face, 

spero (i) [spfes], hope, look for, 

spes, -ei, f., hope, 

sponte, abl. and spontis, gen., 
only forms in use of an obsolete 
nom. spOns, f., of one^s own 
accord, willingly. suS sponte, 
of their own accord, unaided; 
by their own influence (i. 9). 

statuo, ere, ui, utum, v. a., set 
up, resolve, deem, decide, gra- 
▼iter statuere in aliqnem, to 



192 



THE BEGINNER'S CMSAR 



take strong measures against, 
nOn ezipeetandom sibi statiiit, 
decided that he ought not to wait 
[sto]. 

•tadedy -ere, -ui, be eager for^ de- 
sire, 

stadium, -i, n., zeal^ earnestness, 
regard, desire / — in populum 
BgnHimm, affection for the R, 

sub, prep, (i.) w. ace, under {pi 
motion); — iufftim mittere, send 
under the yoke ; — prlmam nos- 
tram aoiem BncoMBSmnt, came 
up close to our front line, (ii.) 
with abl., utj^der, 

8ilbduc5y -ducere, -duxi, -ductum, 
draw up or away^ withdraw. 

SUbeOy -ire, -ii, -itum, go under or 
near, undergo. 

8Ubici5 (subiicio), -icere, -ieci, 
-iectum [sub+ iaci5] (3), throw 
from beneath (i. 26). 



Sulla, born B.C. 138; Consul 
B.C. 88, Dictator, 81-79 ^-^-I 
leader of the aristocratic party 
in the first of the Civil Wars, 
and deadly enemy of Marias ; 
died B.C. 78. L 21. 

som, esse, fui, be, 

snmma, -ae, f., highest point, sum, 

8Uinmoyeo(sub-), -movere, -movi, 
-mdtum, remove, 

summuSj ^a, -um (pos. supenis), 
highest. 

8um5y sumere, sumpsi, sumptum, 
take, claim, 

siimptaSy -us, m., expense, 

super, adv. and prep, with ace, 
above, over, 

supers (i), surpass, conquer. 

supersum, -esse, -fuI, be over, sur- 
vive. 

snperuSy -a, -nm (comp. superior, 
sup. supremus, summus), up' 
per, hi^ 



subleyd (i), lift up, aid. Uf^W^'^i -petere, -pe^vi, -peti- 

subsistSy -sistere, -stiti, standstill, Y tum, be at ha^ui or in store, 

withstand, resist, / supplicitflfr, adv., humbly, 

subsum, -esse, -fui, be under or supplicium, -i, n.^ punishment. 



near, 
subrehO, -vehere, -vexi, -vectum, 

carry or bring up, convey. 
succed5| -cedere, -cessi, -cessum, 

go under or near, approach, 

succeed, 1 

suiy sibi, se or sese, nom. wanting, 

reflex, pron., himself, herself, 

itself, themselves, him, her, 
SuUa, -ae, m., Lucius Cornelius 



suscipiOi -cipere, -cepi, -ceptum 
[subs, for sub, + capi5] (3), 
undertake, take up; take upon 
one's self, assume i^,T^), bellum 
suseipere, to commence war, 

sospidOy -onis, f., mistrust, sus- 
picion, 

snstlnedy -tinere, -tinui, -tentum, 
hold up or out, sustain, 

sunS| -a, -um, his, her, its, their. 



VOCABULARY 



193 



T., see Titus. 

tabula, -ae, f., boards writing- 
tablet, 

tace5 (2), be silent^ keep secret, 

tarn, adv.i so, 

tamen, adv., nevertheless, yet, 

tandem, adv., at length, 

tantuSy -a, -um, so great, 

telum, -i| n., dart, missile, 

temperantia, -ae, f., self-control, 
moderation. 

tempero (i), control, refrain, 

tempts (tentoy, -are, -avi, -atum 
[tento-, p. p. of teneo, hold], 
I. V. a., handle. Hence, try, 
attempt, make an attempt upon, 
tempt; iter {try to force). 

tempusy -oris [tem {cut, with 
root determinative or acciden- 
tal p) + us], n. {a cutting, — 
£sp., a division of time, a time, 
time (in general), a season, an 
occasion, an emergency, a crisis; 
tarn necessftriO tempore, at so 
critical a moment; omnX tem- 
pore, at all times, always; in 
reliqunm tempus, for the fu- 
ture; tlnO tempore, at once, 

tened, tenere, tenui, tentnm, 
hok^ 

terra, -lie, i,, earth, 

tertius, -a, -am, ^ird. 

testis, -is, m. f., witness, 

Tiguiinus, -a, -um, of the Tigu- 
rini (a canton of the Helvetii). 



timed, -ere, -m,fear, 

timor, -oris, m,,fear. 

Titus, -i (abbr. T.), m., a Roman 
name. 

tolerd (i), endure, support. 

toUd, tollere, sustull, sublatum, 
lifl up, take away, destroy, 

Toloeates, -um, m., the Tolosates, 

totus, -a, -um (gen. -fus, dat. -1), 
all^tke whole of, entire. 

trad§, -dere, -didi, -Atum, give 
over, hand down, surrender, 

traduc5, -ducere, -duxl, -ductum, 
lead across. 

tragula, -ae, f., a spear, lance of 
the Gauls and Spaniards, 
thrown by means of a strap 
by which it was swung. 

traho, -ere, -xl, -ctum, v. a., 
draw, drag. 

trans, prep, with ace, across, 

transeo, -ire, -ii, -itum, go across, 

" cross, 

transfigd, -figere, -fixi, fixum, 
thrust through, transfix, pierce, 

trecenti, -ae, -a, three hundred, 

tres, tria, three. 

tribuo, -uere, -ui, -iitum, assign, 
bestow, attribute, ascribe, 

triduum, -1, n., three days, 

triginta, thirty, 

triplex, -icis, threefold, triple. 

Tulingi, -drum, m. pi., a Ger- 
man tribe north of the Hel- 
vetii, across the Rhine. L 5, 
25, 26, 28, 29. 

turn, adv., then, thereupon; bi- 



194 



THE BEGINNER'S CMSAR 



sides, moreover, onm . . . tTim, 
both . . . andj not only . . . but 
also, 
tau8| -a, -um, thy your. 



ubiy when, where, 

ttldscor, ulcisci, ultus sum, 
avenge, punish, 

fillliSy -a, -um (gen. -ius, dat -i), 
any, - 

ulterior, -ius, comp. sA)., farther, 

unSif adv., at the same time^ to- 
gether; esp. llnS oum, together 
with, [abl. f. of llniu.] 

unde, adv., from which place, 
whence. 

nndique (unde), adv., from all 
parts, on all sides. 

unuSy -a, um (gen. -lus, dat. -i), 
one. 

arbs, urbis, f ., city, 

ut (uti), conj. (with subj.), that, 
in order that^ to ; (with indica- 
tive) as^ when, 

uter, -tra, -trum (gen. -lus, dat. 
-I), which of two, which, 

iitor, uti, usus sum, use, 

nzori -oris, f ., wife. 



yac5 (i), ^^ vacant or unoccupied. 
yadum, -i, n.^ford, shoal, 
yagor (i), wander. [avail. 

yaled (2), be strong or powerful. 



yftllam, -i, n., palisade, rampart, 

yftatd {\\lay waste, devastate, 

yectigaly alis, n., tcuc, public 
revenue, [vectus (from veho).] 

yel, or ... yel , , . yel, either 
. ,fn\ 

yenidi venu-e, venf, ventum, come, 

VerbigenuSy -i, m., a canton of 
the Helvetii. See Helyetius. 

yarbum, -1, n., word, 

yereor, -eri, -itus (2), dep., fear, 
be afraid of; dread, be appre- 
hensive, 

ycrgS, -ere, , (3), in- 
cline, lie, slope; be situated m a 
certain direction. 

yergobretos, -1 [Kel. = * He that 
renders judgment,' * Judge*], 
m., vergobret, title of the chief 
magistrate of the iEdui. L 16. 

yaritas, see yereor. 

yer5 [abl. of yerus], adv., in 
truths in fact, truly, certainly; 
but, but indeed, however. 

Venicloetiii8y -i, m., one of the 
Helvetii sent as an ambassa- 
dor to Caesar. 

ySmSy -a, -um, adj., true, 

VeB0nti5, -onis, m., chief town of 
the Sequani on the Dubis, now 
Besan^on. 

yeaper, -eris (and -eri), m., eve- 
ning, [tnrepoi, icir4pa.'\ 

yester, -tra, -trum [vos], poss. 
pron. adj.^ your, yours, 

yeteranuSy -a, -um, adj., veteran, 
experienced; esp. subst. vete^ 



VOCABULARY 



195 



ran^ Le. a tried Boldier opp. to 
raw recruits, [vetus.] 

yetttSi -eriSi adj., ancient^ old, 
[cp. iron ^= year ^ 

Tez5, -are, -avT, -atnm, v. a., 
harass, ravage, overrun (of a 
country). 

Tiai -ae, f., way, route. (See 
Tez5.) 

yictor, -oris, m., conqueror; adj., 
victorious, [vinco.] 

yictOriai -ae, f., victory. 

yicus, -i, m., village. 

yideQ^ videre, vi^, visum, see; 
(in pass.), be seen, seem, 

Tigilia, -ae, f., wakefulness, 
watch; as a division (one- 
fourth) of the night : dS (prImS, 
Mounds, tertiS) quarts YiriliS, 
about the first, second, etc., 
watch; these being respec- 
tively 6 P.M. — 9 P.M., 9 P.M. — 
midnight, midnight — 3 a.m., 
3 A.M. — 6 A.M. [vigil = watch- 
Jul.] 

Tigintli card, adj., twenty, 

Tinci5, -ire, -nxi, -nctum, v. a., 
bi^d, 

TincO, -ere, vici, victum, v. a., 
conquer, surpass. 



yinctns, -a, -urn, part, of vindo. 

Tincalnm, Yindumi -I, n., chain, 
bond, [vincio.] 

TirtffSi -litis [vir], f., manliness; 
courage, bravery, valor, prowess, 

YiSy ace. vim, abl. vi, pL vires, 
-ium, f ., strength; force, violence; 
influence, PI., physical powers, 
strength, 

TisuSy see yideS. 

yita, -ae, f., life. 

yitdy -are, -avi, -atum (i), shun, 
avoid, try to escape, 

yiz, adv., with difficulty, scarcely, 

yoo5 (i), caU,' summon, 

Vocontiiy -drum, m., the Vocontii, 

yol5, velle, volui, , irr., be 

willing, wish, desire ; mean, in- 
tend, 

yolnnt&s, -atis [vol5], f., will, 
wish, inclination, desire ; good- 
will, affectiffn (i 19)^; consent, 
6iu8 yoluntSte, with his con- 
sent (i. 7). 

yds, nom. and ace. pi. [tu], you, 

yulgus (volg-), -i, n., the multi- 
tude, public, rabble, 

ynlnerO (vol-) (i), wound, in- 
jure, 

yolniia (vol-), -neris, n., a wound. 




n Dew Beginners' Greek Boot 

By I. F. Frisbee, Ph.D. 

Thignew Beginners' Greek Book is modeled from the 
standpoint of the learner. The pupil is required to think out 
everything for himself. 

X. Its paradigms contain only the most common words of 
Xenophon*s Anabasis. In their selection preference has been 
regularly given to root words, 

3. Its sentences for the exposition of the syntax are taken 
intact from the Anabasis, and are expressed in the familiar 
language of the student. Those sentences with inflectional 
forms are accompanied by brief critical observations, especially 
suited to young pupils. 

3. Its vocabulary contains a special list of the most common 
words of the Anabasis. 

4. Its formation of words d eals with the most common words 
of the pupil's vocabulaiy. 

5. Its inflectional forms are classified according to their 
natural relations ; for example — the vowel declensions are 
treated together, and the verb is developed with its three voices 
in the order of those forms most common in Greek. 

There are many other features besides these which we 
think will appeal to you. 

Those who have used the book in the class room, write 
us, that — ** for logical arrangement and scientific treatment of 
the fundamental principles of Greek it has no equal." The 
lessons are so arranged that even the dullest pupils can make 
rapid advancement. Would you be interested to see a copy 
of this book? Price, ^1.2$, 

HINDS & NOBLE, PubBihcf^ 
3)-3^35 West 15th St New York Qty. 



H new Beginners* Dffn Book. 

By J. C. Hoch^ Fh.D.^ andO. F. H. Bert, B.S. 

This new Beginners' Latin Book is constructed on a plan 
that will enable the beginner to accomplish the maximum 
amount of work within the minimum space of time. 

1. Exceptions to rules have, for the most part, been omitted, 
since the aim is to teach the essentials of the language. 

2. Many of the sentences are original, while those of more 
complex construction have been taken from classic authors; 
all have been chosen with the aim to interest the student as 
well as to illustrate the rules of syntax and to pave the way 
for reading Caesar. 

3. The words which make up the vocabulary are such as will 
prove to be of value in later study. Five review lessons in 
vocabulary have been introduced. 

4. The subjunctive mood and its uses has received most 
careful treatment. 

5. The discussion of conditional sentences by means of a 
diagram is a new feature which teachers will appreciate. 

The fables and other stories which are commonly found 
in other beginners' Latin books are omitted since ample 

material for reading is supplied in the text. 

The lessons are arranged in a natural and methodical 
order and are just the right length to enable a class to make 
rapid progress » 

We shall be glad to send a copy of this book for in- 
spection. Price^ $1,00^ 

HINDS & NOBLE, Piibttshefi, 
31-33-35 West S5th St New York QtK, 



Ethics for High Schools 

Br AUSTIN BIERBOWER 

Clothe a^ pages Price S^'OO 

At last a text book has been provided that can be 
placed in the hands of the pupils regardless of their 
religions conyictions. All references to religions 
differences have been rigorously avoided. 

This treatise is designed for moral training in high 
schools — presents the subject in lucid un-technical 
language and aims especially to impress the practical 
bearing of the moralities in a manner that will convince 
young people of the reasonableness, the appropriate- 
ness, and the practicability of each of the virtues. 
Read what others say of the book. 




** Mr. Bierbower*inew book tappliesthe demand 
which has Ions existed in the minds of all 
thou|;htful teachers. It is written in a clear, 
concise manner, and while eminently suitable for 
advanced schools and colleges, may yet, with 
the aid of an intelligent teacher, be made clear 
to the youngest scholar." 




''Absolutely free from dogmatism it presents the 
virtues ana their reasons in a manner that can be 
comprehended, and shows how they can be 
practiced alike by all. It can hardly be studied 
without improving the manners of the student 
and elevating his character." 


** There is not a false note or insipid paragraph 
in this volume. The author has shown that it is 
possible to write a text book upon ethics which 
will be acceptable to every moral thinker, no . 
matter what his creed." 


1 
publi! 
Primj 
••Ma 
Collej 
you a 
adopt 

31-3: 


Jeside *' Bierbower*s Ethics for High Schools 
sh "Dewey's Lessons on Morals," adapte 
iry and Intermediate Schools. Price 75 ( 
ckenzie's Manual of Ethics" for Universitie 
g;es. Price $1.50. We shall be pleased to 
iny of these books for inspection with a vi( 
ion. 

HINDS & NOBLE, Pabllsfaers 
3-35 West 15th St New York 


,"we 
d for 
:ents. 
s and 
send 
sw to 

Qty 



geriiian 
texts 

Uocabttteries 

and explanatory footnotes printed on good 
paper, bound in cloth, price 50c per vol- 
ume. The following texts are now ready: 
Schiller's Wilhelm Tell, Schiller's Per 

NefFe als Onkel, Lessing's Minna von 

Barnhelm, Lessing's Nathan der Weise, 

Lessing's Emilia Galotti, Goethe's Hermann 

und Dorothea, Schiller's Jungfrau von Orleans 

Schiller's Maria Stuart 
Others in preparation. 

What texts will you read next term? 
Would you be interested to see any of the 
above ? Correspondence invited. 

HINDS & NOBLE, Publishers 
31-33-35 West isth Street, New York City 

Schoolbaoks of all publishers at one store 



A Nbw Spbller 

S,000 COMMON WORDS 
ONB SHOULD KNOW HOW TO SPBLL 

Price^ 25 Ceuis 

Contents 

Words Met in Genertl Reading and Used in Onfinary 

Conversation 

Words of Similar Pronunciation, but of Different Spell- 
ing and Meaning 

Words often Confounded either in Spelling, Pronuncia- 
tion or Meaning 

Words Spelled the Same, but Differently Accented 

Terminadons often Confounded 

Rules for Correct Spelling 

Roles for Capitalizadon 

Rules for Punctuation 

Words nsed in Business 

General Abbreviadont 

Ph>per Names 

Table of Diacridcal Marks, etc. 

In cases of introducdon we will deBrer this book 

nt 20^ discount^ 20 cents net per copy — and will take 
in exchange Spellers in use and make reasonable allow- 
smce for them. Ask us quesdons. 

HINDS & NOBLE, Publishers 
31-33-35 West 15TH Street, New York City 

Schoolhooks of all publishtrs at one store 



Who's Who in Mythology? 



Embarrassing, isn't it, when we mn across the name 
ef some god or goddess, in the daily paper, or in a poem, 
not to know? Or perhaps one just fails to enjoy perfectly 
a beautiful painting or engraving or piece of statuary, 
because ignorant of the myth implied. 

And how one's memory Sa piqued when one can't recall 
the story, though once familiar ! How the matter *' sticks 
in the mind," pestering us until it all comes back to us ; 
and then we're annoyed to think we couldn't recall the 
connection on the instant, and we wish there were some 
way to be saved all the potiier. 

Well, there is a way ! 

Just have at hand a convenient little book that gives 
ihe name of every god and goddess, or hero whose name 
b ever likely to be broached. Not a tome^ with encyclo- 
paedic fullness of description ! No ! But just an alpha- 
betical list, as it were, for ready reference, enabling one to 
find and locate the personage instanter ; and quite enough 
description to enable one to connect with the story — just 
enough to rescue one from seeming so distressingly ignor- 
ant ^ as if one had never even heard of Pallas or Aphrodite, 
or Thalia, or Ariadne. Can you tell as many, say, as 
four different but quite familiar names of Minerva ? 

Just such a book is published by the undersigned. The 
title of it is 

1000 MYTHOLOGICAL CHARACTERS 
BRIEFLY DESCRIBED 

It Is neatly bound in cloth ; is smallish, and of conve- 
nient shape. And 'tis not so very high-priced—- only 

SKVKNTY-PIVK CENTS POSTPAID 



HINDS & NOBLE, Publishers of 

SOOO dairieal AUasloiis Briefly Ezplatned 

I>oes for the placet, penons, and thiofs of antiquity what 
** Who*a Who *' does for the gods, the heroes, and the myths. 75 eCf. 

New York Qty 

Seho9th09k9 ^f»ilpuUMk0rtmi0me*t9re, 



" No hooks published this year wiU he more 
widely introduced into our Schools than Mrs, 
Dewefs Lessons on Manners, and Lessons on 
Morals, published by Hinds and Noble, New 
Tori.** Price 75 cents each. 

** Better adapted for use in our schools than 
any other books on the subject I have ever 
examined." 

** The didactical suggestions and illustrative 
incidents are so beautiRilly and harmoniously 
blended that the pupil is quite as pleased with 
die formal teaching as with the iUustradve 
examples." 

"The books should be given a place in every 
Grammar School^ High School, and Private 
School in the country." 

''The most practical rules on Morals and 
Manners that I nave found in any work on 
these subjects. I hope their influence may be 
widely extended." 

"It is the essence of Morals, and, in the 
hands of truly moral teachers, it will be a valu- 
able aid in developing the highest aim of educa- 
tion — a high moral character." 

"Books that are suggestive in matter, and 
well ordered and helpful in arrangement. The 
chapter on ' Manners in the School Room ' in 
the 'Lessons on Manners,' if well taught, will 
solve in advance many of the problems daily 
•rising in school discipline." 

Unsolicited Opinions. 



What Shall I Do? Na- 
ture does not give to the 
ordinary mortal a speci- 
fic label of his calling, 
but implants certain 
tendencies which are 



No one knows to well a> the 
teacher how dependent npon her 
counsel a large number of her 
pupils are, for their choice as 



to an occupation. 

The book has been compiled 
with two thoughts in mind— ^x) 
to turn the attention of the 
pupils toward their life>work; 
(a) to enable them to reach out 
into what might seem impossible 
without this detailed informer 
tion. Price $i.oo. 

Send for a sample copy. 



not so positive as sug- 
gestive. Sometimes the 
latent force lies asleep 
for years, until some- 
thing happens to call it 
forth. And then, as a 
rule, it is merely a bent, 
a bias which leads a 
man on, step by step, 
gives him as much en- 
couragement as he 
needs, but does not in 
its early stages assume 
the form of a positive 
vocation. It seems at first largely a matter of faith ; and 
thus the young disciple finds it hard to explain to others 
the inward urging which he feels toward some particular 
vocation ; and perhaps he is obliged to bear some criti- 
cism for his reluctant attitude toward other, perhaps more 
lucrative, callings. Even he himself will at times feel a 
sense of impotence and despair, and have fears that he is 
on a false trail. But again the suggestion — the whispers 
of a man's true vocation will be heard ; and in spite of 
himself he picks up the thread and presses onward. 

If parents would seek for their children, not that which 
seems best or most expedient for them to do, but that 
which they can do best, we should not have so many 
jaded, joyless workers. 

No one knows so well as the teacher how dependent 
upon her counsel a large majority of her pupils are for 
their choice as to an occupation. 

This book has been compiled with two thoughts in 
mind: — (i) to turn the attention of the pupils toward 
their life work ; (2) to enable them to reach out into what 
might seem impossible without this detailed information. 

Could any better book be placed in the hands of your 
pupils for supplementary reading, than this? Special 
discount for class supplies, 

HINDS & NOBLE, PdbfiihefB 
31-33-35 Wot 15th St New Yorfc Qty 



flWt strUs eomimms the anfy two-part Greek Ftrittm, 

Dictionaries 

Classic Seriea 

Eq)edall7 planned and carefully pcodnced to meet 
tiie tequirements of students and teachers in colleges. 
Ugh schools and academies. Modem scholarship, 
modem typography, moderi) arrangement. Beauti- 
fully legible, clear type. Durably bound in half morrocco 
In a style particularly attractive. Size 8x5^ inches. 

Gennan-Bnglieh— Bnglieh'-Oennan. 1112 pages. 

Price, $2.00. 
French-Bnglieh— English-Freiich. 1122 pages. 

Price, $2.00. 
Italian-Bnglish— English-Italian. 1187 pages. 

Price, $2.00. 
latin-English— Bnglish-Latin. 941 pages. 

Price, $2.00. 
9tsek-English— English-Qresk. 1056 pages. 




pai , _ 

English Lexicon* separate, liat cost as much or 
more than ihia two-part Lexicon. 

The English-Greek Dictionaryp 

being tlie Second Part of tlie above, bound scpai^ 
ately, but published at pMO, 

lleW"Testament Lexicon. 

Creek-EngHsh, An entirdy new work embodjriag 
notable improvements upon all similar works. 
Handy-vobane size. Price, $1.00. 

Dealing as we do exclusively in School and College 
Books, we have discovered a wide demand from Teachers 
aad the Student Public for a series of dictionaries* uniform 
la size, up to the times in point of contents, authoritative 
while modem as regards scholarship, instantly accessible 
In respect to arrangement, of best quality as to typography 
and imper, and in a binding at once elegant and dttraolc. 
Thai the volumes in this series are the best in all these rt» 
opects^ is attested ly their adoption and continued use bf 
muMlreds of the infllueniial colleges and preparatory schooa 
^this country and Canada, 

Hinds & Noble, Publishers 

3)-3^^ West ^fh Street Bew York Ciif 



To avoid fine, this bode should be returned on 
or before the date last stamped below 



lOM — •■40 



. r^ 



> > 



\